JP6331636B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a gaming board having a gaming area formed on the front surface mounted on a frame. Whether or not to make a transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state by winning a game ball that has been launched based on the player's launch operation in a ball-throwing unit provided in the gaming area Benefits such as such a lottery or game ball payout are given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In this type of gaming machine, by adopting a symbol display device that displays symbols in a variety of ways triggered by winning a prize in the pitching club, or a movable accessory that operates in accordance with the symbol's variation display, There is something that is aimed at improving the degree of attention. In particular, in recent years, it has become possible to produce more powerful impacts by increasing the size of the movable accessory.

JP 2003-190511 A

  However, in the gaming machine having the above-mentioned movable accessory, in order to improve the degree of attention to the game using the movable accessory, the structure, arrangement, etc., such as securing the operation region and the installation region of the movable accessory, etc. There is still room for improvement.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably exerting an effect of improving the degree of attention to a game by a movable accessory. .

  Hereinafter, means for solving the above problems will be described.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention described in claim 1
Provided with a pair of movable objects that can be opened and closed,
Each movable accessory has a fan surface portion formed so as to spread toward the front side of the gaming machine when the movable accessory is in an open state,
The fan surface portion is configured to expand so that one end and the other end in the opening and closing direction are shifted in the front-rear direction in the open state, and folded so as to overlap in the front-rear direction in the closed state,
Each movable combination is arranged so that the position in the front-rear direction is the same, and when the movable combination is in the open state, a first specific region including a front end of the fan surface portion of one movable combination and And the second specific region including the rear end of the fan surface portion of the other movable accessory is configured to overlap in the front-rear direction ,
A pattern display means provided on the rear of the movable accessory and having a display screen for performing a predetermined display effect,
When the movable accessory is in the open state, the movable accessory is arranged to overlap the display screen in the front-rear direction, and light from the display screen is irradiated to the front side of the gaming machine through the fan surface portion. And
The fan surface portion is formed with a bent portion that becomes a starting point when folded in accordance with the switching from the open state to the closed state, and has different orientations on both sides in the opening and closing direction across the bent portion. A flat part is formed,
At least one of both the flat portion, the the display screen and the non-parallel to Do characterized Rukoto when the movable won game is in the said open state.

  The effect of improving the degree of attention to the game by the movable accessory can be suitably exhibited.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a game board unit for every main structure. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is the schematic which shows the positional relationship of a game board and an effect unit. It is the schematic which shows the positional relationship of a game board and an effect unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is the schematic for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is the schematic which shows a distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for an operation port performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on a display effect. It is the schematic for demonstrating the aspect of the change display of a symbol. It is the schematic for demonstrating a re-change effect. It is the schematic for demonstrating a re-change effect. It is a schematic diagram for explaining a reservation notice effect. It is a schematic diagram for explaining a reservation notice effect. It is the schematic for demonstrating a roaring effect. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display control process performed in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation | variation start performed in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for jackpots performed with MPU of an effect control apparatus. (A) It is the schematic for demonstrating the last stop line table, (b) It is the schematic for demonstrating the table for re-variation. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for reach generation performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is the schematic which shows the stop result table for ineffective uniform production. It is a flowchart which shows the production | generation setting process for normal removal performed with MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for fluctuation | variation performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the fluctuation | variation completion performed in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the reservation notice performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the pending | holding command performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation notice control process performed in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the hold notice setting process performed in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot notice setting process performed in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice setting process for removal performed in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process for the reservation notice performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. (A) Schematic for explaining stop result table for normal hold notice, (b) Schematic for explaining stop result table for special hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process for replacement performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result correction process performed in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st correction process performed in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is the schematic which shows the table for correction. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd correction process performed in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd correction process performed in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice setting process for detachment performed by MPU of the presentation control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process for the reservation notice performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is the schematic for demonstrating the stage production in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot notice setting process performed in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice setting process for removal performed in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process for the reservation notice performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for reach performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for replacement performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd correction process performed in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd correction process performed in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is the schematic for demonstrating an overlap notice effect. It is the schematic for demonstrating an overlap notice effect. It is the schematic for demonstrating an overlap notice effect. It is the schematic for demonstrating an overlap notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the duplication advance notice setting process performed in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the correction process for duplication notice performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is the schematic which shows the table for correction. It is the schematic for demonstrating the relationship between the number of pending | holding information, and stage production. It is the schematic for demonstrating each holding notice effect in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic for demonstrating reach display. It is the schematic for demonstrating a middle symbol sequence stop result information table. It is the schematic for demonstrating the development point to super reach. It is a flowchart which shows the middle symbol sequence control processing at the time of reach performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process for the reservation notice performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is the schematic which shows a notice kind lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for reach performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result determination process for the 1st reservation notice performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result determination process for the 2nd reservation notice performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result determination process for the 3rd holding notice performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the stop location of a reach design, the development point to super reach, and a hold notice. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the stop location of a reach design, the development point to super reach, and a hold notice. It is the schematic which shows the various effect pattern tables in 5th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the stop location of a reach design, the development point of super reach, and a holding notice. It is a front view which shows the game board in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for fluctuation | variation performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for ball | bowl passage performed with MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a front view which shows the structure of the movable accessory apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a movable accessory apparatus. It is a front view which shows the structure of a 1st movable accessory. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the structure of a gear. It is the schematic which shows the positional relationship of an up-and-down movable accessory. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between an up-and-down movable accessory and the design of a display screen. It is the schematic which shows the stop mode of the symbol in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the stop mode of the symbol in 9th Embodiment. (A) Schematic which shows the game board in 10th Embodiment, (b) It is the elements on larger scale of a game board. (A) Back view of game board, (b) It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a game board and a movable accessory apparatus. (A) Schematic which shows the relationship between the game board and movable accessory apparatus in 11th Embodiment, (b) It is the XX partial sectional view of Fig.97 (a). It is the schematic which shows the operation | movement aspect of a movable accessory apparatus.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island facility of the game arcade.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A front door frame 14 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a gaming machine front view. It has become. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 is rotated on the left side and on the right side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. It can be rotated backward as a moving tip side.

  Note that the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the end of the rotating front end side, and has a function of making the gaming machine main body 12 locked to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened. In addition, the front door frame 14 has a function of being locked with respect to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. A window opening 56 is formed in the front door frame 14 so that almost the entire gaming area described later can be viewed from the front. The window opening 56 has a substantially elliptical shape and is fitted with a window panel 57 having transparency. Around the window opening 56, light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided. A light emitting unit 58 is provided above the window opening 56 as a part of various lamp units. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the light emitting unit 58, speaker units 59 that output sound effects corresponding to the gaming state are provided.

  Below the window opening 56 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 61 and a lower bulging portion 62 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper plate 61 a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 61, and a lower plate 62 a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 62. The upper plate 61a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 62a has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 61a.

  A firing handle 55 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 62 so as to protrude to the near side. When the firing handle 55 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 51 (see FIG. 2) mounted on the lower portion of the inner frame 13. The game ball launching mechanism 51 is provided with a launch solenoid 54 and a ball feed device 53 as drive units. When the launch handle 55 is operated, the launch solenoid 54 and the ball feed device 53 are in a drive state. A game ball is fired every 6 seconds.

<Game board unit 90>
A game board unit 90 is detachably attached to the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 90 includes a substantially flat game board 100 facing the window panel 57 through a central opening formed in the inner frame 13 (resin base 21), and a back surface of the game board 100. And an attached back block 160 (see FIG. 3). Here, the game board unit 90 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. 4 is a front view of the game board unit 90, and FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the game board unit 90. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back block 160 includes a symbol display device 161 and a movable accessory device 162 constituting the effect unit, and a base body 163 (see FIG. 3) on which the effect unit is mounted. By fixing the base body 163 to the game board 100, the game board 100 and the back block 160 are integrated. The game board 100 constituting the game board unit 90 is formed using a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material (specifically, polycarbonate resin). Through the game board 100, a part of the back block 160 (an effect unit such as the symbol display device 161). ) Is visible (see the broken line in FIG. 4). In FIG. 5, illustrations of the rear block 160 other than the effect unit are omitted.

<Game board 100>
Here, the game board 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the game board 100, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components exploded from the game board 100.

  As shown in FIG. 4, an inner rail member 101 and an outer rail member 102 that guide the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 51 to the upper part of the game board 100 are attached to the front surface of the game board 100. The rail members 101 and 102 have an arc shape, and the substantially circular area defined by the rail members 101 and 102 is the game area 103 described above. The game area 103 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window opening 56 (through the window panel 57). In addition, the symbol display device 161 is arranged so that the display screen G is positioned at the approximate center of the game area 103, and the visibility of the display screen G is secured through the game board 100.

  A plurality of large and small through holes penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in a portion of the game board 100 where the game area 103 is formed, and each of the through holes has a general winning port 113, a variable winning device 114, and an operating port 115. A through gate 116 and a center frame 130 are provided.

  If it explains supplementarily about arrangement | positioning of each member, the center frame 130 is provided in the approximate center of the game area | region 103 so that the display screen G of the symbol display apparatus 161 may be enclosed from the upper and lower sides. Below the center frame 130, an operating port 115 is arranged, and further below that, a variable winning device 114 is arranged. Further, through gates 116 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the center frame 130, and general winning holes 113 are arranged on both lower sides of the game area 103 (specifically, three are arranged on the left side and one is arranged on the right side). ing). When a game ball enters the general winning port 113, the variable winning device 114, and the operating port 115, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown), and a predetermined number of balls are placed in the upper plate 61a (in some cases, the lower plate 62a) based on the detection result. Prize balls are paid out.

  In addition, a special view display unit 117 and a general view display unit 118 are provided on the upper right side of the game area 103, and an out port 119 is provided at the lower end of the game area 103. The game balls that have not entered the various winning openings etc. are guided to the ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 119. In addition, a large number of nails 120, windmills 121, and the like are arranged in the game area 103 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls. Since the polycarbonate resin forming the game board 100 has a relatively high elasticity, a game ball is hit when the game ball collides with a nail 120 or the like driven on the surface or when the angle of the nail 120 is adjusted. The panel 100 has a configuration in which cracks and the like are unlikely to occur. Further, the length dimension of the screw for fixing the variable winning device 114 and the operation port 115 to the game board 100 and the length dimension of the nail 120 driven into the game board 100 are larger than the thickness dimension of the game board 100. The screw and the nail 120 are prevented from protruding to the back side of the game board 100.

  Here, “entering” means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only a mode of discharging from the game area 103 after passing through the opening but also a game area 103 after passing through the opening. The aspect which is not discharged | emitted from is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 119, the game ball entering the general game port 113, the variable game device 114, the operation port 115 or the through gate 116 will be described. Also expressed as a prize.

  The game board 100 is provided with a special figure display unit 117 in which LEDs of three colors emitting red, green and blue are incorporated. The special figure display unit 117 is electrically connected to the main control device 81, and the emission color is switched in a predetermined order with a winning at the operation port 115 as a trigger. Specifically, red light is turned on with a winning at the operation port 115 as a trigger, and the emission color is switched to green light when a predetermined time elapses in this state. Then, when the predetermined time elapses with the green light turned on, the emission color is switched to blue light. Thereafter, the emission color is repeatedly switched in the order of red, green, and blue until the emission color switching stop time comes. As a result, red, green, and blue are repeatedly displayed in this order on the special figure display unit 117. When the jackpot is won, red or green is finally stopped, and when the jackpot is not won, blue is finally stopped.

  In this embodiment, multiple types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage are set, and when a relatively advantageous jackpot is won, it is finally stopped in red and a relatively unfavorable jackpot If you win, you will eventually be stopped in green.

  The variable winning device 114 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is switched to an open state in which a game ball can be won when winning the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery. . Incidentally, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted when a big win is won. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 114, the variable winning device 114 is repeated with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. What is opened is common. The display of the result of the internal lottery in the special figure display unit 117 is continued until the internal lottery is further performed thereafter. That is, during the opening / closing execution mode, the display of the result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is continued.

  It should be noted that the closed state of the variable winning device 114 does not necessarily have to be incapable of winning, and may be in a state in which winning is more difficult than in the open state. In consideration of such circumstances, the open state can be referred to as a “first state”, and the closed state can be referred to as a “second state” in which entry is more difficult than in the first state.

  In addition, the display mode in the special figure display unit 117 is not limited to the above mode, for example, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, and a plurality of types of characters vary. A displayed configuration or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed may be employed.

  The game board 100 is provided with a general-purpose display unit 118 in which red and green two-color light emitting type LED lamps are incorporated. The normal display unit 118 is electrically connected to the main control device 81, and the emission color is switched in a predetermined order using a winning (passing) of a game ball to the through gate 116 as a trigger. Specifically, when the game ball wins the through gate 116, the lighting of red light and the lighting of green light are alternately performed. As a result, the common map display unit 118 displays red and green alternately. And when red is stopped and displayed, it is comprised so that the electrically-driven accessory which accompanies the operating port 115 will be in an open state only for the predetermined time.

  The center frame 130 includes a roof frame 131 that forms the upper part of the center frame 130 and a stage frame 140 that forms the lower part of the center frame 130. The roof frame 131 and the stage frame 140 are made of a transparent material such as acrylic resin. The roof frame 131 is disposed above the display screen G, the stage frame 140 is disposed below the display screen G, and the display screen G is sandwiched between the frames 131 and 140 in a front view of the gaming machine.

  The entire roof frame 131 has a groove shape that is opened rearward, and is fixed to the game board 100 so that a rearward opening portion is closed and a front-side ball passage 134 is formed. The front-side sphere passage 134 is formed on the left and right with an opening 135 formed in the upper portion of the roof frame 131 as an entrance. The roof frame 131 is opened downward, and the game ball that has passed through the front-side ball passage 134 falls downward. Further, the upper surface of the roof frame 131 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the left and right sides, and a game ball flowing down the game area 103 enters the front side ball passage 134 from the opening 135 of the roof frame 131 or the roof frame 131. Depending on the inclination of the display screen G, the display screen G is distributed to the left and right, and then flows down.

  In the game board 100, below the roof frame 131, ball receiving portions 132 that project forward are formed on the left and right. The ball receiving portion 132 plays a role of receiving a game ball that flows from left to right by the upper surface of the roof frame 131 and flows down. A through hole is formed in the game board 100 in the front-rear direction so as to communicate with the ball receiving part 132, and the game ball received by the ball receiving part 132 is led out to the rear side of the game board 100 through the through hole.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the stage frame 140 includes a front stage member 141 and a rear stage member 142, both of which are assembled through a through hole formed in the game board 100. The front stage member 141 is opened in the front-rear direction, whereas the rear stage member 142 has a groove shape that is entirely opened forward. Open portions of the left and right side portions of the rear stage member 142 are closed by the back surface of the game board 100, and a back side ball passage 143 is formed. The left and right upstream portions of the back side ball passage 143 communicate with the through holes from the ball receiving portion 132, respectively, and the game balls received by the ball receiving portion 132 are led to the back side ball passage 143. The Further, the front stage member 141 and the rear stage member 142 form a stage 144 on which the game ball that has passed through the back side ball passage 143 rolls in the left-right direction.

  Here, the above-described ball receiving portion 132 is disposed outward from the roof frame 131 when viewed from the center of the game board 100 (see FIG. 4). In other words, the game ball derived from the front side ball passage 134 of the roof frame 131 does not reach the ball receiving portion 132 even if it drops as it is approximately vertically. On the other hand, a large number of nails 120 are planted below the stage 144, and the game balls led out from the front side ball passage 134 bounce back to the nails 120 planted below the stage 144, It is also possible to jump on the stage 144.

  A rear guide portion 145 is formed at the center of the stage 144, and a front guide portion 146 is formed so as to sandwich the rear guide portion 145. The game ball that has been sufficiently decelerated to reach the rear guide portion 145 is guided to the guide portion 147 formed on the rear stage member 142 and is discharged from the guide portion 147 into the game area 103. In this case, the outlet of the guide portion 147 is positioned vertically above the operation port 115, and no obstructing member such as the nail 120 is disposed between them. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the guiding portion 147 can easily enter the operation port 115. On the other hand, the game ball that has been sufficiently decelerated to reach the front guide portion 146 is discharged into the game area 103 as it is.

  The movement of the game ball in the center frame 130 will be briefly described. A part of the game ball distributed to the left and right by the roof frame 131 is received by either the left or right ball receiving portion 132 and reaches the back side ball passage 143. . The game ball that has reached the back side ball passage 143 passes through the back side ball passage 143 and reaches the stage 144. The game ball that has entered the front side ball passage 134 from the opening 135 of the roof frame 131 passes through the front side ball passage 134, falls on the front surface of the display screen G, and collides with the nail 120. To reach. The game ball that has reached the stage 144 rolls left and right on the stage 144. As a result of the rolling, the game ball that has reached the rear guide part 145 is guided toward the operation port 115 by passing through the guide part 147. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the front guide portion 146 is discharged into the game area 103 without being guided toward the operation port 115.

  In the above configuration, the game balls that are launched into the game area 103 and enter the general prize opening 113, the variable prize winning device 114, and the operation opening 115 pass through the through holes formed in the game board 100 to the back side of the game board 100. Led to. The variable winning device 114, the operation opening 115, and the stage frame 140 of the center frame 130 protrude rearward from the back of the game board 100 (see FIG. 6), but as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. A predetermined space is secured between the display unit 100 and the effect unit (the symbol display device 161 and the movable accessory device 162), and interference between the variable prize device 114 and the like projecting rearward and the effect unit is avoided. .

  Hereinafter, the effect units (the symbol display device 161 and the movable accessory device 162) mounted on the rear block 160 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Back block 160>
As shown in FIG. 8, the symbol display device 161 and the movable accessory device 162 are arranged side by side so that the movable accessory device 162 is on the front side and the symbol display device 161 is on the rear side. That is, from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the game board 100, the movable accessory device 162, and the symbol display device 161 are arranged in this order. The symbol display device 161 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content of the display screen G is controlled by a display control device described later. In the symbol display device 161, the symbol variation display is started based on the winning in the operation port 115. That is, when variable display is performed in the special figure display unit 117, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 161 accordingly.

  The symbol display device 161 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and a dot matrix display. It may be a vessel.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the symbol display device 161 is a so-called wide liquid crystal, and its display screen G has a horizontally long shape. The movable combination device 162 has four movable combinations 170 to 173 arranged at the four corners of the display screen G. That is, the movable accessory device 162 includes a first movable accessory 170 disposed at the upper right portion of the display screen G, a second movable accessory 171 disposed at the lower right portion of the display screen G, and the upper left portion of the display screen G. And a fourth movable accessory 173 disposed in the lower left part of the display screen G.

  As shown in FIG. 9, each movable accessory 170 to 173 includes a shielding position (shielding state, first position) that overlaps the display screen G in the front-rear direction, and a non-shielding position (non-shielding) that does not overlap the display screen G in the front-rear direction. And the second position) are individually movable. Since the movable accessories 170 to 173 are made of a colored and opaque synthetic resin material, the display contents of the display screen G behind the display screen G can be obtained by arranging the movable combinations 170 to 173 at the shielding position where the movable combinations 170 to 173 overlap with the display screen G. It becomes invisible or difficult.

  The movable accessory device 162 is provided with driving units 170a to 173a in a one-to-one correspondence with the movable accessories 170 to 173. The drive units 170a to 173a are electrically connected to an effect control device 82, which will be described later, and operate the movable accessories 170 to 173 by driving based on a drive signal from the effect control device 82. In the production control device 82, the drive units 170a to 173a are driven and controlled in accordance with the state of the gaming state, and the production is performed by changing the visibility range of the display content of the display screen G behind.

  For the movable accessory device 162, it is sufficient if the visible range on the display screen G can be changed. That is, it is only necessary to be able to move to the first position where the area where the display screen G and the movable accessories 170 to 173 overlap in the front-rear direction is large and the second position where the area where they overlap is smaller.

  As described above, the movable accessory device 162 is arranged between the game board 100 and the symbol display device 161, and an area sandwiched between the game board 100 and the symbol display device 161 is an operation area of the movable actors 170 to 173. It has become. As described above, the game board 100 is formed of a colorless and transparent member, and the visibility of the movable accessories 170 to 173 and the symbol display device 161 which are members behind the gaming board 100 is ensured. Therefore, in the game board 100, a through hole is not formed in a region overlapping the movable combination objects 170 to 173 in the front-rear direction so as to ensure the visibility of the movable combination items 170 to 173 (game to the back side ball passage 143). Only the through-hole leading out the sphere is formed). In this case, a through hole for ensuring visibility is not formed, and the game board 100 is always interposed between the game area 103 and the movable accessories 170 to 173. Thereby, while suppressing the fall of the visibility of the movable actors 170 to 173, the game balls collide with the movable actors 170 to 173, the trajectory of the game balls flowing down, or the movable actors 170 to 173 are changed. The occurrence of inconvenience that the operation of 173 is hindered by the game ball is avoided.

  In particular, in the gaming machine in which a player can obtain a privilege by causing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter a predetermined opening, such as the pachinko machine 10, the game machine is irregular depending on the game situation. When a game ball collides with an accessory that performs various actions and the trajectory of the flow changes, the player may have distrust in the game. Therefore, in general, in the case of a configuration including an accessory that performs an irregular operation, a configuration that operates outside the game area on the front surface of the game board, and a through hole provided in front of the liquid crystal screen on the game board In general, a structure in which a center frame is incorporated in the through-hole to restrict the invasion of game balls into the inner region from the center frame and the above-mentioned accessory is operated in the inner region is common. In this case, since the size of the gaming machine is limited in the former case, the game area becomes narrower if an attempt is made to secure an operation area for an accessory or the like, and conversely, if the game area is intended to be secured a wider area. There may be a problem that an operation area of an object or the like becomes narrow. In the latter case, with the recent increase in the size of the liquid crystal screen, the center frame tends to increase in size as well, and as a result, there may arise a problem that the game area where game balls can flow down becomes narrow. On the other hand, by adopting a configuration like the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to avoid a collision between the game ball and the movable actors 170 to 173 regardless of how the movable actors 170 to 173 operate. Further, in the game area 103, the game ball can flow down to the area overlapping with the operation area of the movable actors 170 to 173 in the front-rear direction. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10, an improvement in the rendering function by the accessory operation is realized while sufficiently securing the moving range of the game ball.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the base body 163 of the game board unit 90), there is a main control device 81 that controls the main control of the game, voice and lamp display, and a symbol display device 161. An effect control device 82 that controls the display control device is mounted.

  The substrate box 71a of the main control device 81 is provided with various trace means for leaving a trace of the opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 71a are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer is attached to the object at the time of peeling. A configuration is adopted in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left is pasted so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies.

  The back pack unit 15 is arranged so as to cover the main control device 81 and the effect control device 82 from the back side of the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 73 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism 74 and a control device assembly unit 75 are attached to the back pack 73.

  The payout mechanism unit 74 includes a tank 76 in which game balls supplied from island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 96 for paying out game balls stored in the tank 76. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 61a or the lower plate 62a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. The payout mechanism 74 is provided with a back pack substrate having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply, for example, while supplying a main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device collective unit 75 generates and outputs a payout control device 97 having a function of controlling the payout device 96 and a predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, and a game associated with the operation of the launch handle 55 by the player And a power source / launch control device 98 that controls the launch of the ball. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / launch control device 98 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. The RAM 204 is an element incorporating an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 202, for example, the function of the ROM 203 and the function of the RAM 204 may be provided as separate elements.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 81, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211d, and the like are connected. In this case, a power / fire control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. In addition, as a part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211d, a plurality of winning winning entry portions (payout corresponding entry portions) such as a general winning opening 113, a variable winning device 114, an operation opening 115, a through gate 116, and the like are provided. A detection sensor is connected, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 performs a winning determination (entrance determination) to each winning part. In addition, the MPU 202 executes a jackpot generation lottery based on a winning at the operation port 115 and also executes a support generation lottery based on a winning at the through gate 116.

  On the output side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an effect control device 82 are connected. For example, the payout control device 97 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. When a winning to the general winning opening 113 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 114 is specified, 15 winning balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to paying out a game ball is output and a winning to the operation port 115 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out three gaming balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the effect control device 82. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable prize driving unit 114a that opens and closes the opening / closing door of the variable prize winning device 114, an electric combination driving unit 115a that opens and closes an electric combination of the operating port 115, a special figure display unit 117, A general-purpose display unit 118 is connected. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 202 performs drive control of the variable winning drive unit 114a so that the variable winning device 114 is opened and closed. In addition, when the electric combination of the operating port 115 is elected, the MPU 202 executes drive control of the electric combination driving unit 115a so that the electric combination is opened and closed. Further, the display control of the special figure display unit 117 and the general map display unit 118 described above is executed by the MPU 202.

  The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power / fire control device 98, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control device 98. The payout control device 97 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power source / launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 201 and the payout control device 97, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. The power source / launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 51, and the game ball launch mechanism 51 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 while driving and controlling the light emitting portion 58 and the speaker portion 59 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 81. .

  The display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 161 based on the command input from the effect control device 82. In this case, in the production control device 82, based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the variation display pattern of the symbol on the symbol display device 161 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed are determined. The lottery of the presence / absence of reach and the contents of reach production is executed.

  Here, the contents related to the variable display of the symbols of each game time will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 11 and 12.

  The display control device 212 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, nine types of main symbol data (refer to FIGS. 11 (a) to (i)) with numbers “1” to “9” and sub symbol data without numbers. (See FIG. 11J) is stored in advance.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 161, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the upper, middle and lower stages are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity.

  In the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols.

  The display screen G shown in the present embodiment is a variable display area of Z1 to Z3, which is substantially the entire area, and the variable display area is a target to be shielded by the movable accessory device 162 as shown in FIG. Area (hereinafter referred to as sub display area Rs) and an area that is not a shielding target (main display area Rm). The left and right sides sandwiching the main display area Rm in the variable display direction (left and right direction) are sub display areas Rs. Specifically, the center 3/5 in the display screen G is the main display area Rm, and the other (right 1/5 and 1/5 left) are set as the sub display area Rs.

  A supplementary explanation of the relationship between the display screen G and each movable accessory 170 to 173 will be given. In the situation where each movable accessory 170 to 173 is disposed at the shielding position, the main display area Rm can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The display area Rs is difficult or impossible to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, in a situation where each movable accessory 170 to 173 is arranged at the non-shielding position, both the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are visible from the front of the gaming machine.

  In addition, since each movable accessory 170-173 is moved to the shielding position and the non-shielding position individually, the left and right sub display areas Rs can be individually switched between the shielding state and the non-shielding state. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the right sub display area Rs is distinguished as the right sub display area Rs1, and the left sub display area Rs is distinguished as the left sub display area Rs2.

  As shown in FIG. 12B, on the display screen G, 5 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 15 symbols of 3 × 5 are stopped and displayed. It is like that. Among these, in the main display area Rm, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. In addition, a total of 6 symbols of 1 × 3 × 2 are stopped and displayed in the left and right sub display areas Rs1 and Rs2, respectively. In the pachinko machine 10, five effective lines and six ineffective lines are set in accordance with the 15 symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen G.

  Specifically, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lower line L4, and a right upper line L5 are set in the main display region Rm. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the variation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the probability variation jackpot result.

  The ineffective lines L6, L9 set in the sub display area Rs, and the ineffective lines L7, L8, L10, L11 set so as to straddle the sub display area Rs and the main display area Rm It is constituted by. Specifically, a right ineffective line L6 is set in the right sub display area Rs1, and a right lower right line L7 and a right upper right line L8 extend across the right sub display area Rs1 and the main display area Rm. Is set. Further, a left ineffective line L9 is set in the left sub display area Rs2, and a left lower right line L10 and a left upper right line L11 are set across the left sub display area Rs2 and the main display area Rm. Has been. These ineffective lines L6 to L11 are lines used in the production of the pachinko machine 10, and the game result is notified by the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5 (main display area Rm). The

  Explaining the positional relationship with each movable accessory 170 to 173, in a situation where the first movable accessory 170 on the upper right is arranged at the shielding position, a symbol that is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the right ineffective line L6, A part of the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle stage is covered with the first movable accessory 170, and the visual confirmation of these symbols is hindered. Further, in a situation where the lower left second movable accessory 171 is disposed at the shielding position, the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the lower side of the right ineffective line L6 and a part of the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the middle are the first. 2 It will be covered with the movable accessory 171 and the visual confirmation of these symbols will be hindered.

  That is, the symbol stopped and displayed on the upper stage in the right side sub-display area Rs1 becomes visible when the first movable accessory 170 moves from the shielding position to the non-shielding position, and the symbol stopped and displayed on the lower stage is the second movable symbol. The accessory 171 can be visually recognized by moving from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. In addition, the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the middle stage can be visually recognized as the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 move from the shielding position to the non-shielding position.

  In the left sub display area Rs2, the positional relationship between the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the movable accessories 172 and 173 is the same, and the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the upper side of the left ineffective line L9 are as follows. The third movable accessory 172 in the upper left becomes visible by moving from the shielding position to the non-shielding position, and the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the lower stage moves the fourth movable accessory 173 in the lower left from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. It will be visible. In addition, the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the middle stage can be visually recognized as the third movable accessory 172 and the fourth movable accessory 173 move from the shield position to the non-shield position.

  Describing the relationship between the ineffective lines L6 to L11 and the movable combination objects 170 to 173, the right ineffective line L6 is that the first movable combination 170 and the second movable combination object 171 move from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. It becomes visible. The right lowering line L7 becomes visible when the second movable accessory 171 moves from the shield position to the non-shielding position, and the right right upward line L8 is the first movable accessory 170 from the shield position to the non-shielding position. It becomes visible by moving. The left ineffective line L9 becomes visible when the third movable accessory 172 and the fourth movable accessory 173 move from the shield position to the non-shield position. The left lower right line L10 becomes visible when the third movable accessory 172 moves from the shield position to the non-shield position, and the left right upward line L11 is the fourth movable accessory 173 from the shield position to the non-shield position. It becomes visible by moving.

  In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). 2 symbol rows), the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or third symbol row).

  Among the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and if a probabilistic jackpot result occurs, The combination is stopped. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. The

  It should be noted that the display mode of the symbol variation on the symbol display device 161 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. For example, a plurality of symbol sequences may be set to be arranged side by side, and the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence may be set to the vertical direction. In this case, the arrangement of each movable accessory 170 to 173 may be changed in accordance with the number of symbol rows or the direction of symbol variation.

<About various counters>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 202 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the special symbol display unit 117, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 161, setting of display of the general symbol display unit 118, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 161 are changed. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of jackpot random number counter C1, and variation type for determining display duration in special figure display unit 117 and symbol display unit 161 The counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory of the operating port 115 is in the electric utility open state (support state) is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. Among these, in the lottery counter buffer 231, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the RAM 204 as an acquisition information storage means when a winning to the operation port 115 occurs. Stored in the reserved ball storage area 232.

  The holding ball storage area 232 includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In accordance with the winning history to the operating port 115, the lottery counter buffer The stored combination of numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the operation port 115 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area RE2 → the third reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four game balls winning histories to the operation port 115 are held and stored. In addition, the holding area RE includes a holding number storage area NA, and information for specifying the number of the payout history stored in the operation port 115 is stored in the holding number storage area NA. .

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 117, and starting one game time At this time, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C <b> 4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 116. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric combination of the operating port 115 to the electric combination open state (support state) based on the stored value of the electric combination release counter C4.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric combination of the operation port 115 are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation in which a game ball is continuously launched in the same manner with respect to the game area 103, the electric combination of the operating port 115 is in an open state per unit time. The low-frequency support mode (or the low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (or the high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency becomes relatively high.

  In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric combination of the operating port 115 is set to the open state when the electrified open state is elected is set more than in the low-frequency support mode. It is set long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric combination open state is won and the electric combination of the operating port 115 is released a plurality of times, the next open state is started after the completion of one open state. The closing time until is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., the next time that the electric component opening lottery is performed after the first electric component opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode (that is, The one-time display continuation time in the general-purpose display unit 118 is set short.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a winning for the operation port 115 occurs is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. When a winning is made to the operation port 115, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while suppressing the consumption (investment) of the ball. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in In addition, a secured time (for example, in the general map display unit 118 based on a winning to the through gate 116) secured after the next electrification opening lottery is performed after the first electrification opening lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It may be. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the first electric character releasing lottery is shortened, Even if the advantage of the high frequency support mode is increased by applying any one condition or any combination of the conditions for shortening the average time of the reservation time and increasing the winning probability, Good.

  Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 115.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 221 as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, as the success / failure table, the success / failure table for low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) in FIG. 14 (a) and the success / failure table for high probability mode (high) in FIG. 14 (b). Probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the low-probability mode winning / failing table is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), the value of the random number for winning the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, there are 21 random number values for winning the jackpot. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 29) and then returns to 0. The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 115.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 222 as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. In the allocation table, as shown in FIG. 14B, a normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding special game result) and a probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding special game result) are set as allocation destinations of game results. ing.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the normal jackpot state (special gaming state corresponding to low probability).

  The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big hit state by that. In other words, the probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation jackpot state (the special gaming state corresponding to high probability).

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C <b> 3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 115. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the holding area RE of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball is won in the operation port 115. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203, it is determined whether to generate a reach. However, in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) is a game that includes a symbol display device 161 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and is in the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 114. In the gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display becomes a special display result, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 161. This means a display state for making the player think that the display state is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result in the previous stage.

  In other words, a reach symbol combination in which a jackpot symbol combination may be established by stopping and displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 161. This is a display state in which a combination is displayed and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of symbols, a reach symbol for which a combination of jackpot symbols may be established on a preset active line in the display screen G of the symbol display device 161 is displayed. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the combination, and a symbol change display is performed by the final stop symbol row in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display mode at the time of the reach display will be illustrated with reference to FIG. In the case of reach display, the symbol variation display is first terminated (stopped display) in the upper symbol row Z1, and the symbol variation display is terminated (stopped display) in the lower symbol row Z3. In the state, the reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. Then, in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2 to achieve reach display. When shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are displayed in such a manner that the main symbols having the same numbers as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line. The change display of is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, reach display is not performed on the ineffective lines L6 to L11. However, the reach display may be performed on the ineffective lines L6 to L11.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. Reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G or substantially the entire main display region Rm after the effect or the combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden. Includes what to do. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 202 determines the variation display time in the special symbol display unit 117 and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 161. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the symbol display device 161 determines the variation pattern at the start of symbol variation.

  When determining the fluctuation display time in the symbol display device 161, the buffer values of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 are referred to. The MPU 202 determines the stop result in the special figure display unit 117 using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. The stop result table storage area 224 is used.

<Various processes executed by main controller 81>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 202 in the main controller 81 advances the game in each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 202 executes a main process that is started when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, reading processing of various winning detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 81 is read, the state of the winning detection sensor is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  Then, after the winning opening process for the operating opening accompanying the winning to the operating opening 115 is executed in step S104, and after the winning winning process for winning accompanying the winning to the through gate 116 is executed in step S105, this timer End interrupt processing. In the through winning process, if a winning to the through gate 116 has occurred, the number of stored item holdings stored in the electronic combination holding area 233 is less than the upper limit number (for example, “4”). On the condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric utility reservation area 233.

  Here, the winning process for the operation port in step S104 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the winning process for the operating port, first, in step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the operating port 115. If the game ball has not won a prize in the operation port 115, the winning process is terminated as it is. If the game ball has won the operating hole 115, in step S202, the value stored in the reserved number storage area NA of the reserved ball storage area 232 is read, and the start stored in the reserved area RE is stored. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls N is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment).

  If the number N of starting reserved balls is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the main winning process is terminated as it is. If the number N of starting reserved balls is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S203, and the number N of starting reserved balls is incremented (added) by one. In the following step S204, the values (each numerical information) of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS updated in the previous step S103 are used as the free holding area of the holding area RE. Stored in the first reserved area among RE1 to RE4, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by 1 in step S203.

  In the subsequent step S205, a confirmation process for holding notice for executing an effect based on the winning of the game ball in the operation port 115 is executed. Then, in step S206, a holding command setting process for causing the effect control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that a game ball has been won at the operation port 115 is executed, and then a winning for the operation port is performed. The process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, each process of steps S301 to S306 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps S308 and S309 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S301, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. In addition, when an effect command such as a change command, a type command, an end of change command, and various hold commands is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 82.

  Next, in step S302, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In a succeeding step S303, various signals from the payout control device 97 connected to the MPU 202 are read. Thereafter, in step S304, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In this game times control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 161, display control of the special symbol display unit 117, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S305, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In step S <b> 306, an electric combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination provided in the operation port 115 is executed. In this electronic combination support process, whether or not the electric combination of the operating port 115 is opened using numerical information acquired from the electric combination release counter C4 stored in the electric combination holding area 233 of the RAM 204 is determined. In addition to performing the electrification opening lottery, the opening / closing process of the electrical accessory at the operation port 115 is executed when the electrification opening state win is achieved. In addition, display control of the general map display unit 118 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric character release lottery.

  As already described, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as the mode of support by the electric accessory of the operation port 115, and any one of the support modes is changed in the gaming state transition process in step S305. Transition takes place. In this case, when the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204, the high frequency support mode is set, and when the flag is not stored, the low frequency support mode is set.

  In the electric power support process in step S306, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204. And in the case of the high frequency support mode, when the electrification opening state is elected more than in the case of the low frequency support mode, while setting the number of times that the electric combination of the operating port 115 is opened, Set a long open time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric utility open state is selected and the electric appliance at the operating port 115 is opened several times, the next open state is not completed after the completion of one open state. The closing time until the start is set to be shorter than one opening time.

  Incidentally, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, even if the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode.

  In the subsequent step S307, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps S308 and S309). That is, in step S308, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In step S309, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S301 to S306 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, in the game times control process, it is first determined in step S401 whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. When in the open / close execution mode, the process after step S402, that is, the game times start process at steps S403 to S405 and the game time progression process at steps S406 to S409 are not executed. The control process ends.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the special figure display unit 117 is in a variable display. If the special figure display unit 117 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S403 to S405. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S403, it is determined whether or not the number N of starting reserved balls is “0”. The case where the starting reserved ball number N is “0” means that the holding information is not stored in the holding ball storage area 232. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is.

  If the number N of starting reserved balls is not “0”, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 232 for variable display is executed in step S404.

  In the data setting process, first, 1 is subtracted from the number N of starting reserved balls. In addition, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE in the holding ball storage area 232 is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed.

  This data shift processing is processing for sequentially shifting data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side. As a result, the data in the first reserved area RE1 is cleared, and the second reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3, and so on. The data in each area is shifted accordingly.

  Further, in the data setting process, a command at the time of shifting (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the effect control device 82 as the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. The shift command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the normal output external output process (step S301). In the production control device 82, processing corresponding to the decrease in the number of holdings is executed based on the received shift command.

  After executing the data setting process, after executing the fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the special figure display unit 117 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 161 in step S405, the game number control process is ended. .

  Here, the fluctuation start process will be described. In the change start process, as shown in FIG. 19, first, in step S501, a hit / no-go determination process for determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the current change start process corresponds to a big win is executed. Specifically, the information acquired from the information for jackpot determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, when the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to the jackpot winning with reference to the winning table for the low probability mode in the ROM 203. When the lottery mode is the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to the jackpot winning with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table in the ROM 203.

  In a succeeding step S502, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in the step S501 is a result corresponding to the big win. If the result corresponds to the big win, the type determination process is executed in step S503.

  In the type determination process, the information acquired from the information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information updated by the big hit type counter C2 is grasped. Further, the distribution table in the ROM 203 is referred to, and it is specified whether or not the above-described grasped type determination information is included in the information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result.

  In subsequent step S504, based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S503, it is determined whether or not the type of the current big hit winning is a probable big hit result. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for probability variation jackpot is executed in step S505, and if it is not a probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed in step S506. If it is determined in step S502 that it is not a big win, a stop result setting process for losing is executed in step S507.

  In each stop result setting process in step S505 to step S507, information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 117 is specified from information stored in advance in the ROM 203, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. To remember. Further, in step S505 and step S506, information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the determination result of whether or not this game is successful is a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 ( The information “1” is stored in the corresponding area). Specifically, the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in step S505, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in step S506.

  After executing any one of steps S505 to S507, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S508.

  In the variation display time setting process, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 231 of the RAM 204 is acquired. Further, it is determined whether or not reach display is generated in the symbol display device 161 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the current variation is any jackpot result, it is determined that reach display occurs. Even if it is not any jackpot result, if the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that the reach display occurs. .

  When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the reach generation fluctuation display time table stored in the ROM 203, and the fluctuation Display time information is stored in a variable display time counter provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the variable display time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence variable display time table stored in the ROM 203. The fluctuation display time information is stored in the fluctuation display time counter. Incidentally, the variable display time that can be acquired with reference to the non-reach generation variable display time table is different from the variable display time that can be acquired with reference to the reach generation variable display time table.

  Here, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display and a super reach display having different display modes. The variable display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set in the variable display time table for reach generation. By referring to the table, the variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is set. To be acquired. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, a table is provided in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS. By referring to the table, the value of the current variation type counter CS is determined. The corresponding reach display is determined.

  The variable display time information when no reach occurs is set so that the variable display time is shortened as the number N of starting reserved balls increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach time is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected compared to the situation where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. The generation variation display time table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the variable display time does not vary according to the number N of starting reserved balls and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of each jackpot result, a variable display time table may be set individually for each of the case of outlier reach and the case of a non-reach outlier result. In this case, the variable display time is allocated according to each game result.

  The variable display time information when no reach occurs is set so that the variable display time is shorter than the variable display time when a reach occurs. Further, the variable display time information in the normal reach display is set so that the variable display time is shorter than the variable display time in the super reach display. That is, each of the above variable display time information is set so that the variable display time becomes longer in the order of no reach occurrence <normal reach display <super reach display.

  As described above, the variation display time of each game time is determined by using the presence / absence of reach, the type of reach display, the number of hold information, and the value of the variation type counter CS as parameters. However, the variable display time of each game time is the content of other hold information, specifically, jackpot determination information, type determination information and reach determination information included in the other hold information as parameters. Decided without.

  After the variable display time setting process is executed in step S508, a variable command and a type command are set in step S509. The change command includes information on the change display time. Here, as described above, the fluctuation display time acquired with reference to the non-reach occurrence fluctuation display time table is different from the display duration acquired with reference to the reach occurrence fluctuation display time table. Even if the information on the presence / absence of reach has not been included in the command, the production control device 82 as the sub-side control device can specify the presence / absence of reach from the information on the variable display time. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command includes game result information. That is, the type command includes information on the normal jackpot result, information on the probability variation jackpot result, or information on the miss result as information on the game result.

  The variation command and type command set in step S509 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 17). After executing the processing of step S509, the variation display of the pattern is started in the special figure display unit 117 in step S510, and then the variation start processing is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 18), when the special figure display unit 117 is in the variable display mode, the game times progress process of steps S406 to S409 is executed. In the game times progression process, first, in step S406, it is determined whether or not the current game times change display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 is “0”. The value of the variable display time information is stored in the variable display time setting process (step S508) as described above. Further, the value of the stored variable display time information is decremented (subtracted) every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S407. In the variable display process, the display mode in the special figure display unit 117 is changed. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S408. In the variation end process, the information stored in the RAM 204 in any one of the processes in steps S505 to S507 is specified, and the special pattern display unit 117 displays the pattern form corresponding to the information. Display control of the figure display unit 117 is performed.

  In the subsequent step S409, a change end command is set. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished. The variation end command set in step S409 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 17). By receiving the received change end command, the effect control device 82 displays the final stop symbol combination corresponding to the result of the game times in the variable display by the symbol display device 161 (final stop display).

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game state transition process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S602, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 117 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the normal jackpot flag or the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, “15” is stored in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S604. The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the variable winning device 114 is opened. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, a special winning opening / closing process is executed. In the big prize opening / closing process, when the variable winning device 114 is closed, the variable winning drive unit 114a is set in the driving state on condition that the round counter area RC is “1” or more. The device 114 is opened. Further, when the variable winning device 114 is being opened, variable winning driving is performed on the condition that a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the variable winning device 114 or a predetermined number of game balls have been won. The driving state of the section 114a is stopped, and the variable winning device 114 is closed.

  In a succeeding step S606, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter area RC is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. If the value of the round counter area RC is “0”, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S607.

  In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, when the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win is won. In addition, when the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode is terminated when the number of game times continues 100 times, and thereafter, the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, in step S608, after executing the opening / closing execution mode end processing, the gaming state transition processing ends. In the opening / closing execution mode end processing, the stored flag is erased from the normal jackpot flag or the probability variation jackpot flag.

<Electric Configurations of Effect Control Device 82 and Display Control Device 212>
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 21, a supplementary description will be given of the electrical configurations of the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212.

  An MPU 242 is mounted on the effect control board 241 provided in the effect control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a RAM 244 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 243. It is an element with built-in interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, etc. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as various hold commands and shift commands are received. In addition, a game time control command (game time control information) such as a change command, a type command, and a change end command is received. Also, an open / close execution mode command (open / close execution mode information) such as an opening command and an ending command is received.

  As described above, the light emitting unit 58 and the speaker unit 59 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242, and the display control device 212 is connected. Further, driving units 170 a to 173 a for the movable accessories 170 to 173 of the movable accessory device 162 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242. In the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82, based on the various commands received from the main control device 81, the variation display pattern (effect pattern) and the symbol stop result of each game time are determined, and the light emitting unit 58, the speaker unit 59, and the drive are determined. The drive control of the units 170a to 173a is performed, and the determined content is transmitted to the display control device 212 as a command.

  The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252 that is an element in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257 are mounted. It has. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 253 and the work RAM 254 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 252, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes a drawing process on the video RAM 257 in the VDP 255 on the basis of receiving a command from the main control device 81 via the effect control device 82, whereby the display of the symbol display device 161 is displayed. Various images are displayed on the screen G.

  The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 161. Since the VDP 255 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 255 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays the data on the symbol display device 161.

  The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 161. The character ROM 256 holds bit map format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bit map image, and the like.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 256. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

  The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 161, and the display content of the symbol display device 161 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 257.

<Explanation regarding production of each game time>
Here, an outline of a game effect (interlocked effect) using each movable accessory 170 to 173 and the display screen G will be described.

  First, the game time variation display will be described with reference to FIG.

  When game times are started, first, high-speed fluctuation display is started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or difficult to recognize which symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22A, the variation display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can recognize the symbols that are variably displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 22B, the fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, and the fluctuation display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 switches from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (c), the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends.

  After all the symbols Z1 to Z3 change, a standby time (standby period) is maintained (for example, 2 seconds) for maintaining the stop display for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). A definite display for clearly showing the game result of the game to the player is performed. Then, when the standby time elapses with a combination of symbols (specific symbols or non-specific symbols) corresponding to the jackpot result on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, the jackpot result is generated and then opening / closing is performed. Transition to mode.

  In this case, for example, even if the standby period elapses while the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped on the ineffective lines L6 to L11, the jackpot result does not occur. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, during this waiting period, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result stopped and displayed on the ineffective lines L6 to L11 moves to the effective lines L1 to L5 and finally The re-variation production that leads to the occurrence of the jackpot result is set. Hereinafter, the flow of the re-variation effect will be illustrated with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 23 and 24. In FIGS. 23 and 24, for the convenience of explanation, portions that are actually shielded so as to be invisible by the movable accessories 170 to 173 are also shown in a pseudo-transmitted state.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, as a line formed only by symbols stopped in the sub display area Rs, for example, each symbol row Z1 to Z1 in a state where a combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the right ineffective line L6. It is assumed that the change display of Z3 is finished. In this case, in the standby time, as shown in FIG. 23B, first, the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 that shield the right ineffective line L6 move from the shield position to the non-shield position. In this way, the drive units 170a and 171a are driven and controlled, and all the combinations of specific symbols on the right-side ineffective line L6 that have been shielded can be visually recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), the combination of the specific symbols moves on the effective line (the middle line L2 in the figure), and the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 are in the non-shielding position. To the shielding position. After that, it is clearly indicated that the waiting time has passed and the jackpot result is obtained, and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, the re-variation effect may be performed even when the combination of the specific symbols is stopped on the ineffective line extending over both the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs. For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), it is assumed that the combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the left-lower right line L10 as the second ineffective line, and the variation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is finished. In this case, during the waiting time, as shown in FIG. 24B, first, the third movable accessory 172 that shields the sub display area Rs (left sub display area Rs2) of the left lower right line L10 is not moved from the shield position. The drive unit 172a is driven and controlled so as to move to the shielding position, and all the combinations of specific symbols in the left-side lower right line L10 that have been shielded can be visually recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), the combination of the specific symbols moves on the effective line (in the figure, the right downward line L4), and the third movable accessory 172 moves from the non-shielding position to the shielding position. . After that, it is clearly indicated that the waiting time has passed and the jackpot result is obtained, and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In this pachinko machine 10, it is set so that the re-variation effect is performed once the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is temporarily stopped on the ineffective line in a part when the jackpot result occurs. Yes. In other words, the re-variation effect is generated with a predetermined probability when the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped on the ineffective line. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, a part of the symbols that stop in the sub display area Rs protrudes from the movable accessories 170 to 173, and the protruding part is allowed to be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. . For this reason, the player can recognize when the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the ineffective line by gazing at the protruding portion.

  As a player, it is expected that the above-described re-variation effect will be performed until the standby time elapses after the stop display is made (after the change display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is finished). By performing such a display effect, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result on the active line does not stop, the game round is finally ended (until the standby time elapses). It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the player may have won the jackpot, and to ensure the degree of attention to the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a hold notice that suggests the contents of the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 is performed at a predetermined probability at a timing before the game times related to the hold information are started. It has a configuration. Therefore, the flow of the hold notice will be exemplified below with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. In FIG. 26, for convenience of explanation, a portion that is actually shielded by the movable accessories 170 to 173 so as to be invisible is also shown in a pseudo-transmitted state.

  The hold notice is performed using a stop result (combination of stop symbols) in the game times before the game times of the hold information that is the subject of the hold notice is started. Specifically, as a result of stopping the game times prior to the game times related to the hold information subject to the hold notice, without forming a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result on the active line, and The same symbol is stopped and displayed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, thereby indicating the content of the pending information that is the subject of the pending notice.

  For example, if the hold information subject to the hold notice is a probable jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 25A, the game times before the game times related to the hold information subject to the hold notice are shown. A display effect for holding notice is executed at. Specifically, the combination of specific symbols is not stopped on the active line, and the same specific symbol is stopped and displayed on all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (stopped and displayed on the main display area Rm). End. After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the fact that the combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line in the game times related to the hold information that is the subject of the hold notice has resulted in a probabilistic jackpot result. Is specified.

  If the hold information subject to the hold notice is a normal jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 25C, the game before the game times related to the hold information subject to the hold notice. The display effect for holding notice is executed at the time. Specifically, the combination of non-specific symbols is not stopped on the effective line, and the same non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed on all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (the main display region Rm is stopped and displayed). ) End the game round. After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (d), a normal jackpot result was obtained by stopping and displaying the combination of non-specific symbols on the active line in the game times related to the hold information subject to the hold notice. The effect is clearly indicated.

  The hold notice may be performed using not only the main display area Rm but also both the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs. That is, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), for example, the same symbols are stopped and displayed in the main display region Rm in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, and the sub-display region Rs (see FIG. 26) in the upper symbol row Z1. Then, the symbols corresponding to the upper side of the left sub display area Rs2 are stopped and displayed. Then, during the waiting time, as shown in FIG. 26B, the third movable combination 172 is moved from the shielding position to the non-shielding position, thereby making it possible to visually recognize the same symbol, and then the third movable combination. The object 172 is moved to the shielding position to end the game round. After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), it is confirmed that the combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line in the game times related to the hold information that is the subject of the hold notice, and the probable big hit result is obtained. It is clearly shown.

  In the holding notice shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the case where only one (sub display area Rs2) of the left and right sub display areas Rs is used is illustrated. In some cases, the display area Rs1, Rs2 is used to make a hold notice, and the hold notices are various. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 26 (d) to 26 (f), an example of the hold notice using the left and right sub display areas Rs1, Rs2 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (d), the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the right sub display region Rs1, the left sub display region Rs2, and the main display region Rm (in the diagram, the left sub display region Rs2 in the upper symbol row Z1; The same symbol is stopped and displayed in the right side sub-display region Rs1 in the middle symbol row Z2 and the main display region Rm in the lower symbol row Z3). And in the said waiting time, as shown in FIG.26 (e), it is the same by moving the 1st movable combination 170, the 2nd movable combination 171 and the 3rd movable combination 172 from a shielding position to a non-shielding position. After making each of the symbols visible, the third movable accessory 172 is moved to the shielding position to end the game round. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (f), in the game times related to the hold information subject to the hold notice, the fact that the combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line indicates that the probable big hit result has been obtained. It is clearly shown.

  As described above, in the hold advance notice, not only the main display area Rm in which the effective lines L1 to L5 are set but also the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the sub display area Rs that is the shielding target by the movable accessories 170 to 173 are used. And the production is performed. On the other hand, even if the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs, if the corresponding movable accessory moves and the symbol is not visible, The hold notice will not be valid (it will be a mere miss). In other words, with respect to the hold notice using the sub display area Rs, the corresponding movable accessory moves from the shield position to the non-shield position, and the entire symbol to be shielded becomes visible. It is set as an execution condition.

  Similarly, in the above-described re-variation effect, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped on the ineffective line, the corresponding movable accessory must move from the shield position to the non-shield position. For example, it will only show a missed eye and not a big hit. Therefore, also in the re-variation effect, it is set as an execution condition for the re-variation effect that the corresponding movable accessory moves from the shielding position to the non-shielding position.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, as described above, the re-change effect and the hold notice effect are performed in conjunction with the display content on the display screen G and the movement of the movable accessories 170 to 173. For this reason, when the symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen G, the subsequent development largely depends on whether or not the corresponding movable accessory 170 to 173 moves from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. Become. In view of such circumstances, in the present embodiment, as the effect that the player expects the movement of the movable actors 170 to 173 to the non-shielding position, the one corresponding to the above-mentioned effect among the movable actors 170 to 173. A roaring effect that vibrates (vertically moves) is set. Hereinafter, the flow of the roaring effect will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. In addition, since the roaring effect is broadly divided into those corresponding to the roaring effect related to the re-changing effect and the roaring effect related to the hold-notifying effect, first, the roaring effect related to the re-changing effect will be described, and then to the hold-notifying effect The groaning effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 27, FIGS. 27A to 27D correspond to the hold notice effect, and FIGS. 27E to 27H correspond to the re-change effect.

<Direction production>
As shown in FIG. 27 (a), for example, if a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the left lower right line L10 as an ineffective line, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the corresponding movable accessory As a result, the third movable accessory 172 vibrates up and down to produce an effect as if moving from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), if the third movable accessory 172 moves to the non-shielding position, as a re-variation effect, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result then moves on the effective line and the jackpot result Will occur. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 (d), when the third movable accessory 172 does not move to the non-shielding position and remains in the shielding position and the waiting time elapses, there is no re-variation effect, and the mere disengagement. Become.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 27E, when a predetermined number of the same symbols are stopped and displayed over the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs (in the figure, the middle and lower stages of the left line L1 of the main display area Rm). As shown in FIG. 27 (f), the third movable accessory 172 vibrates in the same manner as described above, as shown in FIG. 27 (f). Production is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (g), if the third movable accessory 172 moves to the unshielded position, a reservation notice is established, and as shown in FIG. 27 (h), the third movable accessory 172 If the waiting time elapses without moving to the non-shielding position, the suspension notice is not given, but a mere disconnection. Hereinafter, processing performed in various control devices to perform these effects will be described.

<About processing related to various effects>
Processes related to various effects will be described first, centering on processes related to re-change effects, and thereafter, processes related to pending notice will be described.

<Variable display control process performed by the production control device 82>
First, the variable display control process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described below. The variable display control process is started every predetermined period (for example, 2 msec). In the variation display control process, when the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the symbol display device 161 starts the variation display of the symbols for one game, and the main control device 81 When the transmitted change end command has been received, a process of displaying the symbol change display as a final stop is executed. Further, in the variable display control process, a process for appropriately correcting the variable display pattern is executed in accordance with the setting for performing the hold notice.

  In the variation display control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, whether or not a game is being played in step S701, that is, whether or not the symbol display for one game has been performed on the symbol display device 161. Determine. If the change display of symbols for one game is not performed, it is determined in step S702 whether or not the change command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received. If the change command has not been received, the change display control process is terminated as it is. If the change command has been received, the change start control process is terminated after the change start process is executed in step S703.

  On the other hand, when the change display of symbols for one game is being performed, it is determined in step S704 whether or not a change end command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the change end command has not been received, the change display control process is ended after executing the changing process in step S705. If the change end command has been received, the change display control process ends after the change end process is executed in step S706.

  Hereinafter, the variation start processing in step S703, the variation processing in step S705, and the variation end processing in step S706 will be described in detail.

<Variation start processing>
First, the variation start process in step S703 will be described. The variation start process is a process for starting an effect for game times based on the reception of the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81. In the change start process, a re-change effect and a hold notice effect are set in addition to the presence or absence of reach display as an effect for game times. Here, first, processing relating to setting of reach display and setting of re-variable effect will be described, and thereafter processing related to setting of pending notice effect will be described.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, in step S801, the currently received change command is read, and information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence and change display time information is specified from the command. Further, as already described, when the main control device 81 transmits a variation command, it also transmits a type command. Therefore, in step S801, the type command received together with the variation command received this time is read, and game result information such as probability variation jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, or outage result information is specified from the command. . In step S801, from the above-identified information, information on whether or not the jackpot is won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot is won, information on whether or not reach occurs if the jackpot is not won, and the variable display time Is stored in the register of the MPU 252.

  In subsequent step S802, based on the information grasped in step S801, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game time started this time is a game result corresponding to the jackpot result. If the result is a jackpot result, that is, if the result is a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a subsequent jackpot effect setting process is executed in step S803.

  In the big hit effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, first, a big hit stop result determination process is executed in step S901. In this stop result determination process, if it is a probabilistic jackpot result, the stop result in which the combination of the same specific symbols (the main symbols with odd numbers) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is the current stop result. Determine as a result. In the case of a normal jackpot result, a stop result in which a combination of the same non-specific symbols (the main symbols with an even number) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. . The types of main symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 that are stopped and displayed when the jackpot result is obtained are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 stores the valid lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop determined in step S901. The line is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area 244c provided in the RAM 244. In step S901, a process of storing information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area 244d is executed. In the following description, the address information of the stop result determined in the various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area 244d of the RAM 244, so that the description is used.

  As already described, the reach display is executed in the game times in which the jackpot result occurs, and the variable display time is set longer in the super reach display than in the normal reach display. Therefore, in the subsequent step S902, it is determined whether or not the variation display time is the variation display time corresponding to the normal reach display with reference to the variation display time of the game times executed this time.

  When it is determined in step S902 that it is the variable display time corresponding to the super reach display instead of the normal reach display, after performing the super reach effect pattern determination process in step S903, the main jackpot effect setting process Exit.

  In the effect pattern determination process for super reach, the effect table for super reach stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 is acquired, and the change display time of the change command received this time and the game result in the type command are obtained. Determine the corresponding super-reach display performance pattern. In step S903, a process of storing the address information of the determined effect pattern in the pattern address storage area 244e of the RAM 244 is executed. In the following description, in the various effect pattern determination processes, the corresponding effect table is acquired from the ROM 243, the effect patterns corresponding to the variable display time and the game result are determined, and the addresses of the effect patterns determined in the various effect pattern determination processes Since the information is stored in the pattern address storage area 244e of the RAM 244, the description is incorporated.

  If it is the variable display time corresponding to the normal reach display in step S902, the process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, a re-variation effect lottery process is performed for drawing whether or not the re-variation effect is to be executed. In such processing, whether or not the re-variation effect is executed by acquiring the re-variation effect lottery table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 and the re-variation effect counter provided in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244. A lottery of no. In subsequent step S905, it is determined whether or not the re-variation effect lottery is won based on the processing result in step S904. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the probability of winning in the re-variation effect lottery process is 70%, and more than half of the game times in which the normal reach display resulting in the jackpot result is selected are changed to the re-variation effect. Is done.

  If the re-variation effect lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S906, where an effect pattern determination process for normal reach is executed. After performing the process of step S906, the big hit effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the re-variation effect lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S907. In step S907, a process of rewriting the information stored in the register in step S801 as information that is a game time for performing a re-variation effect from the game time of reach occurrence is executed.

  In the subsequent step S908, an effect pattern determination process for the re-change effect is executed, and in step S909, a temporary stop line determination process in the change effect is executed. In this process, it is determined which of the ineffective lines L6 to L11 is to temporarily stop the symbol combination corresponding to the stop result determined in step S901. In other words, it is determined which of the ineffective lines L6 to L11 is used to execute the re-change effect. In this case, the effective line as the final stop line determined in step S901 and the ineffective line as the temporary stop line determined in step S909 are determined to be parallel.

  As shown in FIG. 31B, in the re-variation table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, address information of ineffective lines L6 to 11 parallel to the effective lines L1 to L5 is stored. It is remembered. In step S909, the temporary stop line is determined with reference to the address information of the final stop line stored in step S901, and the address information of the temporary stop line is stored in the temporary stop line storage area 244f of the RAM 244. In this way, the re-variation effect is an effect that translates the symbol combination that is stopped on the temporary stop line, thereby providing a smooth effect without changing the positional relationship between symbols constituting the symbol combination. can do.

  It should be noted that the relationship between the temporary stop line and the final stop line does not necessarily have to be parallel, and a configuration including those that are not parallel is also possible. In this case, in the re-variation effect between the non-parallel lines, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 do not move in parallel, and the symbols are again combined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is obtained in the final stop line. It is necessary to variably display the columns Z1 to Z3. Therefore, by using a configuration in which each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is variably displayed, for example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the normal jackpot result temporarily stops on the ineffective line and then changes again to the final stop line, the probability variation jackpot result It is good also as a structure which performs the display effect (what is called a promotion effect) finally stopped on an active line as a symbol combination corresponding to.

  After executing the process of step S909, the process of storing the effect flag is executed in various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244 in step S910, and the release flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244 in step S911. Execute the process. The roaring effect flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the roaring effect should be executed in the current game round. Further, the release flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that one of the movable accessories 170 to 173 should be controlled to open and close in the current game round.

  Then, in step S912, based on the processing result of step S909, after executing the process of storing the movable accessory to be driven and controlled in the accessory storage area 244g provided in the RAM 244, the effect setting for the big hit The process ends. As shown in FIG. 31 (b), the re-variation table stores information on the movable accessory to be driven and controlled in correspondence with the temporary stop line. In step S912, the temporary stop line stored in step S909 is stored. The information on the movable accessory to be driven is stored with reference to the address information.

  In this way, by storing the final stop line, the temporary stop line, and the movable object to be driven and controlled in the re-variation effect, the effect on the display screen G and the movable characters 170 to 173 are stored. Even when the production is performed at the same time, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the processing configuration and the required increase in storage capacity.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 29), if it is determined in step S802 that the result is not a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S803. In step S803, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. If reach occurs, the process proceeds to step S805, and reach setting processing for generating reach is executed.

  In the production setting process for generating reach, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the reach display generated in the current game round is a normal reach display. If the display is not the normal reach display but the super reach display, the process advances to step S1002 to execute a stop result determination process for super reach. The process in step S1002 is substantially similar to the process in step S901. However, in the case of the processing performed in step S1002, since it corresponds to a miss reach, the stop symbol is determined so as not to be a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result. That is, the stop result in which the combination of the reach and reach symbols is established on one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of outreach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, the same symbol combination is not formed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 that is the same as the symbol forming the reach line is set to the reach line. The stop result on the effective line is determined so that the final stop is performed at the stop position shifted by one line before or after one line. In step S1002, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area 244d is executed.

  In the subsequent step S1003, an effect pattern determination process for super reach is executed. In this case, referring to the super reach effect table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 as in step S903, the super reach display effect corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time is displayed. Determine the contents. After executing the process of step S1003, the reach setting process for generating reach is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S1001, if it is determined in step S1001 that the normal reach display is selected, the process proceeds to step S1004. In step S1004, it is determined whether a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored. The notice condition establishment flag is a flag stored in various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244 when the notice condition is established in a hold notice process described later. If the notice condition establishment flag is stored, the hold notice process in steps S1005 to S1011 is executed, and then the effect setting process for generating the reach is terminated. Although the process for holding advance notice will be described in detail later, in this process, the suspension notice stop result and the effect pattern in the game times of the variable display time corresponding to the normal reach display are determined.

  If it is determined in step S1004 that the notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1012. In step S1012, the re-variation effect is not performed (although it is not a jackpot result), it is ineffective whether or not to generate an ineffective uniform effect that stops the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result on the ineffective lines L6 to L11. A uniform production lottery process is executed. In the ineffective uniform effect lottery process, the ineffective uniform effect table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 and the values acquired from the ineffective uniform effect counters in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 are ineffective. Decide whether or not to produce a uniform effect.

  In a succeeding step S1013, it is determined whether or not an ineffective uniform effect is generated based on the processing result in the step S1012. In the case of generating an ineffective uniform production, the process proceeds to step S1014, and a process of rewriting the information stored in the register in step S801 as information that is a game time for performing an ineffective uniform production from a game generation in which reach has occurred. .

  After executing the rewrite process in step S1014, the process proceeds to step S1015, and the stop result determination process for ineffective alignment is executed. In this process, it is determined whether to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in any of the ineffective lines L6 to L11. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result to be stopped on the ineffective lines L6 to L11 and the ineffective lines L6 to L11 to be stopped are randomly determined by lottery or the like. As shown in FIG. 33, in the stop result table for the ineffective uniform effect stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, the stop information in the ineffective uniform effect is based on the stop symbol of the middle line L2, which is an effective line. Address information is stored.

  In the schematic diagram of FIG. 33, the sub-symbols arranged between the main symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are represented for convenience by using intermediate numbers between the numbers assigned to the left and right main symbols. Show. In step S1015, the symbol combination determined in the above process and the information on the ineffective line are checked against the ineffective alignment effect table, and the stop symbol on the effective line is stored.

  After executing the process of step S1015, an effect pattern determination process for ineffective alignment is executed in step S1016. In step S1017, a process for storing a turn effect flag is executed. In step S1018, a process for storing a movable accessory to be driven and controlled in the accessory storage area 244g is executed. The effect setting process ends. As shown in FIG. 33, the ineffective uniform production table stores movable accessories 170 to 173 to be driven and controlled corresponding to the ineffective lines L6 to L11 for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result. In step S1018, the address information stored in step S1015 is referred to and information on the movable accessory to be driven is stored.

  If it is determined in step S1013 that an ineffective uniform effect is not generated, the process proceeds to step S1019. In step S1019, in the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs, the same main symbol is stopped in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, but no special hold notice is executed (movable accessory 170 to 173 is changed from the shielded state to the non-shielded state). Whether or not to generate an ineffective notice effect is not selected. In the invalid valid notice effect lottery process, the invalid valid notice effect table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 and the values obtained from the invalid valid notice effect counters in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 are referred to. It is determined whether or not an effective notice effect is generated.

  In the subsequent step S1020, it is determined whether or not an ineffective notice effect is generated based on the processing result in step S1019. If an ineffective notice effect is not generated, the process proceeds to step S1021, and a stop result determination process for normal reach is executed. The process in step S1021 is substantially similar to the process in step S1002. However, in Super Reach, the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2, which is the same as the symbol that forms the reach line, is finally stopped at a stop position that is shifted to the left or right by one line with respect to the reach line. Is not limited to one line, and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined in correspondence with the variable display time determined by the main controller 81. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, a stop result is determined in which the same symbol combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. After executing the process of step S1021, in step S1022, after performing the effect pattern determination process for normal reach, the effect setting process for generating this reach is terminated. The stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 may be determined randomly by lottery as long as the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not obtained.

  If it is determined in step S1020 that an ineffective notice effect is to be generated, the ineffective notice effect process is executed in steps S1023 to S1028, and then the reach setting effect setting process is terminated. The process for the ineffective advance notice effect will be described in detail later. In this process, the stop result and the effect pattern of the ineffective advance notice effect in the game times of the variable display time corresponding to the normal reach display are determined.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 29), if no reach has occurred in step S804, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S806, it is determined whether a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored. If the notice condition establishment flag is stored, the effect setting process for holding notice is executed in step S807, and if the notice condition establishment flag is not stored, the effect setting process for normal removal is executed in step S808. Execute. Here, the effect setting process for normal removal will be described, and the effect setting process for holding notice will be described in detail later. It should be noted that in the effect setting process for holding notice in step S807, the stop result for holding notice and the effect pattern in the game times of the variable display time when no reach occurs are determined.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34, in the effect setting process for normal losing, first, an ineffective uniform effect lottery process is executed in step S1101. Such processing is substantially the same as the processing in step S1011. However, the winning probabilities differ between the ineffective uniform effect lottery in the game time of the variable display time when the reach occurs in step S1011 and the ineffective uniform effect lottery in the game time of the variable display time when the reach does not occur in step S1101, In step S1011, the probability of winning the ineffective uniform production is higher than in step S1101. More specifically, an ineffective uniform effect is generated with a probability of 10% in step S1011 and an ineffective uniform effect is generated with a probability of 1% in step S1101.

  In the subsequent step S1102, it is determined whether or not an ineffective uniform effect is generated based on the processing result in step S1101. If an ineffective uniform effect is to be generated, the process proceeds to step S1103, and a stop result determination process for ineffective uniform is executed. Such processing is similar to the processing in step S1015. After performing the process of step S1103, in step S1105, after performing the ineffective uniform effect pattern determination process, the normal off effect setting process is terminated. That is, since the variable display time is shorter than the time when the reach occurs, in the effect setting process for losing normally, even if a non-valid uniform effect is performed, the turn effect flag is not stored (the turn effect is not displayed). Not set).

  If it is determined in step S1102 that an ineffective uniform production is not generated, the process proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, a non-effective notice effect lottery process is executed. Such processing is substantially the same as the processing in step S1019. However, the winning probabilities differ between the ineffective notice effect lottery in the game time of the variable display time when the reach occurs in step S1019 and the ineffective notice effect lottery in the game time of the variable display time when the reach does not occur in step S1105. In step S1019, the probability of winning the ineffective notice effect is higher than in step S1105. More specifically, in step S1019, an ineffective notice effect is generated with a probability of 15%, and in step S1105, an ineffective notice effect is generated with a probability of 3%.

  In a succeeding step S1106, it is determined whether or not an ineffective notice effect is generated based on the processing result in the step S1105. If an ineffective notice effect is not generated, the process proceeds to step S1107, and a stop result determination process for non-reach is executed. In such a process, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not stopped on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination of the outreach reach symbols is not stopped, and further, on any of the ineffective lines L6 to L11. Do not stop the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, and do not stop the same main symbol in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs (so that the stop result corresponding to the possession notice is not obtained) To determine the result of this stop. Then, after performing the effect pattern determination process for non-reach generation in step S1108, the effect setting process for losing normally ends.

  If it is determined in step S1106 that an ineffective notice effect is to be generated, the ineffective notice effect setting process is terminated after executing the ineffective notice effect process in steps S1109 to S1111. To do. The process for the ineffective notice effect will be described in detail later. In this process, the stop result of the ineffective notice effect and the effect pattern in the game times of the variable display time when the reach is not generated are determined.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 29), after executing any one of steps S803, S805, S807, and S808, the process proceeds to step S809. In step S809, a process of outputting the command including the stop result and the effect pattern information determined in step S803, step S805, step S807, or step S808 to the display control device 212 as a stop result command and a pattern command is executed. . Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control for executing an effect in the current game round on the symbol display device 161.

  After the process of step S809 is executed, in the subsequent step S810, a process for starting an effect for game times is executed, and then the process for starting variation is terminated. Specifically, based on the effect pattern determined in step S803, step S805, step S807 or step S808, drive control of the speaker unit 59 and the light emitting unit 58 is started, and an effect for game times is started.

<Variation processing>
Next, the variable processing in step S705 in the variable display control process (FIG. 28) will be described. The changing process is a process of executing or changing various effects in the game times started by the changing start process.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 35, in the process for changing, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not an effect flag is stored in 244b in various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. If the turn effect flag is stored, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the turn effect in the subsequent step S1202.

  Here, the MPU 242 measures the time from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 161 by using a progress counter provided in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244. Specifically, when the variable display is started, an elapsed counter update (addition) process is executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). Further, in the progress table provided in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, information on each counter value corresponding to the timing at which the roaring effect should be started has a one-to-one correspondence with information on the effect pattern that can be set at the start of the game times. Are stored in a state of being associated with each other. In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is a counter value corresponding to the timing at which the turn effect is to be started in the current game progress table.

  Note that the processing timing (step S1205, step S1209, step S1212, etc., which will be described later) for grasping whether or not it is the execution timing of other effects in the game times is also referred to these progress tables and progress counters. To grasp.

  If it is determined in step S1202 that it is the start timing of the roaring effect, the roaring effect is started in step S1203. In this process, based on the information of the movable accessory 170 to 173 to be driven stored in the accessory storage area 244g of the RAM 244, the drive units 170a to 173a of the corresponding movable accessory 170 to 173 are driven and controlled. Processing for vibrating (moving up and down) the movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed. In step S1204, a turn production start command is output to the display control device 212. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes display control for causing the symbol display device 161 to perform a display for turning effect based on the received turning effect start command. For example, an effect such as an effect is set on the display screen G around the oscillating movable accessory.

  If it is not the time to execute the turning effect in step S1202, or after executing the process of step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the roaring effect. In step S1205, if it is time to end the roaring effect, the roaring effect is ended in the subsequent step S1206. In this process, a process for stopping the movable accessory that is vibrating is executed. In step S1207, a turn effect end command is output to the display control device 212. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes control for causing the symbol display device 161 to end the turning effect being executed on the display screen G based on the received turning effect end command.

  If the turn effect flag is not stored in step S1201, if it is not the end timing of the turn effect in step S1205, or after executing the process of step S1207, the process proceeds to step S1208. In step S1208, it is determined whether an open flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244. As already described, the release flag is a flag stored in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244 in step S911 when the re-variation effect is executed.

  If the release flag is stored, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not it is the release timing of the movable accessory 170-173. If it is determined that it is the opening timing of the movable combination 170 to 173, the corresponding movable combination 170 to 173 is released in step S1210. In this process, based on the information of the movable accessory 170 to 173 to be driven stored in the accessory storage area 244g of the RAM 244, the drive units 170a to 173a of the corresponding movable accessory 170 to 173 are driven and controlled. Then, a process of moving the movable accessories 170 to 173 to the non-shielding position is executed. In step S1211, the release command is output to the display control device 212. Based on the received release command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes display control of an opening effect (re-change effect or special hold notice effect) on the symbol display device 161. In the display control device 212, if the current release effect is a re-variation effect, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result stopped on the temporary stop line as described above is moved to the final stop line. The display device 161 is controlled.

  If it is not the opening timing of the movable accessories 170 to 173 in step S1209, or after executing the process of step S1211, the process proceeds to step S1212. In step S <b> 1212, it is determined whether it is the closing timing of the movable accessories 170 to 173. If it is the closing timing, the closing process of the corresponding movable accessory 170 to 173 is executed in step S1213. In this process, based on the information of the movable accessory 170 to 173 to be driven stored in the accessory storage area 244g of the RAM 244, the drive units 170a to 173a of the corresponding movable accessory 170 to 173 are driven and controlled. Then, a process of moving the movable accessories 170 to 173 to the shielding position is executed. In step S1214, a close command is output to the display control device 212. Based on the received closing command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes a process for ending the opening effect (revariation effect or special hold notice effect) on the symbol display device 161.

  If the release flag is not stored in step S1208, if it is not the closing timing of the shutter member in step S1208, or after executing the process of step S1214, the process proceeds to step S1215. Steps S1215 and S1216 are pending notice processing, and will be described later in detail.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the variation end process in step S706 in the variation display control process (FIG. 28) will be described. The variation end process is a process for ending a predetermined effect in the game times started by the variation start process.

  In the variation end process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 36, a definite stop process is executed in step S1301 to make the game times effect a definite stop corresponding to the current game result. In this process, the speaker unit 59 and the light emitting unit 58 are driven and controlled to produce an effect corresponding to the fixed stop. Then, after the confirmation command is output to the display control device 212 in step S1302, this variation end processing is ended. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 161 to confirm and stop the symbol based on the received confirmation command.

  As described above, the change display in each game time is implemented so that the final display corresponding to the game result is finally made based on the change command output from the main control device 81 to the effect control device 82. The The re-variation effect is generated with a predetermined probability when the game result is any jackpot result. Further, even if the game result is a disapproval result, an effect as if a re-variation effect occurs with a predetermined probability, that is, an ineffective uniform effect occurs. In this case, not only the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result on the ineffective line on the display screen G is stopped, but also the effect of producing the ineffective uniform effect is enhanced by interlocking with the movable accessory that shields the ineffective line. ing.

  Specifically, when an ineffective uniform production occurs, the movable combination that shields the ineffective line where the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result has stopped becomes as if it is a little more unshielded and re-varies. A stuttering effect can occur as if an effect occurs. Therefore, the player expects the occurrence of the re-changing effect, that is, the game result is a jackpot result by the occurrence of the roaring effect. In addition, the re-variation effect is one of the conditions for the occurrence of the corresponding movable accessory moving from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. Therefore, the player expects that the corresponding movable accessory will eventually move from the shield position to the non-shield position when the above-mentioned ineffective uniform effect occurs.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to organically link the effects of the design of the display screen G and the effects of the movement of the movable accessories 170 to 173 to produce a more dynamic effect, and pay attention to the game. The degree is improved.

<Description of processing related to pending notice>
Next, processing related to the hold notice will be described.

<Processing performed by main controller 81>
As the process related to the hold notice, a process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and a process executed by the effect control device 82 are set. Therefore, the processing on the main control device 81 side will be described first, and then the processing on the effect control device 82 side will be described.

<Confirmation process for hold notice>
First, the confirmation process for holding notice executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the confirmation process for holding notice is a process executed in step S205 of the winning process (FIG. 16) for the operating port of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15).

  In the confirmation process for reservation notice, the information on the number of reservations stored in the storage number storage area NA in the reservation area RE is read in step S1401, and the information on the number of reservations is stored in the register of the MPU 202. In the subsequent step S1402, the big hit determination information out of the hold information acquired in step S204 of the winning process for the working opening (FIG. 16) based on the current winning of the working opening 115, that is, the big hit random number counter C1 is latched. Know the information.

  In subsequent step S1403, it is determined whether or not the current probability lottery mode is the low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the RAM 204. In the case of the low probability mode, in step S1404, with reference to the low probability mode success / failure table shown in FIG. 14 (a), the jackpot determination information grasped in step S1402 is set as the jackpot winner. That it is included in the information. In the case of the high probability mode, in step S1405, with reference to the high probability mode win / loss table shown in FIG. 14 (a), the jackpot determination information grasped in step S1402 is determined as a big win. Specify whether it is included in the set information.

  After step S1404 or step S1405, in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination information grasped in step S1402 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If it is determined that the jackpot winning is supported, in step S1407, the type determination information out of the hold information acquired in step S1404 based on the current winning of the operating port 115, that is, the jackpot type counter C2 To grasp the latched information.

  In subsequent step S1408, with reference to the distribution table shown in FIG. 14B, information for determining the jackpot type determined in step S1407 is information set as a normal jackpot result or information set as a probabilistic jackpot result. To identify which of them are included. Thereafter, in step S1409, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type information grasped in step S1407 corresponds to the normal jackpot result. If it corresponds to the normal jackpot result, the normal jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1410, and if it corresponds to the probability change jackpot result, the register of the MPU 202 is changed to the probability in step S1411. Remember the jackpot information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1406, if the process of step S1410 is executed, or if the process of step S1411 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1412. In step S1412, based on the current winning of the operation port 115, the information for determining the detach reach among the hold information acquired in step S1404, that is, the information latched from the reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

  In the subsequent step S1413, the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 203 is referred to, and the reach grasped in step S1412 is determined. It is specified whether the information for determination is included in the information set as the reach winning. Thereafter, in step S1414, it is determined whether or not the reach determination information grasped in step S1412 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, in step S1415, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, and then this confirmation process is terminated. If it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, the confirmation process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the hold command setting process of step S206 in the winning prize process for the operation opening (FIG. 16) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the hold command setting process, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not either the normal jackpot information or the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, thereby confirming the immediately preceding hold notice (FIG. 37). ), It is determined whether or not the jackpot determination information is identified as corresponding to the jackpot winning. If either the normal jackpot information or the probable change jackpot information is stored, it is determined in step S1502 whether or not it is the probable change jackpot information, thereby confirming the immediately preceding hold notice (FIG. In 37), it is determined whether or not the information for type determination is specified as corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result.

  If it is probability variation jackpot information, a probability variation corresponding hold command is set in step S1503, and if it is normal jackpot information, a normal correspondence hold command is set in step S1504. Note that the setting of the command and various commands described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 204.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1501 that both the normal jackpot information and the probability variation jackpot information are not stored, the process proceeds to step S1505, and it is determined whether reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. Thus, it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination is identified as corresponding to the occurrence of reach in the previous confirmation process for holding notice (FIG. 37). If the reach occurrence information is stored, a release reach correspondence hold command is set in step S1506, and if reach occurrence information is not stored, a complete release support hold command is set in step S1507. To do.

  After executing any of the processes of step S1503, step S1504, step S1506, or step S1507, in step S1508, a process of setting the number of hold information for the hold command is executed. Specifically, as the processing, the hold command information set as described above is configured as information of a plurality of bytes, and information indicating that the command is a hold command or a hold command for some of the bits. Are included, and information on the number of holds can be set. In this case, in step S1508, first, the information on the number of holds stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1501 in the confirmation process for the previous hold notice (FIG. 37) is read, and then the hold command already set is set. The read information on the number of reserved information is stored by an arithmetic process such as a logical sum for the information on the number of reserved information in FIG. As a result, with respect to the hold command set in any one of steps S1503, S1504, S1506, and S1507, the number of hold information corresponding to the hold command is specified. Information for is included.

  After executing the process of step S1508, the setting process ends. The hold command including the hold number information in step S1508 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 by the external output process in step S301 in the next normal process (FIG. 17). The effect control device 82 receives the hold command and specifies that the hold information has increased.

  In addition, with respect to the setting method of the hold command, the presence control unit 82 specifies whether or not the jackpot is won, if the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot at that time, and the presence or absence of reach if the jackpot is not won If it is possible, it is arbitrary. For example, a combination of a hold command for probability change, a hold command for normal response, a hold command for release reach and a hold command for complete release is set individually for each hold number. A configuration may be adopted in which one pending command is selected according to the confirmation result in the confirmation process (FIG. 37).

<Regarding the hold notice control process executed by the effect control device 82>
Next, the hold notice control process executed by the MPU 202 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The pending notice control process is a part of a plurality of types of processes repeatedly executed in the MPU 252, and is activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle).

  First, in step S1601, it is determined whether any hold command has been received from the main controller 81. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, a hold notice setting process is executed as a process corresponding to the received hold command in step S1602.

  In subsequent step S1603, 1 is added to the production-side reserved storage number SN stored in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244. In step S1603, a process corresponding to the increase in the number of reserved memories (for example, a process of changing the display when displaying the hold information on the display screen G) is executed. In step S1603, a process for storing the hold information of the received hold command in the RAM 244 is executed. The RAM 244 is provided with a holding area 244h as an area for storing holding information, and the holding area 244h is associated with the holding ball storage area 232 on the main control device 81 side so as to correspond to the first unit area to the fourth unit. There is an area. In step S1603, a process for storing the hold information in the corresponding area is executed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1601 or after execution of step S1603, the process proceeds to step S1604, where it is determined whether a shift command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, 1 is subtracted from the production-side reserved storage number SN in step S1605. In step S1605, a process corresponding to a decrease in the number of reserved memories (for example, a process of changing the display when displaying the hold information on the display screen G) is executed. In step S1605, a shift process is executed. In this shift process, the hold information set in the unit area of the hold area 244h is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the hold information in the first unit area is cleared, and the second unit area → the first unit area, the third unit area → the second unit area, the fourth unit area → the third unit area, etc. The hold display information in the unit area is shifted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1604 or after execution of the process in step S1605, the hold notice control process is terminated. Here, the hold notice setting process in step S1602 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the hold notice setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the production-side hold storage number SN is “1” or more. If the production-side reserved storage number SN is “0”, it is determined in the subsequent step S1702 whether or not the game times are currently being executed. This is the case where the production-side reserved storage number SN is “1” or more in step S1701 and there is hold information that has not started the game times at the time when the current hold command is received, or the production side in step S1702 If the game number is currently being executed even if the reserved storage number SN is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1703.

  In step S1703, it is determined whether a winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244. The winning flag is a flag stored in step S1706, which will be described later, when a probability change corresponding hold command or a normal support hold command is received, and is executed before the game times corresponding to the currently received hold command. This is a flag for the MPU 202 to specify that any jackpot result occurs in the game round.

  If it is determined that the winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1704, and it is determined whether or not a notice condition establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244. The notice condition establishment flag is a flag stored when the notice condition is established as described above. More specifically, in the jackpot notice setting process (step S1707) or the losing notice setting process (step S1708) described later. The flag to be stored.

  If it is determined that the advance notice condition establishment flag is not stored, it is determined in step S1705 whether or not the hold command received this time is a probability change support hold command or a normal support hold command. If the command is a hold command corresponding to these jackpot results, a process for storing a winning flag is executed in the subsequent step S1706, and then a jackpot notice setting process is executed in step S1707. If the received hold command is not a hold command corresponding to the jackpot result in step S1705, that is, if it is a hold command corresponding to a miss reach or a hold command corresponding to a complete miss, a notice for release in step S1708. Execute the setting process.

  If it is determined in step S1702 that the game round is not being executed, if it is determined in step S1703 that a winning flag is stored, if it is determined in step S1704 that a notice condition establishment flag is stored, Alternatively, after executing any one of steps S1707 and S1708, the reservation notice setting process is terminated.

  Here, the jackpot notice setting process of step S1707 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the jackpot notice setting process, first, in step S1801, a jackpot reservation notice lottery process is executed. In this process, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to hold a hold notice in the hold information corresponding to the hold command received this time. Specifically, with reference to the value of the hold notice lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 and the big hit hold notice lottery table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, whether or not the hold notice is executed. Do the lottery. In the jackpot hold notice lottery table of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the hold notice lottery is set to 75%, and more than half of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result wins the hold notice lottery. Is set.

  In the subsequent step S1802, it is determined whether or not the pending notice lottery is won based on the processing result in step S1801. If the pending notice lottery has not been won, the jackpot notice setting process is terminated. If the holding notice lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S1803.

  In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the currently received hold command is a normal correspondence hold command. If it is a normal correspondence pending command, processing for grasping a notice symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result is executed in step S1804. The notice symbol indicates a common symbol that is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position when all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the hold notice. In such processing, a non-specific symbol (even number symbol) is grasped as a notice symbol as a notice symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1803 that the command is not a regular response pending command but a probability variation correspondence pending command, in step S1805, processing for grasping a notice symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is executed. In this process, the specific symbol (the main symbol to which an odd number is attached) is grasped as the notice symbol as the notice symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result.

  After executing the process of step S1804 or step S1805, the process proceeds to step S1806. In step S1806, a process of storing the notice symbol grasped in step S1804 or step S1805 in the notice symbol storage area 244i of the RAM 244 is executed. In step S1807, the process of storing a notice condition establishment flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the main jackpot notice setting process is terminated.

  Next, the release notice setting process in step S1708 of the hold notice setting process (FIG. 40) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the release notice setting process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the currently received hold command is a release reach compatible hold command. When the command received this time is not a release reach correspondence hold command but a complete release support hold command, the previous release notice setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1901 that the command is a release reach hold command, a release hold notice lottery process is executed in step S1902. In this process, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to hold a hold notice in the hold information corresponding to the hold command received this time. Specifically, with reference to the value of the reserved advance notice lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 and the reserved advance notice lottery table for detaching from the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, whether or not the reserved advance notice is executed is determined. Make a lottery. In the off-holding advance notice lottery table of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the on-hold advance notice lottery is set to 10%, which is set lower than the jackpot advance notice lottery process.

  In the subsequent step S1903, it is determined whether or not the pending notice lottery is won based on the processing result in step S1902. If it is determined that the pending notice lottery has not been won, the outlier notice setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the holding notice lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S1904.

  In step S1904, a notice symbol determination process corresponding to the detachment reach is executed. In this process, a symbol that forms a reach line when the reach display is executed in the game time of the hold information triggered by the hold command is specified based on the received hold command corresponding to outlier reach. If the symbol that forms this reach line is a specific symbol, the symbol for the notice corresponding to the detachment reach is determined as the specific symbol, and if the symbol that forms the reach line is a non-specific symbol, the symbol for the notice corresponding to the detachment reach is determined. The symbol is determined as a non-specific symbol.

  Then, in step S1905, a process for storing the notice symbol based on the result of the process in step S1904 in the corresponding unit area of the holding area 244h is executed, and in step S1906, the notice condition establishment flag is stored in the RAM 244. The off-track notice setting process is terminated.

  That is, in the jackpot notice setting process (step S1707) or the losing notice setting process (step S1708) of the hold notice setting process, it is determined whether or not the hold notice is to be performed based on the received hold command, and the hold notice is given. In this case, a notice condition establishment flag is stored in the RAM 244. Then, by storing the notice condition establishment flag, the effect of the hold notice is set in the variable display control process (FIG. 28) in the game times executed before the game times that are the subject of the hold notice. The

  As already described, as an effect for the holding notice, there are a normal holding notice as a holding notice using only the main display area Rm and a special holding notice as a holding notice using both the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs. Is set. The special hold advance notice is set with a special hold advance notice (hereinafter also referred to as a first special hold notice) and a special hold notice (hereinafter also referred to as a second special hold notice) without a turn effect. Yes. The first and second special reservation advance notices are set based on the difference in the game display variation display time. Specifically, when the fluctuation display time for non-reach is set as the fluctuation display time of the game times, which is shorter than the time when the reach occurs, the first special hold notice without a turn-off effect is executed. When the variable display time when a long reach occurs (when a normal reach occurs) is set, the second special hold notice with a turn-off effect is executed. In the first special reservation notice, the corresponding movable accessory 170 to 173 moves to the non-shielding position during the standby time after the change display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is completed. In the second special reservation advance notice, after the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed, the corresponding movable accessory 170 to 173 moves to the non-shielding position after the turning effect is performed.

  In this way, in order to determine which special hold notice is to be executed based on the difference in the variable display time, the first special hold notice without the turning effect is reached in the change start process (FIG. 29) of the change display control process. It is set in the production setting process for holding notice (step S807) at the time of non-occurrence (step S804: NO), and the second special holding notice with the turning effect is produced in the effect setting process for reach occurrence (step S805, FIG. 29, It is set in FIG. Here, the setting of the first special hold notice will be described first, and then the setting of the second special hold notice will be described.

  In the production setting process for holding notice, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, a special holding notice effect lottery process is executed in step S2001. In this process, the special hold notice is referred to by referring to the lottery counter value for special hold notice acquired from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 and the lottery table for special hold notice stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243. Determine whether to execute. The lottery table for special holding notice is set with a lottery table for jackpot results and a lottery table for outlier results, and the corresponding lottery table is acquired according to the hold information that is the subject of the hold notice. Then, using the lottery table and the lottery counter, it is determined whether to execute the special hold notice (first special hold notice) or the normal hold notice.

  In addition, the probability of a special hold notice is set higher in the lottery table for the jackpot result than in the lottery table for the outlier result. In this embodiment, 70% of the lottery table for the jackpot result has a special hold. In the lottery table for losing results, 10% is set as a special hold notice.

  In a succeeding step S2002, it is determined whether or not the special hold notice effect is executed based on the processing result in the step S2001. In the case of executing the normal hold notice effect instead of the special hold notice effect, in the subsequent step S2003, a stop result determination process for the normal hold notice is executed. In the stop result setting process, the notice symbol information stored in step S1806 or step S1905 is grasped as to whether it is a non-specific symbol or a specific symbol, and which symbol is selected based on the grasped information. It is determined whether to stop all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, a stop result table for normal holding notice corresponding to the decided symbol is read from the ROM 243, and a symbol combination to be stopped on the effective lines L1 to L5 in the normal holding notice is determined.

  Here, the normal suspension notice stop result table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44A illustrates a stop result table in the middle line L2 when the number assigned to the notice corresponding symbol is “7”. Further, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the sub symbol arranged between the main symbols is conveniently indicated by using a middle number between the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols. As a specific example of the stop result, the stop result of the address information D (1) is shown in a simplified manner.

  In the stop result table for normal holding notice, a plurality of stop results for stopping the same main symbol in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display region Rm are set by the symbol combination to be stopped on the effective lines L1 to L5. The information of the stop result is stored as address information. In this case, the same main symbol does not stop in any effective line L1 to L5, and the same main symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 in any effective line L1 to L5. Is set so that no reach line is formed. For example, when the address information D (1) is selected and the notice corresponding symbol (7) is stopped at the upper stage of the middle line L2 and the middle stage and the lower stage of the right line L3, “7 The symbol combinations to be stopped are set in the order of a main symbol with “,” a sub symbol between “6” and “7”, and a sub symbol between “6” and “7”.

  As the types of stop results of the normal hold notice, all the types (3 × 3 × 3 = 27) in which the same main symbol is stopped in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display region Rm are used in the effective lines L1 to L5. This is the number excluding the symbol combination (5) corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same main symbols stop together, and the symbol combination (5 lines × 2 types) that is out of reach, specifically 27 -5-10 = 12 types.

  Returning to the description of the hold notice effect setting process (FIG. 43), in the stop result determination process of step S2003, one stop result is determined from the stop result table for the normal hold notice and the address information is stopped in the RAM 244. The result is stored in the address storage area 244d. In subsequent step S2004, an effect pattern determination process for normal hold notice is executed. The stop result determined in step S2003 and the effect pattern determined in step S2004 are output to the display control device 212 as a stop result command and a pattern command in step S809 of the variation start process (FIG. 29). . Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the symbol display device 161 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the normal hold notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the notice symbols are stopped and displayed at the predetermined display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  When executing the special hold notice in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, a special suspension notice stop result setting process is executed. In the stop result setting process, the notice symbol information stored in step S1806 or step S1905 is grasped as to whether it is a non-specific symbol or a specific symbol, and which symbol is selected based on the grasped information. Decide whether to use a notice-compatible design. Then, a special suspension notice stop result table corresponding to the decided notice corresponding symbol is read from the ROM 243, and a symbol combination to be stopped on the effective lines L1 to L5 in the special reservation notice is determined.

  Here, the stop result table for special hold notice will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44B illustrates a stop result table in the middle line L2 when the number assigned to the notice corresponding symbol is “7”. Further, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the sub symbol arranged between the main symbols is conveniently indicated by using a middle number between the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols. As a specific example of the stop symbol, the stop result of the address information E (3) is shown in a simplified manner.

  In the stop result table for the special hold notice, the stop result of stopping the same main symbol in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs by the symbol combination to be stopped on the effective lines L1 to L5. Are set, and information on the stop result is stored as address information. In this case, the same main symbols do not stop at any valid line L1 to L5 and non-valid lines L6 to L11, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row also on any valid line L1 to L5. In Z3, a reach line is not formed by the same main symbol. For example, when the address information E (3) is selected and the notice corresponding symbol (7) is stopped at the upper part of the middle line L2, the middle part of the right ineffective line L6, and the lower part of the left line L1, the address information E (3) is placed on the middle line L2. From the top, a symbol combination that stops in the order of a main symbol with “7”, a main symbol with “6”, and a sub-symbol between “7” and “8” is set.

  And as a kind of the stop result of the special hold notice, from the all kinds (5 × 5 × 5 = 125) in which the same main symbol is stopped in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs, The symbol combination (5) corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same main symbols are stopped together in the effective lines L1 to L5, and the ineffective combination symbol combination (in which the same main symbols are stopped in the ineffective lines L6 to L11) 6), and the symbol combination (5 lines × 4 types) that is out of reach, and the symbol combination (12) of the above-described normal holding notice, specifically, 125-5-6 -20-12 = 82 types.

  In the special hold notice, since the hold notice is performed using the design that stops in the sub display area Rs in addition to the design that stops in the main display area Rm, the types of stop results are increased compared to the normal hold notice. Yes. Therefore, the outcomes in the hold notice are various, and the diversification of the production is realized.

  Returning to the description of the hold notice effect setting process (FIG. 43), in the stop result determination process in step S2005, one stop result is determined from the stop result table for the special hold notice and the address information is stopped in the RAM 244. The result is stored in the address storage area 244d. Then, in subsequent step S2006, an effect pattern determination process for special reservation notice is executed.

  The stop result determined in step S2005 and the effect pattern determined in step S2006 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S809 of the variation start process (FIG. 29). Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the symbol display device 161 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the special reservation notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the notice symbols in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position in the display screen G.

  After executing the process of step S2006, the process of storing the release flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2007. In step S2008, based on the processing result in step S2005, a process of storing the movable accessory to be driven and controlled in the accessory storage area 244g is executed. Information on the movable accessory to be driven and controlled is stored in a stop result table for special hold notice. For example, when the stop result of the address information E (3) is selected in step S2005, it is stored that the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 should be driven and controlled. Thereby, an affirmative determination is made in step S1208 in the processing for variation (FIG. 35), and the opening / closing control (steps S1209 to S1214) of the corresponding movable accessory and the display effect on the symbol display device 161 are performed.

  After executing the process of step S2004 or step S2008, the process of storing the notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2009, and then the effect setting process for the on-hold notice is ended. The notice execution flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to recognize that the notice condition is satisfied and the game times execute any one of the hold notices.

  Next, the process regarding the setting of the second special reservation advance notice accompanied with the roaring effect will be described. Such processing is performed in the reach setting processing (FIG. 32) for generating reach in the variation start processing.

  Referring again to FIG. 32, when the game time to be started is a game time corresponding to the occurrence of reach and the reach mode is a normal reach display (step S1001: YES), a notice condition establishment flag is set. Is stored (step S1004: YES), the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1005, a process of rewriting the information stored in the register in step S801 in the variation start process (FIG. 29) from the game number in which reach has been made to the game number in which special reservation notice is performed is executed.

  In subsequent step S1006, a stop result determination process for special notice is executed, and in step S1007, an effect pattern determination process for special hold notice is executed. These processes are the same as those in steps S2005 and S2006. The stop result determined in step S1006 and the effect pattern determined in step S1007 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S809 of the variation start process (FIG. 29). The The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the symbol display device 161 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the special reservation notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the notice symbols are stopped and displayed at the predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  In the subsequent step S1008, processing for storing the release flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and in step S1009, processing for storing the effect flag in the RAM 244 is executed. In step S1010, the process which memorize | stores the movable accessory which should be drive-controlled in the accessory storage area 244g is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S2008. As a result, in the mid-variation process (FIG. 35), an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, and the process for turning effect (steps S1202 to S1207) and the display effect on the symbol display device 161 are performed, and step S1208. In step S1209 to step S1214, a display effect on the symbol display device 161 is performed. Then, in step S1011, the process of storing the notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the effect setting process for generating reach is terminated.

  In other words, when setting the first special hold notice without the turn effect, the turn effect flag is not stored, and when the second special hold notice with the turn effect, the turn effect flag is stored. The processing configuration is the same for the stop result determination process, the effect pattern determination process, and the process for opening / closing control of the movable accessories 170 to 173.

  Further, in the effect setting process for generating reach, the stop result is the same as that in the case of the special hold notice, but the process related to the ineffective notice effect in which the movable accessories 170 to 173 do not move to the non-shielding position is also performed. This process is performed in steps S1023 to S1028 when the ineffective notice lottery process in step S1019 is won (step S1020: YES).

  In other words, in step S1023, a process of rewriting the information stored in the register in step S801 in the variation start process (FIG. 29) from a game generation in which a reach has occurred to a game time in which a special holding notice effect is performed. Incidentally, as described above, in the game times, the ineffective notice effect is performed instead of the special hold notice effect, but in the special hold notice and the invalid notice, the symbol stop result and the effect pattern are the same, and the movable accessory 170 Only whether or not 173 moves to the non-shielding position is different. Therefore, in step S1023, first, it stores as a game time for performing a special reservation notice effect as an effect of the current game time. By doing in this way, the kind of effect mode of the game time memorize | stored is decreased, and reduction of memory capacity is aimed at.

  In subsequent step S1024, a special hold notice stop result setting process is executed, and in step S1025, a special hold notice effect pattern determination process is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing in steps S1006 and S2006, and steps S1007 and S2007. The stop result determined in step S1024 and the effect pattern determined in step S1025 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S809 of the variation start process (FIG. 29). The Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 161 so as to execute a variable display corresponding to the special hold notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the notice symbols are stopped and displayed at the predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. However, since the release flag is not stored in the above process, the effect executed as described above is not the special hold notice effect but the ineffective notice effect.

  In step S2026, processing for storing the ineffective advance flag in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244 is executed. The non-valid advance notice flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to recognize that it is a game time in which an invalid notice effect is performed.

  In subsequent step S2027, a process of storing an effect flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and in step S2028, a process of storing a movable accessory to be driven and controlled in the accessory storage area 244g is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S2008. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 in the mid-variation process (FIG. 35), and the process for turning effect (steps S1202 to S1207) and the display effect on the symbol display device 161 are performed. After performing the process of step S2028, the reach setting process for generating the reach is terminated.

  Further, the above-mentioned ineffective notice effect may not be accompanied by a sword effect. This is set in the effect setting processing for normal deviation (step S808) in the variation start processing (FIG. 29). Such processing will be described again with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the ineffective notice effect is won in the ineffective notice lottery process performed in step S1105 (step S1106: YES), the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1109, processing for storing the ineffective notice effect in the register as the effect of the current game time is executed. In subsequent step S1109, a stop result setting process for special hold notice is executed, and in step S1110, an effect pattern determination process for special hold notice is executed. These processes are the same as the processes in step S1006, step S1024 and step S2005, step S1007, step S1025 and step S2006. The stop result determined in step S1109 and the effect pattern determined in step S1110 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S809 of the variation start process (FIG. 29).

  The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control so that the symbol display device 161 executes variable display corresponding to the special reservation notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the notice symbols are stopped and displayed at the predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. However, since the release flag is not stored in the above process, the effect is not a special hold notice effect but an ineffective notice effect.

  That is, the stop result is the same as that for the special hold notice in the ineffective notice effect, and the effect pattern is the same because the ineffective notice effect and the special hold notice effect differ only in the presence / absence of the opening / closing control of the movable accessories 170 to 173. Yes. In this way, while making the contents of the variable display on the display screen G common, the effect (whether it becomes a special hold notice effect or an invalid notice effect) is made different by the opening / closing control of the movable actors 170 to 173. The aim is to achieve both diversification of production and simplification of processing for variable display.

  After executing the process of step S1110, in step S1111, the process of storing the ineffective notice flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the effect setting process for losing normally ends.

  As described above, at the start of each game time, the stop result and the variation pattern on the display screen G are determined, and the effect of each game time is performed. Here, there is a case where a winning to the operation port 115 occurs at the timing when the game times are produced, and the holding information based on the winning is subject to the holding notice. In this case, in the present embodiment, a process for making a reservation notice is performed in the game game being executed. Hereinafter, this process will be described.

  This process is performed in steps S1215 and S1216 of the mid-variation process (FIG. 35). Referring to FIG. 35 again, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not the notice execution flag is not stored in the RAM 244 even though the notice condition establishment flag is stored in the RAM 244. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, as described above, the notice execution flag is stored by executing the change start process (FIG. 29) in the situation where the notice condition establishment flag is stored. Therefore, the situation in which the notice execution flag is not stored even though the notice condition establishment flag is stored is the situation in which the change display of symbols in one game round is started after the change start process is executed. Later, it means that a new winning for the operating port 115 occurs and a condition for executing the holding notice for the holding information acquired based on the winning is established.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1215, the replacement process is executed in step S1216, and then the mid-variation process is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1215, the mid-variation process is terminated as it is. Here, the replacement process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the replacement process, it is first determined in step S2101 whether or not an invalid notice flag is stored. If it is determined that the ineffective notice flag is stored, the ineffective notice flag is deleted in the subsequent step S2102. In step S2103, the release flag is stored in the RAM 244. In step S2103, the notice execution flag is stored in the RAM 244. Then, the replacement process is terminated.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the game is started, when the special hold notice and the stop result are the same, but the ineffective notice effect in which the movable accessories 170 to 173 do not move to the non-shielding position is set, The ineffective advance notice effect is changed to a special hold advance notice in which the movable actors 170 to 173 move to the non-shielding position. In this case, it is not necessary to correct the stop symbol, and a local increase in processing load can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, if the ineffective notice flag is not stored in step S2101, the stop result correcting process is executed in step S2105, and then the replacement process is terminated. Here, the stop result correction process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the stop result correction process, it is first determined in step S2201 whether or not the game time being executed is a game time corresponding to the super reach display. If it is determined that the game time corresponds to the super reach display, the stop symbol correction process is terminated. That is, in the case of super reach display, even if the notice condition is satisfied, the super reach display is performed without performing the hold notice.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the game time does not correspond to the super reach display, information on the notice symbol is read from the notice symbol storage area 244i in step S2202. In step S2203, it is determined whether or not all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed.

  The symbol variation display in the pachinko machine 10 will be described again with reference to FIG. 22. When the symbol variation display is performed on the symbol display device 161, first, the upper symbol row Z 1, the middle symbol row Z 2, and the lower symbol row Z 3. The high-speed fluctuation display (or the first speed display) is performed so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in all of the symbol rows becomes impossible or difficult in appearance. Thereafter, as the period T1 elapses from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 22A, first, for the upper symbol row Z1, each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the upper symbol row Z1 is identified. Is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display (or the second speed display slower than the first speed display) so that the appearance becomes easy, and the upper symbol row Z1 is displayed when the period T2 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. The fluctuation display at is stopped. Further, when the period T2 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation in this way, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the lower symbol row Z3 for the lower symbol row Z3. The display is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the identification of the symbols is easy in appearance, and the fluctuation display in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped when the period T3 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Further, when the period of T3 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation in this way, as shown in FIG. 22 (c), in the middle symbol row Z2, each displayed in the display screen G in the middle symbol row Z2 The display is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the symbols can be easily identified. Then, when the period T4 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped.

  In the above configuration, the periods T1, T2, T3, and T4 are determined according to various effect tables stored in the ROM 243, more specifically, in a one-to-one correspondence with various effect patterns. Then, the reach effect or the like is performed after the period T3 has elapsed and until the period T4 has elapsed.

  Note that it is not essential that the timing at which the symbol variation display in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and the timing at which the symbol variation display speed in the lower symbol row Z3 is switched at the same time. Good. Similarly, it is not essential that the timing at which the symbol variation display in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and the timing at which the symbol variation display speed in the middle symbol row Z2 is switched are not simultaneous, and the timings of both are shifted. Also good. Further, T1, T2, and T3 correspond one-to-one with the number of holding information stored at the start of game times, more specifically, according to the number of holding information stored at the start of game times. It is good also as a structure defined as follows. Furthermore, when the number of pieces of holding information stored at the start of the game round is the maximum number of holdings, any of T1, T2, and T3 may be set to “0”.

  As already described, the MPU 242 measures the time from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 161 using the progress counter provided in the RAM 244. Further, in the progress table provided in the ROM 243, the information of each counter value corresponding to the above T1, T2, T3 is in a one-to-one correspondence with the information of the effect pattern that can be set at the start of the game times Is remembered. In step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to T1 in the progress table, so that all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 change at high speed. It is determined whether it is in the middle.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46, when it is determined in step S2203 that all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed, the first correction process is executed in step S2204, and then the final stop result correction is performed. The process ends. If all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not changing at high speed in step S2203, that is, after the period T1 has elapsed, whether or not the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed in step S2205. Determine whether. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to T2 in the progress table. When the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed, that is, before the period T2 has elapsed, the second correction process is executed in step S2206, and then the stop result correction process is terminated. If the lower symbol row Z3 is not changing at high speed in step S2205, that is, if the period T2 has elapsed, whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed is determined in step S2207. judge. In this processing, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to T3 in the progress table. When the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed, that is, before the period T3 has elapsed, the third correction process is executed in step S2208, and then the stop result correction process is terminated. When the middle symbol row Z2 is not changing at high speed in step S2207, that is, after the elapse of the period T3, the stop result is not corrected, and the stop result correcting process is terminated as it is.

  Hereinafter, the first correction process in step S2204, the second correction process in step S2206, and the third correction process in step S2208 will be described.

  In the first correction process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 47, the special reservation advance notice lottery process is executed in step S2301, and it is determined whether or not the lottery is won in step S2302. The processing of step S2301 and step S2302 is the same as the processing of step S2001 and step S2002 in the effect setting processing for holding notice (FIG. 43). If the special hold notice effect is won in step S2205, a process of storing the release flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2303, and in the subsequent step S2304, the target movable accessory 170 to 173 is stored in the accessory storage area 244g. The process memorize | stored in is performed. Such processing is the same as in step S2008. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1208 in the subsequent fluctuation processing, and processing for opening / closing control of the movable accessory is performed.

  In a succeeding step S2305, it is determined whether or not the game time being executed is a game time corresponding to the normal reach display. In the case of the normal reach display, the process of storing the turn flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2306. Accordingly, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 in the processing for changing after the next time.

  If the special hold notice has not been won in step S2302, the normal reach display is not in effect (no reach has occurred) in step S2304, or after the processing in step S2306 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2307, the ROM 243 refers to the first stage correction table as the first stage correction information group. As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the first stage correction table is a pair for any combination of the information of the initial performance pattern and the information of the notice symbol except when the super reach display occurs. 1, the information of the first correction effect pattern is set, and the address information is set corresponding to the information of the first correction effect pattern. In this case, all the information on the effect pattern for the first correction is set as information on the effect pattern after the period T1 has elapsed from the start of the change. However, the information of each first modification effect pattern is set so as not to change the variable display time in the effect pattern that was initially set.

  By the way, in the first stage correction table, information on the production patterns of the special hold notice effect and the normal hold notice effect is set in correspondence with the information on the notice symbol. Therefore, the effect pattern to be referred to is different between the case where the special reservation notice effect is won in step S2302 and the case where it is not won.

  In subsequent step S2308, first correction address information corresponding to the combination of the type information of the notice symbol specified in step S2202 and the information of the effect pattern being executed stored in the pattern address storage area 244e. (First correction information) is specified from the first-stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in a correction address storage area 244j provided in the RAM 244.

  Since the first correction address information is stored in the correction address storage area 244j, the MPU 242 determines that the period T1 has elapsed from the start of the change based on the information of the progress counter, and is set this time. The light emitting unit 58 and the speaker unit 59 are driven and controlled so as to perform an effect corresponding to the information of the effect pattern for the first correction.

  In step S2309, the correction command including the first correction address information stored in step S2308 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 stores the first correction address information in the display side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254 based on the reception of the correction command. Further, the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a table similar to the first stage correction table shown in FIG. Then, the first correction variation display pattern is specified from the first correction address information, and the symbol variation display is executed using the variation display pattern. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the notice symbols are stopped and displayed at the predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  After executing the process of step S2309, after executing the process of storing the notice execution flag in the RAM 244 in step S2310, the first correction process is terminated.

  Next, the second correction process in step S2206 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the second correction process, first, in step S2401, the stop symbol information of the upper symbol row Z1 in the main display area Rm is grasped based on the information stored in the stop result address storage area 244d. In this case, there is a case where there are one main symbol and two cases as the type information of the stop symbol, but in the case of one, it is specified as a symbol to be determined. Both of them are specified as symbols to be determined.

  In the following step S2402, it is determined whether or not the first correction condition is satisfied for the determination target symbol specified in step S2401. The first correction condition is that when the information of the notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, a main symbol to which an odd number is added, if the determination target symbol is a specific symbol, the first correction condition is satisfied. When it is set so as to be determined and the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, the first is determined when the symbol to be determined is a non-specific symbol. It is set so that it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

  If it is determined that the first correction condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2403, and the stop symbol information of the upper symbol row Z1 in the sub display area Rs is grasped based on the information stored in the stop result address storage area 244d. To do. In this case, as stop symbol type information, there are a case where there are 0 main symbols and a case where there are 2 symbols. In the case of, both of them are specified as the symbols to be determined.

  In the subsequent step S2404, it is determined whether or not the second correction condition is satisfied for the determination target symbol specified in step S2403. The second correction condition is the same as the first correction condition described above. If the information of the notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an odd number attached, the second correction condition is the first if the symbol to be determined is a specific symbol. 2 When it is set so that it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied, and the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, the symbol to be determined is It is set so that it is determined that the second correction condition is satisfied when the symbol is a non-specific symbol.

  In other words, the first correction condition and the second correction condition have different symbols to be determined. The first correction condition is for a symbol that stops in the main display area Rm, and the second correction condition is for the sub-display area Rs. The symbol to be stopped is determined. Thus, the possibility that the correction condition is satisfied is improved by setting the stop symbol of the sub display region Rs in addition to the stop symbol of the main display region Rm. Specifically, in step S2401, when the stop symbol of the main display region Rm is a combination of a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol, the first correction condition is satisfied regardless of the notice symbol, but the main display region When the stop symbol of Rm is one of the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol and the notice symbol is the other, the first correction condition is not satisfied. On the other hand, in step S2404, even if the stop symbol of the main display area Rm where the first correction condition is not satisfied is one of the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol and the notice symbol is the other. In the sub display area Rs, since the other symbol is a stop symbol, the second correction condition is satisfied.

  If it is determined in step S2404 that the second correction condition is not satisfied, the stop symbol correction process is terminated. That is, when the second correction condition is not satisfied, the game round effect is continued with the effect pattern set in the variation start process without executing the hold notice. Incidentally, the case of negative determination in step S2404 is a case where two main symbols stop in the main display area Rm, and the stop symbols are specific symbols (the main symbols with 1 and 9), Furthermore, it is only when the notice design is a non-specific design.

  If it is determined in step S2404 that the second correction condition is satisfied, a process for storing the release flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2405, and the target movable accessory 170 to 173 is executed in subsequent step S2406. Is stored in the accessory storage area 244g. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1208 of the subsequent variable processing (FIG. 35), and the opening / closing control processing of the movable accessory is performed.

  In a succeeding step S2407, it is determined whether or not the game time being executed is a game time corresponding to the normal reach display. If it is determined that the game time corresponds to the normal reach display, a process of storing a turn flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2408. Accordingly, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 in the processing for changing after the next time.

  If the first correction condition is satisfied in step S2402, if the normal reach display is not performed (reach is not generated) in step S2406, or after executing the process of step S2408, the process proceeds to step S2409. In step S2409, the second stage correction table as the second stage correction information group stored in the ROM 243 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 48 (b), the second stage correction table is for any combination of the information of the original variable display pattern and the type information of the determination target symbol except when super reach display occurs. The second correction variation display pattern information is set in a one-to-one correspondence, and the address information is set in correspondence with each second correction variation display pattern information. In this case, all of the information on the second correction variation display pattern is set as information on the variation display pattern after the period T2 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the information of the variable display pattern for each second correction is set so as not to change the variable display time in the initially set variable display pattern.

  By the way, in the second stage correction table, information on the effect patterns of the special hold notice effect and the normal hold notice effect is set in correspondence with the information on the notice symbol. For this reason, reference is made to the case where the first correction condition is satisfied in step S2402 and the normal hold notice effect is corrected, and the case where the second correction condition is satisfied and the special hold notice effect is corrected in step S2404. The production pattern is different.

  In subsequent step S2410, the type information of the symbol to be determined that the correction condition is satisfied in step S2402 or step S2404 and the effect pattern of the game time being executed stored in the pattern address storage area 244e. The second correction address information (second correction information) corresponding to the combination of information and information is specified from the second stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction address storage area 244j.

  In addition, when a plurality of symbols are subject to determination, if the correction condition is satisfied for any symbol, the determination target symbol for which the correction condition is satisfied is determined by lottery or the like. It is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol with the smaller number or the symbol with the larger number is configured to be the symbol to be judged that the correction condition is satisfied. Also good.

  By storing the second correction address information in the correction address storage area 244j, the MPU 242 determines that the period T2 has elapsed from the start of the change based on the information of the progress counter, and then sets the currently set first address. (2) The light emitting unit 58 and the speaker unit 59 are driven and controlled so as to produce an effect corresponding to the information of the variable display pattern of correction.

  In step S 2411, a correction command including the second correction address information stored in step S 2410 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 stores the second correction address information in the display side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254 based on the reception of the correction command. The program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a table similar to the second stage correction table shown in FIG. Then, the second correction variation display pattern is specified from the second correction address information, and the symbol variation display is executed using the variation display pattern. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the notice symbols are stopped and displayed at the predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  After executing the process of step S2411, after executing the process of storing a notice execution flag in the RAM 244 in step S2412, the second correction process is terminated.

  Next, the third correction process in step S2208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the third correction process, first, in step S2501, the stop symbol information of the upper symbol row Z1 and the stop symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 in the main display area Rm based on the information stored in the stop result address storage area 244d. Know the information. In this case, there is a case where there is one main symbol and two cases as information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1, but in the case of one, it is specified as a symbol to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. In the case of two, both are specified as the symbols to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. In addition, there are cases where there is one main symbol and two cases as information on the stop symbol of the lower symbol row Z3, but in the case of one, it is specified as the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3. In the case of two, both are specified as the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3.

  In a succeeding step S2502, it is determined whether or not the third correction condition is satisfied for the determination target symbol specified in the step S2501. The third correction condition is satisfied when the same symbol of the same type exists in the symbols to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3. It is set not to be judged. In addition, even when there is a common symbol of the same type, if the information of the symbol for notice is a specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an odd number attached, the common symbol of the same type is When it is set to be determined that the third correction condition is satisfied when it is a specific symbol, and the type information of the warning symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, It is set so that it is determined that the third correction condition is satisfied when a common symbol of the same type is a non-specific symbol. Further, in the third correction condition, even when the same type of common symbol exists, in the case of a stop result corresponding to reach display, that is, when a reach line is formed by the common symbol of the same type Is set so that the third correction condition is not satisfied.

  If it is determined that the third correction condition is not satisfied, in step S2503, based on the information stored in the stop result address storage area 244d, the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 in the sub display area Rs is displayed. The information and the information of the lower symbol row Z3 are grasped. In this case, there is a case where there is one main symbol and two cases as information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1, but in the case of one, it is specified as a symbol to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. In the case of two, both are specified as the symbols to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. In addition, there are cases where there is one main symbol and two cases as information on the stop symbol of the lower symbol row Z3, but in the case of one, it is specified as the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3. In the case of two, both are specified as the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3.

  In subsequent step S2504, it is determined whether or not the fourth correction condition is satisfied for the symbol to be determined specified in steps S2501 and S2503. In the fourth correction condition, there is a common symbol of the same type in the symbols to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3 in the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs. In such a case, the correction condition is set so as not to be determined. In addition, even when there is a common symbol of the same type, if the information of the symbol for notice is a specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an odd number attached, the common symbol of the same type is If it is set to be determined that the fourth correction condition is satisfied when it is a specific symbol, and the type information of the symbol for notice is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, It is set so that it is determined that the fourth correction condition is satisfied when a common symbol of the same type is a non-specific symbol.

  Here, unlike the third correction condition, the fourth correction condition includes a symbol that stops in the main display region Rm and a symbol that stops in the sub display region Rs when there is a common symbol of the same type. When a reach line is formed, or when a reach line is formed between symbols stopped in the sub display area Rs, the fourth correction condition is satisfied on condition that the other condition is satisfied. Is set to As described above, in the present embodiment, the game times in which the out-of-reach effect is executed are not subject to the pending notice. That is, in the third correction condition for which the symbol that stops in the main display area Rm is a determination target, when the reach line is formed, the third correction condition is set not to be satisfied.

  On the other hand, in the fourth correction condition, the game times that result in stoppage of reach loss as a result of the fluctuation display, that is, the fluctuation display ends, and the stop result is all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as in the hold notice. When the same type of symbol is stopped, the game times are set to be handled as a holding notice. Furthermore, when a reach line is formed including a symbol that stops in the secondary display region Rs, the symbol that stops in the secondary display region Rs is not visible, that is, the corresponding movable accessory 170 to 173 is not shielded. The reach display is not performed without moving to the position. That is, in the fourth correction condition, when the reach line is formed including the symbols to be stopped in the sub display area Rs, the game that results in the stop of reach failure as a result of the reach display not being performed as described above. As a result, the fourth correction condition is set to be satisfied.

  As described above, the possibility that the correction condition is satisfied is improved by setting the stop symbol of the sub display area Rs in addition to the stop symbol of the main display area Rm. Specifically, the patterns having the same type of common symbols in the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3, except for the reach pattern when only the main display area Rm is to be determined. While there are 4 patterns for one type of symbol, if the sub display area Rs is included, there are 12 patterns, which is tripled.

  If the fourth correction condition is not satisfied in step S2504, the third correction process is terminated as it is. That is, in this case, the game round effect is continued according to the effect pattern set in the variation start process without executing the hold notice.

  If the fourth correction condition is satisfied in step S2504, a process of storing the release flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2505, and the target movable accessory 170 to 173 is used in the subsequent step S2506. The process which memorize | stores in the thing storage area 244g is performed. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1208 of the subsequent variable processing (FIG. 35), and processing for opening / closing control of the movable accessory is performed. In the third correction process, the determination process for determining whether or not the pre-correction is the normal reach display as in the first and second correction processes is not set. This is because in the third correction process, when the normal correction display is before the correction, neither the third correction condition nor the fourth correction condition is satisfied.

  When the third correction condition is satisfied in step S2502, or after executing the process of step S2506, the process proceeds to step S2507. In step S2507, the third stage correction table as the third stage correction information group stored in the ROM 243 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 48 (c), the third stage correction table is for any combination of the information of the original variable display pattern and the type information of the determination target symbol except when super reach occurs. Information on the third correction variation display pattern is set in a one-to-one correspondence, and address information is set in correspondence with the information on the third correction variation display pattern. In this case, all of the information on the third correction variation display pattern is set as information on the variation display pattern after the period T3 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the information of the variation display pattern for each third correction is set so as not to change the variation display time in the variation display pattern that was initially set.

  By the way, in the third stage correction table, information on the effect patterns of the special hold notice effect and the normal hold notice effect is set in correspondence with the information on the notice symbol. For this reason, reference is made to the case where the third correction condition is established in step S2502 and the normal hold notice effect is corrected, and the case where the fourth correction condition is satisfied and the special hold notice effect is corrected in step S2504. The production pattern is different.

  In the following step S2508, the type information of the determination target symbol for which the correction condition is established in step S2502 or step S2504, and the effect pattern of the game time being executed stored in the pattern address storage area 244e. The third correction address information (third correction information) corresponding to the combination with the information is specified from the third-stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction address storage area 244j.

  In addition, when a plurality of symbols are subject to determination, if the correction condition is satisfied for any symbol, the determination target symbol for which the correction condition is satisfied is determined by lottery or the like. It is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol with the smaller number or the symbol with the larger number is configured to be the symbol to be judged that the correction condition is satisfied. Also good.

  By storing the third correction address information in the correction address storage area 244j, the MPU 242 determines that the period T3 has elapsed from the start of the change based on the information of the progress counter, and then sets the currently set first address. 3 The light emitting unit 58 and the speaker unit 59 are driven and controlled so as to produce an effect corresponding to the information of the variable display pattern for correction.

  In step S2509, a correction command including the third correction address information stored in step S2508 is output to the display control device 212. In response to receiving the correction command, the display control device 212 stores the third correction address information in the display side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254. Further, the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a table similar to the third stage correction table shown in FIG. Then, the third correction variation display pattern is specified from the third correction address information, and the symbol variation display is executed using the variation display pattern. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the notice symbols are stopped and displayed at the predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  After executing the process of step S2509, after executing the process of storing a notice execution flag in the RAM 244 in step S2510, the third correction process is terminated.

  As a result, when the notice condition is satisfied while the game time variation display is being performed, the hold notice can be executed in the game times in which the variation display is performed. In this case, in the symbol correction process, not only the main display area Rm but also the sub display area Rs is determined as a determination target for the correction, thereby greatly improving the possibility of correction, and an opportunity to execute the hold notice. Can be increased.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The hold notice corresponding to the hold information that is stored in the hold area RE of the hold ball storage area 232 and that is not the target of the determination is executed in the game times before the game times related to the hold information. Sometimes. As a result, for the player, only a game that causes a game ball to be awarded to the operation port 115 and a game that confirms the determination result of the hold information acquired based on the win in the game times related to the hold information. If a plurality of hold information is stored in the hold area RE, the result of the decision on the success / failure of the order of the decision on the success / failure determination will be made according to the content of the hold notice. The game of prediction is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  The reservation notice is made according to the display mode on the display screen G of the symbol display device 161. As a result, for the player, if the player is paying attention to the display screen G in an attempt to grasp the determination result of each game time, he / she can automatically confirm the hold notice and miss it even though the hold notice is given. It is suppressed that it will be. In addition, since the hold notice is performed based on the result of stopping the symbols of the game times on the display screen G, the effect of preventing the hold notice from being overlooked is enhanced. In particular, it is possible to miss the hold notice by preventing the player from knowing the timing when the hold notice is performed by making the hold notice according to the mode of the stop result in the variation display of the symbols of each game. Is further reduced.

  In the configuration in which the hold notice is performed according to the mode of the stop result as described above, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are set as areas where the symbols on the display screen G are stopped and displayed, and the sub display area Rs is set. The symbol to be stopped is configured to be switchable between a state that can be visually recognized by the movable accessories 170 to 173 and a state that is difficult to visually recognize. And it set so that a preliminary announcement may be performed also by the stop result including the symbol which stops in the said sub display area | region Rs. Even when the holding notice is made, when the stop result including the symbol that stops in the sub display area Rs is performed as described above, the symbol that stops in the sub display area Rs is difficult to visually recognize as described above. Therefore, the player is less likely to notice that the advance notice is held until the symbol is switched from a state in which the symbol is difficult to view to a state in which the symbol is visible. For this reason, it is possible to produce an unexpected effect when a hold notice is made. In addition, when the symbol is switched from a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize to a state in which the symbol is visible in this way, it is accompanied by the operation of the corresponding movable accessory 170 to 173, so that it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it. it can. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention with respect to the hold notice.

  Furthermore, when performing the reservation notice using the symbols stopped in the sub display area Rs, not only the effect on the display screen G but also the operation of the movable accessories 170 to 173 is accompanied, and the effect becomes flashy. Thereby, the further improvement of the attention degree with respect to such a hold notice is achieved.

  When the notice condition is established during the display of the variation of the symbol in each game time (when the notice condition establishment flag is stored), the game is stopped or stopped in the main display area Rm in the game time. It is determined whether or not the hold notice can be executed, and if it can be executed, the stop symbol of the changing symbol sequence is changed, and the sub-display area Rs is further used to determine whether or not it can be executed. It was set as the structure which adds the symbol which makes it stop or has stopped. In other words, the number of symbols that are used to determine whether or not a hold notice can be executed, and the type of hold notice (normal hold notice or special hold notice) are both increased compared to a configuration that only performs a normal hold notice. Therefore, when the notice condition is satisfied during the variable display, it is possible to dramatically improve the possibility of executing the hold notice in the game times.

  In order to exhibit such a function, first, it is determined whether or not the normal hold notice can be executed, and when the normal hold notice cannot be executed, it is determined whether or not the special hold notice can be executed. In the case of the normal hold notice, the hold notice is effective only with the stop symbol in the main display area Rm regardless of whether or not the movable objects 170 to 173 are operated. It is thought that it has a sense of security that the hold notice becomes effective. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the normal hold notice is preferentially executed, the player can enjoy the subsequent effects (subsequent game times) with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, in the situation where the notice condition is established at the start of the game round, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result triggers the establishment of the hold condition, priority is given to the special hold notice instead of the normal hold notice. The configuration. In other words, when the notice condition is established during the game round, the normal hold notice takes precedence regardless of the trigger condition establishment, and when the notice condition is established at the start of the game round, the special hold notice is given. Takes precedence. For this reason, for example, in a situation in which any hold notice is made in the previous game round, if a special hold notice is given in the game round, there is a high possibility of having a jackpot result in the subsequent game round, If a notice condition is established in the situation where no previous hold notice is made in the previous game round, and a normal hold notice is given in that game round, it will be a big hit result afterwards even if it is not a special hold notice. Expectation swells. In other words, although the special hold notice has a higher expectation that it will result in a jackpot after that, a winning to the operating port 115 occurred during the game round, and the normal hold notice was given at that game round. In some cases, the expectation that will result in a jackpot is not inferior to the special reservation notice. By doing so, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation even if it is a normal hold notice without increasing the degree of attention to the special hold notice.

  As described above, when the notice condition is established during the game round and the hold notice is executed in the game round, the stop symbol of the symbol row during the high-speed fluctuation display is changed. When high-speed fluctuation display is in progress, it is difficult for the player to identify the changing symbol. By changing such a symbol that is changing, the discomfort that the change gives to the player is reduced. can do.

  Even if the notice condition is not satisfied at the start of the game, if the lottery for the ineffective notice effect that results in the same stop result as the special hold notice is drawn, and the lottery is won, the special hold notice will be stopped. It was set as the structure which starts a variable display so that it may become a result. As a result, when the notice condition is established in the game round, a special hold notice is given only by placing the movable actors 170 to 173 in an unshielded state without changing the changing symbol or the stopped symbol. Can be done. Therefore, when the notice condition is satisfied during the game round, the symbol changing process is not necessary as described above, and an increase in the processing load due to the execution of the pending notice can be suppressed.

  In particular, in this configuration, even during the period in which each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed until it is fixedly displayed, a special reservation notice may be executed because the stop symbol is not changed. it can. Thereby, the opportunity for a holding notice to be performed can be further increased.

  Further, when the ineffective notice effect is won, the stop result of the game times is set to the same stop result as the case where the special hold notice is performed as described above, and the ineffective notice flag is stored in the RAM 244. In this way, if a notice condition is satisfied in the game round, the suspension notice is executed only by determining whether or not the invalid notice flag is stored, instead of grasping the stop result. It can be determined whether or not it is possible, and an extreme increase in processing load can be preferably avoided.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when the hold information corresponding to the game times for which the reach display is performed is obtained, the notice condition is established with a predetermined probability, that is, when the hold notice is performed. Is configured so that reach display is finally executed at any game times. The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a case where a reach display is not finally performed even if a hold notice is performed is set. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described.

  First, the removal notice setting process in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the detachment notice setting process in the present embodiment, and shows a process performed in place of the detachment notice setting process shown in FIG. Note that the release notice setting process is a process executed in step S1708 of the hold notice setting process (FIG. 40) by the MPU 202 of the effect control device 82 as already described.

  First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time is a release reach hold command. If it is determined that the command is a detach reach hold command, the processing from step S2602 to step S2606 is executed. Since the processing of step S2602 to step S2606 is the same as the processing of step S1902 to step S1906 in the first embodiment, the description is incorporated.

  If it is determined in step S2601 that the command is not a miss reach hold command but a normal miss support hold command, the process advances to step S2607. In step S2607, it is determined whether or not the production-side reserved storage number SN is “2” or more. If the performance-side reserved memory number SN is less than “2”, the extraordinary advance notice setting process is terminated. If the production-side reserved storage number SN is equal to or greater than “2”, a discontinuous notice lottery process is executed in step S2608. In this lottery process, the reach display described above is not performed with reference to the values acquired from the discontinuous notice counters from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 and the discontinuous notice tables from the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute a discontinuous notice as a hold notice. In a succeeding step S2609, it is determined whether or not the discontinuous notice is executed based on the process in the step S2608. If it is determined that the non-continuous notice is not to be executed, the extraordinary notice setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2609 that the discontinuous notice is to be executed, processing similar to the processing in steps S2604 to S2606 is executed in steps S2610 to S2612. In other words, in step S2610, a notice symbol determination process corresponding to the departure is executed, in step S2611, a notice symbol storage process is executed, and in step S2612, a notice condition establishment flag is stored in the RAM 244.

  In a succeeding step S2613, a process for storing the discontinuous flag in various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244 is executed. The non-continuous flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to recognize that the non-continuous notice is being performed. In the subsequent step S2614, a process of inputting “2” to the discontinuous counter provided in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 is executed. The non-continuous counter is a counter for the MPU 242 to grasp the game times corresponding to the hold information that has been triggered by the non-continuous notice. After executing the process of step S2614, the off-line notice setting process is terminated.

  Next, an effect setting process for holding notice in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the hold notice effect setting process in the present embodiment, and shows a process executed in place of the stay notice effect setting process shown in FIG. The production setting process for holding notice is a process executed in step S807 of the process for starting change (FIG. 29) as already described.

  In the effect setting process for holding notice in the present embodiment, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the discontinuous flag is stored in the RAM 244. If it is determined that the non-continuous flag is stored, a process of subtracting 1 from the non-continuous counter is executed in step S2702. In step S2703, based on the processing result in step S2702, it is determined whether or not the discontinuous counter is “0”.

  If it is determined in step S2701 that the discontinuous flag is not stored, or if it is determined in step S2703 that the discontinuous counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2704. In step S2704, a special hold notice effect lottery process is executed in the same manner as in step S2001. In step S2705, whether or not a special hold notice effect is executed is determined based on the processing result in step S2704 as in step S2002. . If it is determined in step S2705 that the special hold notice effect is not to be executed, the normal hold notice process is executed in steps S2706 and S2707 in the same manner as in steps S2003 and S2004.

  If it is determined in step S2703 that the discontinuous counter is “0”, or if it is determined in step S2705 that a special reservation notice is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2708. In step S2708, a special hold notice stop result determination process is executed, and in step S2709, a special hold notice effect pattern determination process is executed. Since these processes are the same as the processes in steps S2005 and S2006, the description is incorporated.

  In a succeeding step S2710, it is determined whether or not the discontinuous flag is stored in the RAM 244. If it is determined that the non-continuous flag is stored, the process advances to step S2711 to determine whether or not the non-continuous counter is “0”. If it is determined in step S2710 that the discontinuous flag is not stored, or if it is determined in step S2711 that the discontinuous counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2712. The processing in step S2712 and step S2713 is the same as the processing in step S2007 and step S2008. In step S2712, the processing for storing the release flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and in step S2713, the target movable combination 170 to 173 is displayed. The process to memorize is executed.

  After performing the process of step S2707 or step S2713, in step S2714, the process of storing the notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the effect setting process for the on-hold notice is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2711 that the discontinuous counter is “0”, that is, if it is the game time corresponding to the hold information that triggered the discontinuous notice, the process proceeds to step S2715. In step S2715, the discontinuous flag is deleted. Then, in step S2716, a process is performed in which the effect of the current game time is not a special hold notice effect but an ineffective notice effect. Specifically, in step S2716, processing for storing the ineffective notice flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and processing for deleting the notice condition establishment flag in the RAM 244 is executed. After executing the process of step S2716, the effect setting process for the on-hold notice is ended.

  Although detailed description with reference to the drawing is omitted, as described in the first embodiment, the hold notice is not only the hold notice effect setting process in the variation start process, but also the reach setting effect setting process. (FIG. 32) is also set (when normal reach is selected, it is set as a special hold notice effect with a turn effect). Therefore, in the effect setting process for generating reach in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S1004 that the notice condition establishment flag is stored, first, similarly to steps S2701 to S2703, first, the discontinuous flag is set. Is stored, and if stored, 1 is subtracted from the non-continuous counter before proceeding to step S1005, and if not stored, proceed directly to step S1005. Note that the hold information that triggers the discontinuous notice is the hold information based on the hold command corresponding to complete detachment, so that the game times in which the discontinuous counter is “0” does not correspond to the normal reach display.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in the non-continuous notice, in the game times corresponding to the hold information that triggered the non-continuous notice, the special hold notice effect and the stop result are the same, but the corresponding movable accessory 170˜ An ineffective notice effect is performed in which 173 is not in the non-shielding state. In this case, since the notice condition establishment flag is erased as described above, the hold notice is not performed in the subsequent game rounds.

  On the other hand, since the notice condition establishment flag is erased, the notice condition may be established based on the hold information acquired during the game. In other words, if a notice condition is established during the execution of a game time corresponding to the hold information that triggered the discontinuous notice, a hold notice is made at that game time. In this case, since the notice condition establishment flag is stored and the notice execution flag is not stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1215 of the changing process (FIG. 35) and the replacement process (step S1216). ) Is performed. In the replacement process (FIG. 45), since the ineffective notice flag is stored as described above, an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, and in step S2102 to step S2105, the ineffective notice effect is replaced with the special hold notice effect. Is performed. As a result, when the notice condition is established in the game times corresponding to the hold information that triggered the discontinuous notice, the hold notice can be executed.

  According to the embodiment described above in detail, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  As a kind of embodiment of the hold notice, there is a non-continuous notice that will hold the hold notice over a number of game times, but will not eventually become a reach display and will not be held. In the game times corresponding to the hold information, that is, the game times without holding notice and holding no reach display, the ineffective notice effect is performed. When the notice condition is satisfied during the execution of the game times, the ineffective notice effect is replaced with the special hold notice effect. Accordingly, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation when a hold notice is made at a plurality of game times and a reach display is made at the next game time even though the continuous hold notice is interrupted. .

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since it is configured to perform an ineffective notice effect in the final game time of the non-continuous notice, even if the notice condition is established in the final game time, Since it is only necessary to replace the ineffective notice effect with the special reservation notice effect, it is possible to suppress an extreme increase in processing load.

  Note that the configuration in which the ineffective notice effect is performed in the final game time can be applied as a configuration in which the ineffective notice effect is performed in a game time in which some inconvenience may occur when the reservation notice is not executed. This inconvenience is a case where the notice condition is established in the last game time of the discontinuous notice effect as described above, or a case where the game time is being executed with the reserved memory number being 0, for example, There may be a situation in which a hold notice is not performed over a plurality of game times (a situation in which the execution frequency of the hold notice is low).

  If the hold condition is satisfied when the number of hold memories is 0 and the game is being executed, if the hold notice is not executed in the game time, the game information of the hold information that triggers the establishment of the hold condition will be used. No hold notice will be given in the previous game round. Therefore, in the case of starting game play with the number of reserved memories being 0, it is a case where a notice condition is established in the game round by setting it to perform an invalid notice effect in the game round. In addition, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience that the hold notice is not performed in the game times before the game times of the hold information that is the trigger for the establishment of the notice condition because the hold notice cannot be executed in the game times.

  In addition, the situation where the execution frequency of the hold notice is low means that the notice condition has not been satisfied for a while (for example, over 100 consecutive game times). Even if the notice condition is established in such a situation, if the reservation notice cannot be executed, it is impossible to provide the player with a special opportunity. Therefore, for example, a frequency grasping unit that grasps the frequency of the hold notice is provided in the RAM 244, and when it is grasped by the frequency grasping means that the frequency is less than a predetermined frequency, an ineffective notice effect may be provided. . Thereby, it becomes possible to suitably execute the hold notice without missing a special opportunity.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the hold notice mode is different from the first and second embodiments. That is, in the case where the hold notice is continuously performed over a plurality of game times, the hold notice with an effect different from the hold notice executed in the previous game time is performed in each consecutive game time. . More specifically, the same notice corresponding symbol is stopped in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as in the first and second embodiments as a mode of holding notice. Then, a so-called step-up effect as a stage effect such as an effect or the like is performed on the notice-corresponding symbol along with the hold notice by the symbol. First, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 53, the flow of the reservation notice of the present embodiment will be described.

  When the notice condition is satisfied, the same main symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 so as not to correspond to the reach display and the jackpot result as in the first and second embodiments. In this case, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), in the game times two times before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition, bubbles are generated in the background of the display screen G as the first effect of the stage effect. A display effect is produced in which the screen springs upward from below.

  FIG. 53 (b) shows a second stage effect as a second stage effect when the previous game round, that is, the game round immediately before the game round related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition is performed. In this way, a display effect is performed such that the main symbol that is a notice-corresponding symbol is surrounded by an effect such as an aura. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), the variable display ends in a stop mode that results in a jackpot as the game times related to the hold information whose subsequent game times are the triggers for establishing the notice condition.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 53 (d) → FIG. 53 (c), in the next game round in which the holding notice with the first effect is performed, there may be a big hit result instead of the second effect. Further, there may be a case where a detachment reach is performed in the game times that continue through the first effect and the second effect, or a detachment reach is performed in the game times that follow the first effect without passing through the second effect.

  Next, the jackpot notice setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the jackpot notice setting process is a process executed in step S1707 of the hold notice setting process (FIG. 40), and FIG. 54 is executed instead of the jackpot notice setting process shown in FIG. Processing is shown.

  In the jackpot notice setting process in the present embodiment, the processes of steps S2801 to S2807 are executed in the same manner as the processes of steps S1801 to S1807. In step S2808, a numerical value obtained by subtracting 1 from the production-side reserved storage number SN is input to the stage counter provided in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244. The stage counter is a counter for the MPU 242 to grasp the number of pieces of hold information that is the target of game play before the hold information that triggers the establishment of the notice condition. That is, in step S2808, a process is executed in which the number of hold information to be game-played before the current hold information is input to the stage counter.

  In a succeeding step S2809, a stage effect selection process is executed. Whether the stage effect selection process is the second stage notice for performing the hold notice with the first effect and the second effect before the game time of the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition in the above stage effect. This is a process for selecting either the first stage notice in which only the hold notice with the first effect is performed without performing the hold notice with the second effect. Such a selection rate is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the two-stage notice is selected with a probability of 70%. In step S2809, the selection counter is acquired from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244, and the selection table is acquired from the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, and the above selection processing is performed.

  In a succeeding step S2810, it is determined whether or not the first stage notice is selected based on the processing result in the step S2809. If the second-stage notice is selected instead of the first-stage notice, the process for storing the second-stage flag in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244 is executed in step S2811, and then the main jackpot notice setting is performed. The process ends. The second stage flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the second stage notice is selected.

  If it is determined in step S2802 that the advance notice lottery is not won and it is determined that the notice condition is not satisfied, or if it is determined in step S2810 that the first stage notice is selected, the main jackpot notice setting is performed as it is. End the process.

  Next, the removal notice setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the removal notice setting process is a process executed in step S1708 of the hold notice setting process (FIG. 40), and FIG. 55 is executed instead of the removal notice setting process shown in FIG. Shows the processing.

  In the removal notice setting process in the present embodiment, the processes in steps S2901 to S2906 are executed in the same manner as the processes in steps S1901 to S1906. In step S2907, as in step S2808, processing for inputting a numerical value obtained by subtracting 1 from the production-side reserved storage number SN is executed in the stage counter. In the subsequent step S2908, a stage effect selection process is executed in the same manner as in step S2809. Although the selection rate in this process is arbitrary, in the present embodiment, the selection process in step S2908 is set such that the first stage notice is selected with a probability of 70%. That is, in the stage effect selection process in the jackpot notice setting process, the second stage notice is selected with a probability of 70%, and in the stage effect selection process in the outage notice setting process, the second stage notice is selected with a probability of 30%. In addition, the expectation level that results in a jackpot after the second stage effect is set higher than the expectation level that results in a jackpot result after the first stage effect is selected.

  In subsequent step S2909, similarly to step S2810, it is determined whether or not the first stage effect is selected based on the processing result of step S2908, and it is determined that the second stage effect is selected instead of the first stage effect. In such a case, after executing the process of storing the second stage flag in step S2910, the outlier notice setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2901 that the command is not a detach reach correspondence hold command but a complete detachment support hold command, in step S2903 it is determined that the hold notice is not won and the notice condition is not satisfied, or in step S2909 If the first stage effect is selected, the off-line notice setting process is terminated.

  Next, an effect setting process for holding notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the effect setting process for holding notice is the process executed in step S807 in the process for starting change (FIG. 29), and FIG. 56 shows the effect setting process for holding notice shown in FIG. It shows a process executed instead.

  In the effect setting process for holding notice in the present embodiment, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not a duplicate flag is stored in various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244, and it is determined that a duplicate flag is stored. In this case, the duplicate notice setting process is executed in step S3002, and the effect setting process for holding notice is ended. The duplicate flag and duplicate notice setting process will be described in detail later.

  If it is determined in step S3001 that the duplication flag is not stored, the process advances to step S3003 to determine whether or not the above-mentioned stage counter is “3” or more. Incidentally, if the stage counter is “0”, that is, if the current game time is a game time corresponding to the hold information that triggers the establishment of the notice condition, the change notice process (FIG. 29) will indicate the hold notice. An effect setting process for a big hit (step S803) or an effect setting process for generating a reach (step S805) is performed instead of the effect setting process. Therefore, when it is determined in step S3003 that the stage counter is not “3” or more but less than “3”, the stage counter is not “0” and is limited to “2” or “1”. .

  If it is determined in step S3003 that the stage counter is less than “3”, that is, “2” or “1”, it is determined in step S3004 whether the stage counter is “2”. If “2”, it is determined in step S3005 whether the second stage flag is stored. The case where the stage counter is “2” in step S3004 and the second stage flag is stored in step S3005 means that the game is executed before the hold information that triggers the establishment of the notice condition. This is a case where there are two such hold information including the hold information related to the current game round, and the second stage notice is selected in the stage effect selection process (step S2809 or step S2908). In other words, this means that the game times of this time should execute a hold notice with the first effect, and in this case, the process of storing in the register to perform the first effect as the stage effect of the current hold notice in step S3006. Execute.

  If it is determined in step S3005 that the second stage flag is not stored, the hold information related to the game times executed before the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition is the hold information related to the current game time. There are two items including information, and the first stage notice is selected in the stage effect selection process. In this case, no pending notice is executed in the current game round.

  If it is determined in step S3004 that the stage counter is not “2”, it means that the stage counter is “1”. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3007, and it is determined whether or not the second stage flag is stored. In the case where the stage counter is “1” in step S3004 and the second stage flag is not stored in step S3007, the game times executed before the hold information that triggers the establishment of the notice condition. There is a case where there is one piece of hold information related to the game times this time, and the first stage notice is selected in the stage effect selection process. In other words, this means that the current game round should execute the hold notice with the first effect. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3006, and the register is set to perform the first effect as the stage effect of the current hold notice. The process to memorize is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3007 that the second stage flag is stored, the hold information related to the game times executed before the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition is the current game number. There is one piece of hold information relating to the second stage notice, and the second stage notice is selected in the stage effect selection process. In this case, this means that the game times of this time should execute the hold notice with the second effect. Then, it progresses to step S3008 and performs the process memorize | stored in a register | resistor so that a 2nd effect may be performed as a stage effect of this holding notice.

  After performing the process of step S3006 or step S3008, the process similar to the process of said step S2001-step S2009 is performed in step S3009-step S3015.

  If the stage counter is “3” or more in step S3003, if the second stage flag is not stored in step S3005, or after executing the process of step S3015, 1 is set from the stage counter in step S3016. After executing the subtracting process, the effect setting process for this reservation notice is ended.

  Further, as described in the first embodiment, the hold notice can be set not only in the hold notice effect setting process but also in the reach setting effect setting process (FIG. 32) at the start of the game. . Thus, hereinafter, a process when a hold notice is set in the reach setting process for generating a reach according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In other words, if it is determined in step S1001 that the reach display of the current game time is not normal reach display but normal reach display, it is determined in step S3101 whether a notice condition establishment flag is stored. If it is determined that the notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1012. On the other hand, if it is determined that the notice condition establishment flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3102 to determine whether or not the duplication flag is stored. If the duplication flag is stored, after performing the duplication notice setting process in step S3103, the effect setting process for generating the reach is terminated. The duplication flag and duplication notice setting processing will be described in detail later.

  If the duplicate flag is not stored in step S3102, it is determined in step S3104 whether the stage counter is “3” or more or “0”. When it is determined that the stage counter is “3” or more or “0”, the process proceeds to step S1012 and no hold notice is given. In this case, the stage counter is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1012.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3104 that the stage counter is “2” or “1”, the process proceeds to step S3105. In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the stage counter is “2”. If it is “2”, it is determined in step S3106 whether or not the second stage flag is stored. If the second stage flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1012 and no hold notice is given this time. In this case, the stage counter is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1012. If the second stage flag is stored in step S3106, in step S3107, a process of storing in the register so as to perform the first presentation as the stage presentation of the current hold notice is executed.

  If it is determined in step S3105 that the stage counter is “1” instead of “2”, it is determined in step S3108 whether the second stage flag is stored. If the second stage flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3107 and the first effect is stored in the register. If the second stage flag is stored in step S3108, in step S3109, a process of storing in the register so as to perform the second effect as the stage effect of the current hold notice is executed.

  After executing the process of step S3107 or step S3109, the process of subtracting 1 from the step counter is executed in step S3110, and the same process as in steps S1005 to S1011 is executed in steps S3111 to S3117. Then, the effect setting process for generating the reach is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold notice is configured to be executed at the game times one or two times before the game times related to the hold information that triggers the establishment of the notice condition. The effect selected by the effect selection process is executed as the stage effect of the hold notice in the game times one time before or twice before. In addition, as described above, the stage announcement for the hold notice is set to have a higher expectation level that results in a big hit later when the second stage notice is selected than when the first stage notice is selected. For this reason, it is assumed that the player expects the hold notice with the second effect to be executed instead of the reach display in the next game round in which the hold notice with the first effect is executed. Is done. In this way, in a configuration with a staged effect in the hold notice as in the present embodiment, the player expects the effect to further progress.

  However, depending on the situation where the hold condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned staged effects may be performed depending on the number of hold information related to the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the hold conditions. It can be difficult to do. That is, when the number of the hold information is small, there may be a disadvantage that a staged effect for each game time cannot be suitably executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, a characteristic configuration is provided to eliminate such inconvenience. The characteristic configuration will be described below.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the replacement process in the present embodiment. As already described, the replacement process is a process that is executed in step S1216 in the changing process (FIG. 35), and is a process that is performed when a notice condition is satisfied during the execution of a game. FIG. 58 shows processing executed instead of the replacement processing shown in FIG.

  In the replacement process in the present embodiment, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the stage counter is “2” or more. When the stage counter is “2” or more, that is, the game times that are executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggers the establishment of the notice condition without including the currently executed game times If two or more pieces of information are included, the replacement process is terminated as it is. In such a case, since there are two or more game times that are executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggers the establishment of the notice condition, any stage notice is selected by the stage effect selection process. However, it is possible to execute the selected stage notice before the game times related to the hold information that triggers the establishment of the notice condition. Therefore, it is not necessary to make a hold notice in the currently executed game times.

  When the stage counter is less than “2” in step S3201, the stage counter is “1” or “0”. Incidentally, unlike the case of step S3003 in the above-described effect setting process for holding notice (FIG. 56), the case where the step counter is “0” is included in the case of negative determination in step S3201. This is because the replacement process is executed in the changing process (FIG. 35), the hold notice effect setting process is executed in the change start process (FIG. 29), and the execution timing is different. . That is, this replacement process is a process that is performed after the stage counter is decremented by 1, and the game times that are executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition are currently being executed. This includes the case of game times only (stage counter is “0”).

  If the stage counter is “1” or “0” in step S3201, the process proceeds to step S3202, and it is determined whether the stage counter is “1” and the second stage flag is not stored. The case where the stage counter is “1” and the second stage flag is not stored is more than the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition without including the currently executed game times. This means that there is one holding information related to the game times executed before, and the first stage notice is selected by the stage effect selection process. In this case, since the hold notice with the first effect may be executed in the next game time instead of the game time currently being executed, the replacement process is terminated as it is.

  The case of negative determination in step S3202 means that the stage counter is “1” and the second stage flag is stored, or the stage counter is “0”. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3203. In step S3203, it is determined whether the stage counter is “0” and the second stage flag is stored. In the case of negative determination in step S3203, the stage counter is “1” and the second stage flag is stored, or the stage counter is “0” and the second stage flag is stored. Means not. In the former case, a holding notice with the first effect should be given at the game time currently being executed, and a holding notice with the second effect should be given in the next game time. In the latter case, This means that a reservation notice with the first effect should be made in the game round. That is, in any case, it is necessary to make a hold notice with the first effect in the currently executed game round. Therefore, if a negative determination is made in step S3203, it is determined whether or not an invalid notice flag is stored in step S3204. If it is determined that a invalid notice flag is stored, an invalid notice flag is set in step S3205. In step S3206, the release flag is stored. In step S3207, the target movable combination 170 to 173 is stored. In step S3208, the notice execution flag is stored. The processing from step S3204 to step S3208 is the same as the processing from step S2101 to step S2105, and the special suspension notice is executed in the game times currently being executed by these processing.

  If it is determined in step S3204 that the ineffective notice flag is not stored, stop result correction processing is executed in step S3209. The process of step S3209 is substantially the same as the process of step S2106 (FIG. 45). However, in the present embodiment, the processing in the case where it is determined in the second correction process (FIG. 49) or the third correction process (FIG. 50) that the pending notice cannot be executed in the currently executed game round is different. Yes. Therefore, the second correction process and the third correction process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 59 and 60. 59 shows processing executed instead of FIG. 49, and FIG. 60 shows processing executed instead of FIG. In addition, since the changes in the second correction process and the third correction process are the same, in the following description, the second correction process and the third correction process will be described together.

  That is, in the second correction process (FIG. 59), the second correction condition is not satisfied in step S2404, and in the third correction process (FIG. 60), the fourth correction condition is not satisfied in step S2504. If it is determined that the pending notice cannot be executed in the currently executed game times even if the symbol is included, the second correction process (FIG. 59) is step S3301, and the third correction process (FIG. 60) is step S3401. Then, it is determined whether or not the stage counter is “1” and the second stage flag is stored. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S3301 or step S3401 means that the pending notice cannot be executed in the currently executed game round, but the stage effect must be developed to the second stage in the next game round. To do. In this case, in the second correction process (FIG. 59), in step S3302, in the third correction process (FIG. 60), the process of storing the duplicate flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S3402, and then these correction processes are terminated. . The duplication flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that both the hold notice with the first effect and the hold notice with the second effect should be executed in one game round. If a negative determination is made in step S3301 or step S3401, that is, if the stage counter is “0” and the second stage flag is not stored, these correction processes are terminated as they are.

  Returning to the description of the replacement process (FIG. 58), after executing the process of step S3208 or step S3209, it is determined in step S3210 whether or not a notice execution flag is stored. If the advance notice flag is stored in step S3210, it means that the hold advance notice can be executed in the game times currently being executed in any of the above processes. In this case, the process for storing in the register so as to execute the first effect as the stage effect of the current hold notice in step S3211 is executed, and then the replacement process is terminated.

  If the stage counter is “0” in step S3203 and the second stage flag is stored, the duplicate notice correction process is executed in step S3212 and the replacement process is terminated. .

  Here, as described above, the overlap flag is stored in the second correction process (FIG. 59) and the third correction process (FIG. 60), so that the fluctuation start process (at the start of the next game round) ( An affirmative determination is made in step S3001 of the effect setting process for holding notice (FIG. 56) in FIG. 29), and a duplicate notice setting process is performed in step S3002. Further, an affirmative determination is made in step S3102 of the effect setting process for generating reach (FIG. 57), and a duplicate notice setting process is performed in step S3103. Note that the processing in step S3002 and the processing in step S3103 are the same processing. Therefore, first, the outline of the duplicate notice is briefly described, and then the duplicate notice setting process in steps S3002 and S3103 is explained, and then the duplicate notice correction process (step S3212) in the replacement process (FIG. 58) is explained. To do.

  Duplicate advance notice refers to an effect in which multiple advance notices are made without changing the stop result in one game round. In this overlap notice, the mode of the stop result is determined to be a special mode in which the same two types of symbols are stopped in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. As a special mode, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 61 (a), a cross line reach reach line formed over the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs is formed. As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 61 (b), the first special mode in which the two reach symbols forming the reach line of the same cross line reach in the row Z2 do not result in any jackpot result, In the display areas Rs1 and Rs2, a second special mode is set in which the main symbols constituting the two reservation notices are stopped and displayed one by one.

<Duplicate notice as the first special mode>
In the following, the flow of overlapping notice that is the first special mode will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), for example, in the overlapping notice that is the first special mode, the notice symbol is a main symbol (specific symbol) with “7” attached, and the main symbol with “7” attached. Causes a reach line to be formed on the right and right downward line L7, and a reach line is formed on the right and right upward line L8 by the main symbol having “6” attached thereto. Further, in the middle symbol row Z2, “6” is applied to the middle line L2. It is assumed that the main symbol to which the symbol “” is stopped and the main symbol having “7” to the right ineffective line L 6 is stopped are selected. In this case, the first movable combination 170 and the second movable combination 171 are set as the movable combination to be opened, and as the opening order, the first movable combination 170 is first controlled to be opened, Next, the second movable accessory 171 is set to be controlled to be released. The opening timings of the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 are both set so that the release is controlled after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (b), when the first movable accessory 170 is controlled to open at the timing t1 after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbol (6) is attached ( A hold notice with a non-specific symbol is established, and the first effect is generated at this timing. Further, when the second movable accessory 171 is controlled to be released at the timing of t2 thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), the main symbol (specified) with “7” set as the notice symbol is added. The hold notice by the symbol is established, and the second effect occurs at this timing. In this case, after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 are continuously controlled to open, and accordingly, stage effects (first effect and second effect) Therefore, it becomes possible to realize a step-by-step advance notice without changing the stop result in one game round, and an unexpected performance can be achieved.

  Here, even in the same stop mode as in FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (c), when the notice symbol is the main symbol (non-specific symbol) with “6” attached, The opening timing of the movable accessory is different.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), a reach line is formed on the right lowering line L7 by the main symbol to which "7" is attached, and a right upper line L8 by the main symbol to which "6" is attached. In the middle symbol row Z2, the main symbol with “6” attached to the middle line L2 is stopped, and the main symbol with “7” attached to the right ineffective line L6 is stopped. Is selected. In this case, the first movable combination 170 and the second movable combination 171 are set as the movable combination to be opened, and the opening order is the reverse of the case where the specific symbol is the notice symbol. Thus, it is set so that the second movable combination 171 is first controlled to be opened, and then the first movable combination 170 is controlled to be released. The opening timings of the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 are both set so that the release is controlled after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the second movable accessory 171 is controlled to open and close at the timing t1 after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, the display is stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the right ineffective line L6. Although the main symbol to which “7” is added can be visually recognized, none of the main symbols appear in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the holding notice is not established. As shown in FIG. 63 (c), when the first movable accessory 170 is controlled to open and close at the subsequent timing t2, the main symbol with “6” in the upper stage on the right ineffective line L6 is visible. At the same time, the main symbol with “7” in the middle becomes visible. In this case, the hold notice by “6” and “7” is established at the same time, and the first effect and the second effect are generated simultaneously as the stage effects. Note that the second effect is generated for the main symbol to which “6” as the symbol for notice is added.

Thus, when the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol (in this example, “6”) and corresponds to the normal jackpot result, a plurality of pending notices are simultaneously established in the stage notice. . This is based on the normal jackpot result as a notice symbol with a main symbol (specific symbol) corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result with an odd number attached as the first step and an even number attached in the second step. If the corresponding main symbol (non-specific symbol) is configured to hold hold, the player may be discouraged if the jackpot result that can be expected thereafter is demoted from a probabilistic jackpot result to a normal jackpot result. Because there is. However, if the reservation notice is established with a non-specific symbol as the first step and the reservation notice is established with another non-specific symbol as the second step, it may be necessary to re-variate the stopped symbol. Even if re-variation is not required, it is necessary to change the symbol arrangement and the number of symbols to be stopped, so that the configuration can be complicated. Therefore, in addition to simultaneously establishing a plurality of pending notices based on non-specific symbols and specific symbols in this way, without causing the player to be discouraged by generating the warning symbols on the non-specific symbols in the second effect. It is possible to recognize the notice design.
<Duplicate notice as the second special mode>
In the following, the flow of overlapping notice that is the second special mode will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. As the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), for example, the notice symbol is a main symbol to which “7” is attached, and the stop result is “7” in the lower stage of the right ineffective line. The attached main symbol is stopped and displayed, and the main symbol with “7” added to the middle of the middle line L2 is stopped and displayed. The upper part of the left line L1, the middle of the middle line L2, and the right ineffective line L6 are displayed. It is assumed that a mode in which main symbols (specific symbols) each having “7” attached thereto are stopped and displayed is selected. In this case, the main symbol (non-specific symbol) in which “6” is added to the upper stage of the right line L3, the middle stage of the left ineffective line L9, and the lower stage of the middle line L2 is stopped. As the movable combination to be opened, the second movable combination 171, the third movable combination 172 and the fourth movable combination 173 are set, and as the opening order, first, the third movable combination 172 and It is set so that the fourth movable combination 173 is controlled to be opened, and then the second movable combination 171 is controlled to be opened. In addition, the release timings of the second movable accessory 171, the third movable accessory 172, and the fourth movable accessory 173 are set so that the release control is performed after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (b), the third movable accessory 172 and the fourth movable accessory 173 are controlled to be opened at the timing t1 after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, thereby “6”. A hold notice is established with the main symbol marked with, and at the same time the first effect is generated. Then, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), the second movable accessory 171 is controlled to be released, whereby a holding notice with the main symbol with “7” is established, and at the same time the second Production occurs.

  The stop result that is the second special mode is set to be selected only when the notice symbol is a specific symbol. This is because, as described above, in the stop result that is the first special mode, the symbols constituting a plurality (two) of hold notices can be made visible by controlling the opening of one movable accessory, and those hold notices are established. However, in the stop result that is the second special mode, the symbols constituting the plurality of hold notices can be visually recognized and the hold notices cannot be established unless each different movable accessory is controlled to be opened. caused by. In this case, even if a plurality of movable actors are controlled to be released simultaneously, it is assumed that the player visually recognizes each movable accessory at different timings as long as the movable actors are arranged at different positions. As a result, it is assumed that the symbols that existed behind the movable accessory are also visually recognized at different timings. In this case, for example, if a player first confirms a specific symbol and then confirms a non-specific symbol, it can be disappointing if the promising jackpot result is demoted from a probabilistic jackpot result to a normal jackpot result. Absent. In particular, in the case of a stop result that is the second special mode, since symbols that stop in remote areas such as the left and right sub-display areas Rs1, Rs2 are used, the possibility of checking each symbol at different timings as described above is Get higher. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of discouraging the player by selecting this second special mode only when the symbol for notice is a specific symbol corresponding to the probable jackpot result. It becomes.

  In the overlap notice setting process in the hold notice effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 65, first, in step S3501, a process of setting the duplicate notice as an effect pattern of the current game time is executed, and in step S3502 The stop result determination process for duplicate notice is executed. In the stop result determination process for overlap notice, the stop result in the present overlap notice effect is determined using the stop result table and notice pattern for overlap notice provided in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243. In the stop result table for overlapping notice, the notice symbol and the stop result in the special mode are set in any one-to-one correspondence as an arbitrary combination. In addition, movable accessories 170 to 173 to be controlled to open according to the stop result of the special mode are set, and the opening order and timing are also set. In addition, as described above, when the notice symbol is a specific symbol, either the first special aspect or the second special aspect is set to be selected. When the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, The first special aspect is selected. And, when the symbol for notice is a non-specific symbol and the first special mode is selected, the opening order of the movable actors 170 to 173 depends on the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol at the second opening timing as described above. The hold notice is set to be established at the same time.

  In the subsequent step S3503, processing for storing in the register that the first effect and the second effect are performed as the stage effect of the current hold notice is executed. In step S3504, a process of storing the execution timing of each of these effects (the opening control of the movable accessories 170 to 173 and the effect effect) in the register with reference to the stop result table for overlapping notice is executed. In subsequent step S3505, a process for storing an opening flag is executed, and in step S3506, a process for storing a notice execution flag is executed. As a result, in the changing process, the opening control of the corresponding movable accessory 170 to 173 is performed at the timing stored in step S3504, and at the same time, the stage display is performed in the symbol display device 161.

  Next, the duplication notice correction process (step S3212) performed in the replacement process (FIG. 58) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the duplication notice correction process, it is determined in step S3601 whether or not the currently executed game number is a game number corresponding to the super reach display. If it is determined that the game time corresponds to the super reach display, the duplication notice correction process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the game times do not correspond to the super reach display, a process for grasping the notice symbol is executed in step S3602. In step S3603, it is determined whether or not all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed in the currently executed game round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3603, the release flag is stored in step S3604, and then in step S3605, it is determined whether or not the currently executed game number is a game number corresponding to the normal reach display. If it is determined that the game time corresponds to the normal reach display, the turn effect flag is stored in step S3606.

  If it is determined in step S3605 that the game times do not correspond to the normal reach display, or after executing the processing of step S3606, the fourth stage correction information group as the fourth-stage correction information group is read from the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 in step S3607. With reference to the stage correction table, in the subsequent step S3608, address information for the fourth correction is stored, and in step S3609, the first effect and the second effect are stored in the register so as to execute the stage effect of the hold notice. The process which memorize | stores the movable actors 170-173 used as object in step S3610 is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the fourth stage correction table is a pair for any combination of the information of the initial production pattern and the information of the notice symbol except when the super reach display occurs. The fourth correction effect pattern information and stop result information are set in correspondence with each other, and the address information is set in correspondence with each fourth correction effect pattern and stop result information. Yes. In this case, all the information on the fourth modification effect pattern is set as information on the effect pattern after the period T1 has elapsed from the start of the change. However, the information of each fourth modification effect pattern is set so as not to change the variable display time in the effect pattern that was initially set.

  Further, the information on the stop result for the fourth correction is all defined as the stop result that becomes the first special mode or the second special mode. Further, the information of the fourth correction effect pattern in the fourth stage correction table includes the information of the movable actors 170 to 173 to be controlled to be released in the special result of the stop result and the order in which they are released. The information is set in a one-to-one correspondence. And the generation | occurrence | production timing of the stage effect (a 1st effect and a 2nd effect) in a reservation notice is defined corresponding to the opening order of the movable accessories 170-173.

  After performing the process of step S3610, based on the fourth stage correction table, a process of storing the execution timing of each effect (movable accessory release control, stage effect) in a register is executed in step S3611. . Thereafter, in step S3612, the notice execution flag is stored, and the duplication notice correction process is terminated.

  Describing the relationship between the above-described overlap notice and the turn effect, the turn effect when the overlap notice is performed is set to be performed in the movable accessory that is first controlled to be released. That is, if it demonstrates with reference to the example shown in the said FIG. 62, after all the symbol rows Z1-Z3 are stopped and displayed, the rolling effect of whether the 1st movable accessory 170 carries out opening control will be performed, Thereafter, the first movable combination 170 is controlled to be opened, and the second movable combination 171 is subsequently controlled to be opened. However, the composition of this production is arbitrary as long as the change display time of the game times is not changed.For example, when duplication notice is performed, the production effect is set to be performed with a shorter length than usual, and each The short turn effect may be performed before the movable accessories 170 to 173 are controlled to be opened.

  In addition, as described above, the overlap notice in the case where the turning effect is not performed is a so-called stop display from the stop display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to the final display on the pachinko machine 10 as described above. The standby time is set to 2 sec, which is relatively long. Therefore, for example, in the overlap notice, even if all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, 1 second is required for the first stage effect, and 1 second is required for the second stage effect. It is set to a level that can be confirmed by a person, and can be directed without difficulty.

  Returning to the description of the duplication notice correction process (FIG. 66), if it is determined in step S3603 that all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are not changing at high speed, the process proceeds to step S3613. In step S3613, it is determined whether the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed. If the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed, the process advances to step S3614 to determine whether or not the fifth correction condition is satisfied. Here, as for the fifth correction condition, if any main symbol is stopped or is scheduled to stop in the upper part of the middle line L2, the correction condition is satisfied regardless of the notice symbol. If any of the main symbols is stopped or is not scheduled to stop in the upper part of the middle line L2, the correction condition is satisfied if the notice symbol is a specific symbol. It is set to be judged as being.

  If it is determined in step S3614 that the fifth correction condition is satisfied, processing similar to that in steps S3604 to S3606 is performed in steps S3615 to S3617.

  In step S3618, the fifth-stage correction table as the fifth-stage correction information group is referenced from the ROM 243. In step S3619, the fifth correction address information is stored. A process of storing in the register so as to execute the first effect and the second effect is executed, and in step S3621, a process of storing the target movable combination 170 to 173 is executed.

  As with the fourth stage correction table, the fifth stage correction table, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), is information on the initial performance pattern and information on the notice pattern except when the super reach display occurs. The fifth correction effect pattern information and stop result information are set in a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of and the fifth correction effect pattern and stop result information. Address information is set in correspondence with. In this case, all the information on the effect pattern for the fifth correction is set as information on the effect pattern after the period T2 has elapsed from the start of the change. However, the information of each fifth modification effect pattern is set so as not to change the variable display time in the effect pattern that was initially set.

  Further, the information on the stop result for the fifth correction is all defined as the stop result that becomes the first special mode or the second special mode, similarly to the information on the stop result for the fourth correction. Further, the information on the fifth correction effect pattern includes a pair of information on the movable actors 170 to 173 to be controlled to be released in the special stop result and the order in which the information is displayed. 1 is set correspondingly. And the generation | occurrence | production timing of the stage effect (a 1st effect and a 2nd effect) in a reservation notice is defined corresponding to the opening order of the movable accessories 170-173.

  After executing the process of step S3621, the process of storing the execution timing of each effect (movable accessory release control, stage effect) in the register is executed based on the fifth stage correction table in step S3622. . Then, after storing the notice execution flag in step S3623, the duplication notice correction process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3614 that the fifth correction condition is not satisfied, the correction is not corrected to a duplicate notice, and is also corrected to a hold notice (normal hold notice or special hold notice) that is not a duplicate notice. Then, the duplication notice correction process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the step-by-step advance notice is set as described above, and the second-stage notice is set to have a higher expectation level that results in a big hit after the first-stage notice.

  In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation is set to be higher when the reach display is made without performing the hold advance notice than when the reach display is performed only by developing to the first stage. Therefore, when the fifth correction condition is not satisfied as described above, the degree of attention to the subsequent reach display is suitably increased by adopting a configuration in which the hold notice is not executed even if the hold condition is satisfied. It becomes possible.

  Returning to the description of the duplication notice correction process (FIG. 66), if it is determined in step S3613 that the lower symbol row Z3 is not changing at high speed, the process advances to step S3624. In step S3624, it is determined whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed. If it is determined that the vehicle is changing at high speed, the duplication notice correction process is terminated as it is. That is, if the middle symbol sequence Z2 is changing at high speed, a hold notice is given even if the hold condition is satisfied. There is no.

  If the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed in step S3624, it is determined in step S3625 whether the sixth correction condition is satisfied. The sixth correction condition is satisfied regardless of the notice symbol when each symbol stopped or scheduled to stop in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 corresponds to the first special mode. If there are two types of the same symbols for each symbol that is stopped or will be stopped in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the notice symbol must be a specific symbol. Is set to hold.

  If the sixth correction condition is satisfied in step S3625, the release flag is stored in step S3626. In step S3627, the sixth stage correction table as the sixth stage correction information group is referred from ROM 243. In step S3628, address information for the sixth correction is stored, and in step S3629, the effect effect of the pending notice is stored. A process of storing in the register so as to execute the first effect and the second effect is executed, and in step S3630, a process of storing the target movable combination 170 to 173 is executed.

  As with the fourth and fifth stage correction tables, the sixth stage correction table is information and information for the initial performance pattern except for the case where super reach display occurs, as shown in FIG. 67 (c). The sixth correction effect pattern information and the stop result information are set in a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of symbol information, and each sixth correction effect pattern and stop are set. Address information is set corresponding to the result information. All the information on the effect pattern for the sixth correction is set as information on the effect pattern after the lapse of the period T3 from the start of the change, but the information on the effect pattern for each sixth correction was initially set. It does not change the variable display time in the production pattern.

  Also, the information on the stop result for the sixth correction is the same as the information on the stop result for the fourth and fifth corrections, all of the special modes in which the same two types of symbols stop in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, specifically Specifically, it is determined as a stop result that becomes the first special mode or the second special mode. Further, the information on the sixth correction effect pattern includes a pair of information on the movable actors 170 to 173 that should be controlled to be released in the special stop result and the order in which the information is displayed. 1 is set correspondingly. And the generation | occurrence | production timing of the stage effect (a 1st effect and a 2nd effect) in a reservation notice is defined corresponding to the opening order of the movable accessories 170-173.

  After performing the process of step S3630, the process which memorize | stores the execution timing of each production | presentation (movable accessory release control, stage production | presentation) in a register based on the said 6th stage correction table in step S3631 is performed. . Thereafter, a notice execution flag is stored in step S3632, and the correction process for overlapping notice is ended.

  If it is determined in step S3625 that the sixth correction condition is not satisfied, for the same reason as in step S3614, the duplication notice correction process is executed as it is without executing a notice that is not a duplicate notice. Exit.

  As described above, when the notice condition is established during the execution of the game times, in the processing for change, the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition The stage effects are set according to the number of the hold information and the state of the fluctuation display of the currently executed game times. In a situation where a plurality of (two) pending notices are to be executed in the currently executed game times, the effect and stop result of the currently executed game times are corrected to overlap notices.

  Next, the number of hold information related to the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggers the establishment of the notice condition, the type of stage effect selected by the stage effect selection process, and being executed Each relationship between the execution condition (situation) indicating whether or not the hold notice can be executed in the game times will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, if there are two or more pieces of hold information related to the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition, that is, two or three, stage effect selection Regardless of which stage effect is selected by the process, the stage effect can be executed in the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggers the establishment of the notice condition. For this reason, regardless of whether or not the effect of the currently executed game round can be corrected to the pending notice, the pending notice is not performed in the currently executed game round. Then, according to the selected stage effect, the hold notice with the stage effect is started from the game times one or two times before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition.

  If the number of hold information related to the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggers the establishment of the notice condition is one, the hold notice will be given in the selected stage effect and the game times currently being executed. Depending on whether or not the correction is possible, the effect from the game game being executed differs. That is, if the selected stage effect is the first stage notice, there is no need to execute the hold notice in the game game being executed, and therefore the hold notice with the first effect is executed in the next game time. In addition, when the second stage notice is selected, if the game time being executed can be corrected to a pending notice that is not a duplicate notice (hereinafter also simply referred to as “single notice”), the game time being executed is set to be independent. The first effect is executed as a stage effect with correction to the notice. Then, in the next game round, a holding notice with the second effect is executed.

  On the other hand, if it cannot be corrected to the single notice in the game game being executed, it is not corrected to the hold notice in the game game being executed, and the duplicate notice with the first effect and the second effect is executed in the next game time. . Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience that the execution is restricted in spite of the fact that the second stage notice is selected in the stage effect selection process.

  When the number of the hold information related to the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggers the establishment of the notice condition is 0, it corresponds to the stage effect selected in the game time being executed. The hold notice is executed only when the notice can be corrected. That is, when the selected stage effect is the first stage notice, if the game times being executed can be corrected to the single notice, it is corrected, and if not correctable, it is not corrected. Further, when the selected stage effect is the second stage notice, the game time being executed can be corrected to the duplicate notice if it can be corrected, and if it cannot be corrected, it is not corrected. In other words, even if it can be corrected to the stage effect on the side not selected by the stage effect selection process, it can be said that the configuration is not corrected. By adopting such a configuration, the selection rate set in the stage effect selection process suppresses an event that is changed by uncertain information such as the timing for establishing the notice condition, and the balance of attention set for each effect is lost. This can be suppressed.

  According to the embodiment described above in detail, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When the hold notice is executed in successive game times, a stage effect is generated in each hold notice. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the player expects that, as the reservation notice continues, the result will be a jackpot result. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree of each game time.

  In the above configuration, as a result of the stoppage of the game times, when one main symbol is stopped in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 among the plural types of main symbols, the other main symbols are also stopped in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The special aspect which can do was set. As a result, it is possible to execute a plurality of hold notices in one game time. Therefore, even if there is a small amount of hold information related to the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggers the establishment of the notice conditions when the notice conditions are satisfied, the stop result is the special mode. As a result, a plurality of holding advance notices can be executed in one game time, so that the above-described continuous effects can be established in one game time. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

  In the case of a stop result that is a special mode, any hold notice is configured such that at least a part of the symbols constituting the hold notice is shielded by the movable accessories 170 to 173, and the movable accessories 170 to 173 are controlled to be opened. Thus, a configuration is adopted in which a holding notice is formed that is made up of symbols that are visible when opened. As a result, the degree of attention to the movement of the movable actors 170 to 173 is increased, and as a player, the type of the hold notice that is established by confirming the action (whether the notice is a hold notice with a specific symbol or a hold notice with a non-specific symbol) Therefore, in a configuration in which a plurality of pending notices can be established in one game round, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the kind of established pending notice is difficult to understand and confused.

  Furthermore, as a stop result that becomes a special mode, a stop result that becomes a first special mode in which a plurality of (2) pending notices can be established by operating one movable accessory, and a plurality of movable actors are operated respectively. A stop result that is a second special mode in which a hold notice is established each time is set. As a result, in the latter case, it is possible to make it easy to understand the type of the hold notice established as described above, and in the former case, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the type of the hold notice established. Become. As described above, basically, it is better for the player to understand the type of hold notice that has been established. However, depending on the situation, it may be better to obfuscate like the former. In other words, if a notice of hold with a non-specific symbol and a notice of hold with a specific symbol are established in one game round, even though the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, If a holding notice with a non-specific symbol is established, the player may be discouraged if the expected jackpot result is demoted from a probabilistic jackpot result to a normal jackpot result. Therefore, in such a case, it becomes difficult to understand which hold notice was made by simultaneously establishing a hold notice with a non-specific symbol and a hold notice with a specific symbol, and discourage the player as described above. It is possible to suppress this.

<Fourth embodiment>
One of the features of the present embodiment is that it has a configuration in which the degree of expectation resulting in a jackpot result varies depending on the suspension mode of the hold notice. Specifically, a first hold notice, a second hold notice, and a third hold notice, which have different expectations after that, are set as the hold notice. The first to third reserved notices are performed by stopping the same notice corresponding symbol in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as in the case of the reserved notices in the first to third embodiments. The degree of expectation resulting in a jackpot result is set differently depending on the area. First, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 69, the outline of the relationship between the stop mode of the hold notice and the expectation will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (a), the first hold notice means an effect in which a hold notice is established using only the main symbol that stops in the main display area Rm. As shown in FIG. 69 (b), the second hold notice uses a symbol that stops in the main display region Rm and a symbol that stops in one of the left and right sub display regions Rs1 and Rs2. An effect that holds a hold notice. As shown in FIG. 69 (c), the third hold notice is an effect that the hold notice is established by using the symbols that stop in the main display area Rm and the symbols that stop in both the left and right sub display areas Rs1 and Rs2. Say. If the notice condition is established at the start of the game round, it is determined which hold notice is to be executed based on the hold information that triggers the notice condition. In this case, if the trigger for establishing the notice condition is a jackpot result, the third hold notice is most likely to be selected, and if the trigger is an outlier result, the probability to select the first hold notice is selected. The highest is set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game times that are out of reach by the normal reach display are also handled as a pending notice. That is, in the normal reach display, when the reach symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 stops in an area other than the reach line in the main display area Rm, the stop result of the game times becomes a stop result corresponding to the pending notice. In addition, when the reach symbol stops in the secondary symbol display area Rs in the middle symbol row Z2, the stop result of the game times corresponds to the pending notice on condition that the corresponding movable accessory 170 to 173 is controlled to be released. Stop result. Here, the reach display mode will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

  As already described, in the pachinko machine 10, the normal reach display and the super reach display are set as the reach display, and the expectation that the big reach result is set higher in the super reach display than in the normal reach display. In the normal reach display, as will be described below, the middle symbol sequence Z2 is associated with the variation display time determined by the main controller 81 (the variation display time determined in step S508 in the variation start process of FIG. 19). The outage result is uniquely determined.

  In detail, when the fluctuation is first started, as shown in FIG. 70 (a), the symbols displayed in the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are visually or impossible to be identified. High speed fluctuation display (or first speed display) is executed. Thereafter, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the fluctuation, first, with respect to the upper symbol row Z1, the high speed is set so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the upper symbol row Z1 is easy in appearance. The display is switched from the fluctuation display to the low speed fluctuation display (or the second speed display slower than the first speed display). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the variable display in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, and for the lower symbol row Z3, identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the lower symbol row Z3 is performed. Is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display so as to be easy in appearance. Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the variable display in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. In this case, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on one of the effective lines in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. This timing is called reach occurrence timing.

  At the reach generation timing, in the middle symbol row Z2, the display is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display so that each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the middle symbol row Z2 can be easily identified in appearance. At the same time, the symbol position adjustment process is executed. In the symbol position adjustment process, the symbol position of the middle symbol row Z2 is adjusted so that the symbol “1” in the middle symbol row Z2 passes through the middle line L2 at the timing when the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display. The Specifically, the display control device 212 outputs an internal command to the VDP 255 so that the position of the predetermined symbol is reached after a predetermined period (6 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of fluctuation. . This predetermined period is set to be the same as the period from the fluctuation start timing to the reach generation timing. The symbol position adjustment process is always executed when reach display occurs. More specifically, the process for creating such an internal command is incorporated in a variation pattern for performing reach display. That is, the position of the symbol “1” in the middle symbol row Z2 at the reach occurrence timing is the same regardless of the reach display. In other words, the display mode of the middle symbol row Z2 at the start timing (reach occurrence timing) of the low-speed fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined.

  The period from the start of fluctuation to the reach occurrence timing is a fixed period regardless of the stop result. Further, in the low-speed fluctuation display, until a fluctuation end command is received (until the fluctuation display time elapses), at a constant speed (in this embodiment, a fluctuation display for one symbol is performed in 0.5 seconds). Fluctuation display is performed. Thereby, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is uniquely determined from the variation display time. Specifically, the middle symbol sequence stop result information table is stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243. As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 71, in the middle symbol sequence stop result information table, the stop result of each middle symbol sequence Z2 is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information of each variable display time. For example, when the main display device 81 sets the fluctuation display time to be 16 seconds, it takes 6 seconds for the reach occurrence timing, that is, the fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 to be stopped. Since it takes 9.5 (= 0.5 × 19) seconds for the symbol “1” in the middle symbol row Z2 to reach the middle line L2 again after the variable display of the symbol row Z3 stops, a total of 15.5 Since it takes 2 seconds, the remaining time is 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the symbol “1” is stopped at the position moved to the left by one symbol from the middle line L2, that is, the left line L1.

  From the above, in the case of reach display, the period from the change start timing to the low speed change display start timing is set constant, and the aspect of the middle symbol row Z2 at the start timing of the low speed change display is uniquely determined. Further, since the variable display speed of the low-speed variable display is constant, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined according to the variable display time. Then, stop information is specified based on the game result and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. Thereby, compared with the case where the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is not specified, the possible stop results are limited. Therefore, the amount of information stored in advance as the possible stop results can be reduced. .

  The super reach display is the same as the normal reach display until the change display from the high speed change display to the low speed change display from the start time of the change until the change display of the middle symbol line Z2, which is the final stop design line at the reach occurrence timing, is changed. The variation display mode is different. Specifically, in the super reach display, internal command generation and output processing are executed so that the super reach display is temporarily stopped in a predetermined area during the low speed fluctuation display, and then the high speed fluctuation display is switched to the low speed fluctuation display again.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in the game times in which the super reach display is performed, first, the normal reach display is performed, and the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is temporarily stopped in a predetermined region which is a region different from the reach line, Thereafter, the super reach display is set to be performed. In the present embodiment, an area shifted by one line from the reach line display is set as the predetermined area to be temporarily stopped. That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), when the normal reach display is performed on the right line L3, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the reach symbol (“7” in the figure) is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. The attached main symbol) is temporarily stopped at the middle line L2, and thereafter, the variable symbol display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started again, and the super reach display is performed as shown in FIG. 72 (c). In other words, in the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, a region (development point) that changes from normal reach display to super reach display is determined in advance.

  Here, the middle symbol sequence control process at the time of the reach executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S3701, it is determined whether it is the deceleration timing of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the above-described timing T3 has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3701, the symbol display device 161 is controlled to decelerate the middle symbol row Z2 from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation in step S3702. Specifically, a deceleration command as a deceleration instruction is output from the production control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 determines whether or not the deceleration timing of the middle symbol row Z2 by determining whether or not this deceleration command has been received. It is possible to grasp whether or not.

  If it is determined in step S3701 that it is not the deceleration timing, or after the processing in step S3702 is executed, it is determined in step S3703 whether the current reach display is a super reach display. If it is determined that the display is super reach display, it is determined in step S3704 whether or not it is the development timing from normal reach display to super reach display. Specifically, as described above, the timing at which the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 changes from the reach line to the change destination side by one line is the development timing from the normal reach display to the super reach display. If it is the development timing, the middle symbol sequence Z2 that is changing at low speed is temporarily stopped and displayed in step S3705, and thereafter, a process of developing to the super reach display is executed.

  If it is determined in step S3703 that the normal reach display is selected, if it is determined in step S3704 that it is not the development timing, or after executing the process of step S3705, the process proceeds to step S3706. In step S3706, it is determined whether it is the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2, that is, whether it is the end timing of the variable display. If it is the stop timing, a process of stopping and displaying the middle symbol row Z2 is executed in step S3707. When a negative determination is made in step S3706, or after the process of step S3707 is executed, the middle symbol sequence control process during reach is terminated.

  Next, an effect setting process for holding notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the hold notice effect setting process is a process executed in step S807 of the change start process (FIG. 29), and FIG. 74 is replaced with the hold notice effect setting process shown in FIG. Shows the processing to be executed.

  First, in step S3801, a process for grasping a notice symbol is executed. In step S3802, it is determined based on the hold information stored in the hold area 244h whether or not the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition is a jackpot result. Specifically, with reference to each unit area of the holding area 244h and when holding information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in any unit area, the holding condition corresponding to the jackpot result is determined as the trigger for establishing the notice condition. It is determined to be information. If it is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, referring to the notice type lottery table for jackpot stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 in step S3803, if it is not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, In step S3804, referring to the advance notice type lottery table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, in the subsequent step S3805, based on the advance notice type lottery table, the pending notice to be executed in the current game round is executed. A notice type lottery process for drawing types is executed.

  In the jackpot notice type lottery table, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), the third hold notice is most likely to be selected, and the first hold notice is most likely to be selected. In this embodiment, the probability of selection is arbitrary as long as this relationship is selected. In the present embodiment, the third hold notice is selected with a probability of 60%, the second hold notice is selected with a probability of 30%, and the first hold notice is selected. The advance notice is set to be selected with a probability of 10%. On the other hand, in the notice type lottery table for losing, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the probability that the first reserved notice is selected is the highest, and the probability that the third reserved notice is selected is set to be the lowest. . In this embodiment, the probability of selection is arbitrary as long as this relationship is selected. In the present embodiment, the first hold notice is selected with a probability of 60%, the second hold notice is selected with a probability of 30%, and the third hold notice is selected. The advance notice is set to be selected with a probability of 10%.

  Returning to the description of the selection setting process for holding notice (FIG. 74), after executing the notice type lottery process in step S3805, the process proceeds to step S3806. In step S3806, it is determined based on the processing result in step S3805 whether or not the first hold notice has been selected. If the first hold notice is selected, a stop result determination process for the first hold notice is executed in step S3807. In the stop result determination process, the stop result of the current game round is determined with reference to the stop result table for the first holding notice from the ROM 243. The stop result table for the first hold notice associates the notice symbol with an arbitrary combination that causes the main symbol of the same type as the notice symbol to be stopped and displayed on each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Rm. The stop result to be the first hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol is determined by lottery or the like. In subsequent step S3808, the effect pattern determination process for the first reservation notice is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3806 that it is not the first hold notice, the process proceeds to step S3809, and a stop result determination process for the second and third hold notices is executed. In the stop result determination process, the stop result of the current game round is determined by referring to one stop result table that is drawn in step S3805 from the stop result table for the second and third hold notices from the ROM 243. The second hold notice stop result table stops the notice symbols and the main symbols of the same kind as the notice symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Rm and the left and right sub display areas Rs1 and Rs2. Arbitrary combinations to be displayed are associated with each other, and a stop result serving as a second pending notice corresponding to the notice symbol is determined by lottery or the like. In addition, the stop result table for the third hold notice includes a notice symbol and a main symbol of the same type as the notice symbol in the main display area Rm and the left and right side sub-display areas Rs1 and Rs2, respectively. Is associated with an arbitrary combination to be stopped and displayed, and a stop result as a third pending notice corresponding to the notice symbol is determined by lottery or the like. In the stop result tables for the second and third hold notices, as in the stop result tables for the special hold notices in the first to third embodiments, the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be driven are stored. It is associated.

  Thereafter, in step S3810, an effect pattern determination process for second and third reservation notices is executed. In subsequent step S3811, a process for storing the release flag is executed, and in step S3812, a process for storing the movable accessories 170 to 173 to be driven and controlled is executed. After executing the process of step S3808 or step S3812, after executing the process of storing the notice execution flag in step S3813, the effect setting process for the on-hold notice is ended.

  Next, the reach setting process for generating reach in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the reach generation effect setting process is a process executed in step S805 of the change start process (FIG. 29).

  In the effect setting process for generating reach in this embodiment, if it is determined in step S1001 that the reach of the current game time is normal reach, it is determined in step S3901 whether or not a notice condition establishment flag is stored. To do. If the notice condition establishment flag is stored, a process for grasping the notice symbol is executed in step S3902, and it is determined in step S3903 whether or not the opportunity for establishment of the notice condition is a jackpot result. The corresponding notice type lottery table is acquired in steps S3904 and S3905, and the notice type lottery process is executed in step S3906. These processes are the same as those in steps S3801 to S3805.

  In subsequent step S3907, it is determined whether or not the first hold notice is selected based on the processing result in step S3906. If it is the first hold notice, in step S3908, the first hold notice at the time of reach is determined. A stop result determination process is executed, and an effect pattern determination process for the first hold notice at the time of reach is executed in step S3909. If it is not the first hold notice in step S3907, it is determined whether or not the second hold notice is selected in step S3910. If it is the second hold notice, in step S3911 the reach time is reached. The second hold notice stop result determination process is executed, and in step S3912 the second hold notice effect pattern determination process at the time of reach is executed. If it is not the second hold notice in step S3910, a stop result determination process for the third hold notice at the time of reach is executed in step S3913, and an effect pattern for the third hold notice at the time of reach in step S3914 Execute the decision process.

  Hereinafter, the stop result determination process for various holding notices at the time of reach in step S3908, step S3911, and step S3913 will be described in detail.

  First, in the stop result determination process for the first hold notice at the time of reach, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 77, the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is grasped in step S4001. Specifically, it is grasped which symbols are stopped in the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs in the middle symbol row Z2. In step S4002, a process for determining a reach symbol is executed. In this process, if the notice symbol grasped in step S3902 is a specific symbol, the specific symbol of the kind grasped in step S4001 is determined as a reach symbol, and the notice symbol grasped in step S3902 is not determined. If it is a specific symbol, the type of non-specific symbol grasped in step S4001 is determined as a reach symbol.

  More specifically, for example, in the case where it is grasped in step S3902 that the notice symbol is a specific symbol of the main symbol to which “7” is attached, and in step S4001, the main display area Rm in the middle symbol row Z2. It is assumed that the specific symbol of the main symbol having “3” added to any of the sub-display areas Rs stops. In this case, in step S4002, the main symbol with “3” is determined as the reach symbol. Further, for example, in the case where it is grasped as a non-specific symbol that is a main symbol to which “2” is added in step S3902, and in step S4001, in the middle symbol row Z2, the main display area Rm and the sub-design are displayed. It is assumed that the non-specific symbol of the main symbol having “4” attached to any one of the display areas Rs stops. In this case, in step S4002, the main symbol with “4” is determined as the reach symbol.

  In the middle symbol row Z2, the specific symbols and the non-specific symbols are stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs in all game times. Specifically, when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the line L2 in the main display region Rm, the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the left and right sub-display regions Rs, and the specific symbol is displayed on the left line L1 of the main display region Rm. Is stopped and displayed, the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the right line L3 of the main display area Rm.

  After performing the process of step S4002, reach line determination processing is executed in step S4003. In this process, one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as a reach line, and the symbol corresponding to the reach symbol determined in step S4002 is not stopped at the determined reach line, that is, corresponds to the jackpot result. The reach line is determined so as not to be a symbol combination. In step S4004, it is determined whether the symbol corresponding to the reach symbol determined in step S4002 is to be stopped and displayed in the main display region Rm or the sub display region Rs in the middle symbol row Z2. This process is performed based on the process result of step S4001.

  If it is determined in step S4004 that the symbol corresponding to the reach symbol is to be stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm, the stop result determination process for the first hold notice is ended as it is. In this case, the hold notice executed in the current game round is performed by a combination of only symbols that are stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm, and becomes the first hold notice.

  If it is determined in step S4004 that the symbol corresponding to the reach symbol is to be stopped and displayed in the sub display area Rs, the release flag is stored in step S4005, and the movable movable object 170 to be the target in step S4006. The process of storing 173 is executed. And after performing the process which memorize | stores the release timing of the movable actors 170-173 memorize | stored in step S4006 as the time of the end of reach in step S4007, the stop result determination process for this 1st holding | maintenance notice is complete | finished. . In this case, the hold notice executed in the current game round is the second hold notice because the reach line is formed in the main display area Rm and the reach symbol is stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs in the middle symbol row Z2. . That is, in this case, the second hold notice is executed even if the hold notice drawn in the notice type lottery process (step S3906) is the first hold notice.

  Next, the stop result determination process for second hold notice at the time of reach executed in step S3911 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, this stop result determination process is a process executed when the second hold notice is selected.

  In the second suspension notice stop result determination process, first, in step S4101, a process of grasping the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. Thereafter, reach symbol determination processing is executed in step S4102, and in step S4103, the reach symbol determined in step S4102 is stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm or the sub display area Rs in the middle symbol row Z2. Determine. The processes in steps S4101 to S4103 are the same as the processes in steps S4001, S4002, and S4004.

  If it is determined in step S4103 that the main display area Rm is stopped and displayed, a process of determining a reach line as an ineffective line is executed in step S4104. In this case, the reach line is determined so that the reach symbol is not stopped and displayed on the determined line in the middle symbol row Z2, that is, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not obtained. In step S4105, the release flag is stored. In step S4106, a process of storing the target movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed. In step S4107, the release timing is stored as the reach start time. Then, the stop result determination process for the second hold notice is finished. As a result, in the hold notice executed at the current game round, the reach line is formed in the sub display area Rs, and the reach symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm. That is, the hold notice that is executed in the same game round becomes the second hold notice.

  If it is determined in step S4103 that the sub-display area Rs is stopped and displayed, processing for determining the reach line as an effective line is executed in step S4108. Also in this process, after the reach line is determined so that the reach symbol is not stopped on the determined line in the middle symbol row Z2, that is, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not determined, The stop result determination process for use is terminated. As a result, in the hold notice executed at the current game round, the reach line is formed in the main display area Rm, and the reach symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in the sub display area Rs. That is, the hold notice that is executed in the same game round becomes the second hold notice.

  Next, the stop result determination process for third reach hold notice performed in step S3913 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, this stop result determination process is a process executed when the third hold notice is selected.

  First, in step S4201, the process of grasping the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is executed, the reach symbol determining process is executed in step S4202, and the reach symbol determined in step S4202 is the middle symbol. In the column Z2, it is determined which of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs is to be stopped and displayed. The processes in steps S4201 to S4203 are the same as the processes in steps S4101 to S4103.

  If it is determined in step S4203 that the main display area Rm is stopped and displayed, even if the reach line is set to either the effective line or the non-effective line, the stop result corresponding to the third pending notice cannot be obtained. . Therefore, in this case, in steps S4204 to S4209, a process of changing the current game time so that it becomes a third hold notice with a roaring effect instead of a reach occurrence effect is executed. That is, in step S4204, a process of changing the current game time from the reach occurrence effect to the third hold notice when no reach occurs is executed, and a stop result determination process for the third hold notice is executed in step S4205. In step S4206, an effect pattern determination process for third hold notice is executed. The processing in step S4205 and step S4206 is the same as the third hold notice processing in the processing in steps S3809 and S3810.

  In subsequent step S4207, a process for storing the release flag is executed, in step S4208, a process for storing the turn effect flag is executed, and in step S4209, a process for storing the movable movable objects 170 to 173 to be processed is executed. Then, the stop result determination process for the third hold notice is ended.

  If it is determined in step S4203 that the sub display area Rs is stopped and displayed, in step S4210, processing for determining the reach line as one of the ineffective lines L6 to L11 is executed. In this case, the reach line is determined so that the reach line is formed in the sub display area Rs on the opposite side to the sub display area Rs grasped in step S4203, and the reach is determined on the determined line in the middle symbol row Z2. The reach line is determined so that the symbols are not stopped and displayed, that is, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not obtained. In step S4211, a process for storing the release flag is executed, in step S4212, a process for storing the target movable accessories 170 to 173 is executed, and in step S4213, the release timing is set at the start of reach. Is executed, the stop result determination process for the third hold notice is terminated. In this case, the holding notice executed in the current game round is displayed in a manner that the symbols forming the reach line and the reach symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs on the opposite side. 3 It becomes a reservation notice.

  As described above, in the game times in which the notice condition is satisfied, any one of the first hold notice to the third hold notice is selected and the hold notice is executed. In the present embodiment, when a notice condition is established during execution of a game round, the pending notice is not executed in the game round. In this embodiment, since there are more types of suspension notices than in the first to third embodiments, in order to change the suspension result of the game being executed to a suspension result corresponding to the suspension notice, By performing the process of lottering the type of the game or changing the stop result in accordance with the lottery result, the processing load in the game game being executed can be extremely increased. The restriction of the hold notice described above is a device for suppressing such a local increase in processing load.

  Next, with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 80 and 81, how the reach display is performed in each game time will be described focusing on the relationship with the pending notice.

  When the reach line is formed on the active line and the reach display is started, the player expects that the reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the reach line, that is, a jackpot result is obtained in the current game round. As described above, the reach display is set to the normal reach display and the super reach display, and the expectation that the super reach display is a big hit result is set higher than the normal reach display. In the present embodiment, in the normal reach display, the reach pattern passes through the reach line and is temporarily stopped and then developed to the super reach display. For this reason, as a player, while the normal reach display is being performed, first, it is expected that the reach symbol is stopped on the reach line as described above, and when the reach symbol passes the reach line, We expect that the normal reach display will evolve into a super reach display.

  On the other hand, with regard to the hold notice, the first hold notice to the third hold notice are set in this embodiment, and the third hold notice has the highest expectation level after that, and the first hold notice is thereafter Is set to the lowest expectation level. The third hold notice is formed by using a symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left and right sub display areas Rs1 and Rs2, and the second hold notice is formed by either the left or right sub display area Rs1, Rs1, Rs2. A symbol combination that becomes a holding notice is formed using the symbols that are stopped and displayed on Rs2, and a symbol combination that becomes a holding notice is formed using the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the main display area Rm. The

  In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the reach display is performed on the right line L3, which is an effective line, the player first stops the reach symbol on the right line L3 in the middle symbol row Z2. Expect to be displayed. This is because a jackpot result is obtained if the display is stopped on the right line L3. When the reach symbol passes the reach line, the player then stops once at the middle line L2 where the middle symbol row Z2 is shifted from the right line L3 to the fluctuation destination side by one line as shown in FIG. 80 (b). Expect to be displayed. This is because once the stop display is made, there is a possibility that it will develop into a super reach display after that, and it can be expected that a jackpot result will be obtained thereafter.

  On the other hand, when the vehicle stops once in the middle line L2 but does not develop into the super reach display, the stop result corresponds to the stop result serving as the first hold notice. Therefore, it can be expected that it will be a jackpot result in the subsequent game rounds. In this way, the middle symbol row Z2 is temporarily stopped at the development point from the normal reach display to the super reach display. When the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, the display reaches the stop display (definite display) as it is. And are set. For this reason, in the case where the player has stopped once, in addition to a sense of expectation that the subsequent deployment may result in a jackpot result in the game round, the player may have a jackpot result in the game round performed after the game round. The expectation that it is not possible can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to not only the current game time but also the subsequent game times by the production of the current game time, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game as a whole.

  When the normal reach display does not stop once at the middle line L2, as shown in FIG. 80 (c), the reach symbol is further changed to the fluctuation destination side and the left side which is an area farther from the reach line than the middle line L2. When the stop display is performed on the ineffective line L9, the third movable accessory 172 and the fourth movable accessory 173 move to the non-shielding position, resulting in a stop result corresponding to the second hold notice. As described above, the second hold notice is set to have a higher expectation level that will result in a jackpot result than the first hold notice, and this stop result will result in the player subsequently having a jackpot result. Expected to be expected.

  Here, it is generally considered that the further away the reach symbol is from the reach line, the lower the player's expectation for the jackpot result in the current game round. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the reach symbol is separated from the reach line as described above, the degree of expectation that will be a jackpot result in the subsequent game rounds is set higher as the symbol is stopped and displayed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation due to the separation of the reach symbol from the reach line, and to appropriately increase the degree of attention throughout the reach.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), a case will be described in which a cross-line reach is achieved by a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol by the right-right downward line L7 and the right-right upward line L8. In this case, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the middle symbol row Z2, the main symbol (specific symbol) with the reach symbol “7” that forms the reach line of the right-up line L8 is on the right side. When the stop display is made on the ineffective line L6, the game result of the current game round becomes a result of losing, but this stop result is a stop result that becomes the second hold notice, Can be expected. In the middle symbol row Z2, when the main symbol with “7” is stopped and displayed on the right line L3, the symbol combination corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is obtained, and the current game number is a probability variation jackpot result. As shown in FIG. 81 (c), in the middle symbol row Z2, when the main symbol with “7” is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, this stop result is the stop result that becomes the second hold notice. is there. Further, once stopped at the middle line L2, the normal reach of “7” can be developed into a super reach, so that it can be expected that a big hit result will be obtained in this game.

  In the middle symbol row Z2, when the main symbol with “7” is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, the main symbol with “8”, which is a non-specific symbol, is aligned on the right and right descending line L7. It becomes a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, and the game times this time are usually the jackpot result. As shown in FIG. 81 (d), when the main symbol with “7” is stopped and displayed on the left ineffective line L9 in the middle symbol row Z2, this stop result is the stop that becomes the third pending notice. It is a result. In this case, as shown in FIG. 81 (b) or 81 (c) above, the second hold in which the reach symbol is stopped and displayed by shifting by one line from the reach line of “7” to the change base side or the change destination side. The expectation that will be a jackpot result in the next and subsequent game times is higher than the previous notice. Further, in this case, the main symbol with “8” is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, and once the main symbol with “8” is stopped on the middle line L2, the normal reach of “8” is super Since it can develop to reach, it can be expected that this game round will be a big hit.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the hold notice, the stop result of missed reach is also set to be subject to the hold notice, and the more away the reach symbol is from the reach line to the change destination side or the change base side, the more expectation will be the big hit result in the subsequent game times It was set to be a high-priority hold notice. In this way, it is possible to keep the degree of attention during the reach favorable, and in the production that increases the degree of attention to the next game time, such as a hold notice, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the current game time. It becomes possible.

  As the specific configuration described above, the first hold notice using only the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm, and the symbols that are stopped and displayed in either the left or right sub-display area Rs and the stop display in the main display area Rm. The second hold advance notice using the symbol to be displayed and the third hold advance notice using the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left and right sub display areas Rs are set, and the third hold advance notice, the second hold advance notice, the first It was set so that the degree of expectation that would result in a jackpot was higher in the order of one hold notice. By setting in this way, in the reach where the reach line is formed in the main display area Rm, the degree of expectation is that the reach symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 stops in the sub display area Rs rather than in the main display area Rm. In the reach where the reach line is formed in the secondary display region Rs, the secondary display on the side opposite to the reach line formed in the middle symbol row Z2 rather than the reach line stopping in the main display region Rm. The degree of expectation is higher when stopped in the region Rs. That is, the expectation level is different between the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs in the area where the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 stops. By clarifying the visual difference in the notice mode, it is possible to prevent the executed notice from becoming difficult for the player to understand the difference in expectation.

<Fifth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that a plurality of development points from normal reach display to super reach display are set. Specifically, as the development point from the normal reach display to the super reach display, the first design point where the reach design stops once on the line shifted from the reach line by one line, and the change from the reach line by two lines. There are set a second development point that stops once at a line shifted to the front side and a third development point that stops once at a line shifted from the reach line by three lines to the fluctuation destination side. Further, the selected development point and the reach line of the normal reach display before development are associated with each other so that they can be developed into a super reach display.

  More specifically, when the first development point is selected, a line other than the left ineffective line L9 is selected as a reach line for normal reach display before development. When the second development point is selected, a line other than the left ineffective line L9, the left lower right line L10, and the left right upper line L11 is selected as the reach line of the normal reach before development. ing. When the third development point is selected, the reach line is the right line L3, the right ineffective line L6, the right lower right line L7, or the right upper right line L8 as the reach line of the normal reach before development. Is set to be.

  Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the fourth embodiment with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

  In the variation start process (FIG. 29) by the effect control device 82, in step S903 of the big hit effect setting process (FIG. 30) and in step S1003 of the reach setting effect setting process (FIG. 32), the super-reach time is set. An effect pattern for super reach is determined with reference to the effect pattern table. As shown in FIG. 82 (a), in the effect pattern table at the time of jackpot super reach selected when the game result of the current game round is a jackpot result, the probability that the third development point is selected is the highest. In addition to being set, the probability that the first development point is selected is set to be the lowest. The probability of selection in the order of the third development point> the second development point> the first development point is set to be high. Each selection rate is arbitrary as long as it is the above relationship, but in this embodiment, the probability that the third development point is selected is set to 60%, and the probability that the second development point is selected is set to 30%. The probability that the first development point is selected is set to 10%.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the effect pattern table at the time of super-reach for losing selected when the game result of the current game round is a losing result, there is a probability that the first development point is selected. The highest probability is set and the probability that the third development point is selected is the lowest. The probability of selection in the order of the first development point, the second development point, and the third development point is set to be high. Each selection rate is arbitrary as long as it is the above relationship, but in this embodiment, the probability that the first development point is selected is set to 60%, and the probability that the second development point is selected is set to 30%. The probability that the third development point is selected is set to 10%.

  Since it is set in this way, in normal reach display, the degree of expectation that the game result of the game times becomes a jackpot result differs depending on the area (development point) where the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is temporarily stopped. That is, the degree of expectation is highest when it stops once at the third development point, and the degree of expectation becomes lowest when it stops once at the first development point. And the degree of expectation increases in the order of 3rd development point> 2nd development point> 1st development point.

  In addition, since the development points are set as described above, it is possible to predict which development point is selected by the reach line on which the normal reach display is performed. That is, when the reach line on which the normal reach display is performed is the right line L3, the right ineffective line L6, the right lower right line L7, or the right right upper line L8, any of the first to third development points is selected. There is a possibility. When the reach line on which the normal reach display is performed is the middle line L2, the lower right line L4, and the upper right line L5, there is no possibility that the third development point is selected, and the first development point or the second development point is It will be selected. When the reach lines on which the normal reach display is performed are the left line L1, the left lower right line L10, and the left right upper line L11, there is no possibility that the second and third development points are selected. The development point is selected.

  Thus, since the reach line for normal reach display is determined by the development point for super reach display, the normal reach display for lines L1, L10, and L11, where only the first development point is possible, and the development point are set. In the normal reach display of a non-effective line (left ineffective line L9), there is a concern that the degree of attention is lowered.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), in the effect pattern table at the time of normal reach for jackpots, lines L1, L10, and L11 where only the first development point may be present The probability of being selected is high (60%), and then the probability that the lines L2, L4, L5 in which the first evolution point or the second evolution point may be selected is high (30%), Next, the probability that the lines L3, L6, L7, and L8 in which the first to third development points may be selected is selected is set high (9%). Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (d), in the effect pattern table for the normal reach for detachment, the lines L3, L6, L7, and L8 in which the first to third development points may be selected are selected. Is set to the highest probability (60%), and then the probability that the lines L2, L4, and L5 in which the first development point or the second development point may be selected is selected is high (30 %), And the probability that the lines L1, L10, and L11 where only the first development point is possible is selected is set to be the lowest (10%). The normal reach effect pattern table is a table referred to in step S906 in the jackpot effect setting process of the change start process (FIG. 29) or step S1022 in the reach setting effect setting process.

  By setting the production pattern table for normal reach in this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the attention level of normal reach display due to the development points of super reach display as described above. It has become.

  Incidentally, the left ineffective line L9 in which no development point is set is set only in the jackpot table in the effect pattern table at the time of normal reach, and the selection rate is set to the lowest (1%). In other words, when the reach display is performed on the left ineffective line L9, the jackpot result is determined at that time.

  Further, although detailed description with reference to the drawing is omitted, when a point corresponding to the left sub-display area Rs2 is selected as the above-described development point, the third movable accessory 172 and the second movable object 172 and the first one are developed during the development from the normal reach display to the super reach display. The drive units 172a and 173a are driven and controlled so that the four movable combination 173 moves to the non-shielding position. Therefore, when a point corresponding to the left sub display area Rs2 is selected in the variation start process, a process of storing the corresponding movable combination objects 172 and 173 and the development timing is performed.

  Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 83, how the reach display is performed in each game time will be described focusing on the relationship with the development point to the super reach display.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), when a reach occurs on the right line L3, the player first expects the reach symbol to stop on the right line L3, which is the reach line in the reach. If the reach pattern passes the reach line, there is a possibility that it will develop into a super reach display after that. As the development points, a first development point (middle line L2) shown in FIG. 83 (b), a second development point (left line L1) shown in FIG. 83 (c), and FIG. 83 (d). The third development point (left ineffective line L9) is set, and the higher the degree of expectation that will be a jackpot result in the developed super reach display, the further away the reach symbol is from the reach line to the change destination side. ing. Therefore, as a player, in the hope that the reach pattern will change from the first development point to the second development point and from the second development point to the third development point, the reach design after passing the reach line Focus on whereabouts. This makes it possible to suitably increase the degree of attention during reach.

  Further explaining the relationship with the hold notice, if a reach occurs on the right line L3, the first hold notice will be displayed when the first and second development points are stopped and displayed as they are (stopped). The stop result corresponding to. On the other hand, when the stop display (determined display) is performed as it is after the stop at the third development point, a stop result corresponding to the second hold notice is obtained.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, when normal reach display is performed, the degree of expectation that will result in a jackpot result in the game times as the development point from normal reach display to super reach display is further away from the reach line. Is set high, the reach of the reach can be suitably increased.

  In the configuration as described above, due to the relationship between the reach line and the development point, when the normal reach display is performed, the development point can be limited by the reach line, so the degree of attention to the normal reach display is reduced. Is concerned. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the expectation level resulting in the jackpot result in the normal reach display without changing to the super reach display is made different depending on the type of reach line. By doing so, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect by setting the development point as described above while avoiding the disadvantage that the attention level is lowered due to the relationship with the development point in the normal reach display.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a characteristic rendering is realized by using the colorless and transparent game board 100 and the movable accessory device 162 and the symbol display device 161 arranged behind the colorless and transparent game board 100.

  First, the configuration of the game board 100 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration of the center frame 130 provided in the game board 100 is different. That is, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 132 is disposed at the exit of the front side ball passage 134 of the roof frame 131, and the game ball passing through the front side ball passage 134 is received by the ball receiving portion 132. Become. The stage frame 150 in the present embodiment is formed such that both left and right end portions extend upward, so that the back side ball passage 153 communicates with the ball receiving portion 132.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered the opening 135 of the roof frame 131 are distributed to either the left or right near-side ball passage 134 and are received by the ball receiving portion 132, whereby the back-side ball passage 153. And then to stage 144. In this case, the left and right far side ball passages 153 are arranged so that a part thereof overlaps with the movable accessory device 162 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the game balls passing through the left and right back side ball passages 153 also overlap with the movable accessory device 162 in the front-rear direction during the passage. Further, since the movable accessory device 162 is arranged so as to overlap the display screen G in the front-rear direction as described above, the game balls overlapping with the movable accessory device 162 in the front-rear direction during the passage are simultaneously displayed on the display screen G. It will overlap in the front-rear direction.

  Furthermore, detection sensors 136a and 136b for detecting the passage of game balls are provided in the vicinity of the entrances of the left and right front side ball passages 134 in the roof frame 131. The detection sensors 136a and 136b are connected to the effect control device 82, and the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 enters the near-side ball passage 134 based on the detection information (detection signals) from these detection sensors 136a and 136b. It is possible to grasp that a ball has been generated (a game ball passes through the back side ball passage 153).

  In the present embodiment, using the above configuration, characteristic control for linking the movement of the movable accessory 170 to 173 with the movement of the game ball is performed. Hereinafter, the mid-variation process by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the mid-variation process is a process executed in step S705 of the fluctuation display control process (FIG. 28), and FIG. 85 is a process performed instead of the mid-variation process shown in FIG. It is.

  In the variation intermediate process in the present embodiment, the process for performing the roaring effect is executed in steps S4301 to S4307, similarly to the processes in steps S1201 to S1207. In step S4308, it is determined whether an open flag is stored in the RAM 244. If a positive determination is made in step S4308, the process proceeds to step S4309.

  In step S4309, based on the detection information of the detection sensors 136a and 136b, whether a game ball has entered the near-side ball passage 134 corresponding to the movable accessory 170 to 173 scheduled to be subjected to release control in the current game round. Determine whether or not. Specifically, when either one of the first movable accessory 170 and the second movable accessory 171 is to execute the release control in the current game round, it is arranged in the left front side ball passage 134. If the detection sensor 136a detects the passing of the game ball, an affirmative determination is made in step S4309. In addition, when any one of the third movable accessory 172 and the fourth movable accessory 173 is to execute the opening control in the current game round, the detection sensor disposed in the right front side ball passage 134 If the passage of the game ball is detected by 136b, an affirmative determination is made in step S4309.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4309, the process advances to step S4310 to execute a process of adding 1 to the ball counter provided in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244. This entrance counter is referred to when the MPU 202 grasps the number of game balls that have entered the near-side ball passage 134.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4309, or after the process of step S4210 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4311. In step S4311, it is determined whether or not the value of the entrance counter is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. If it is determined that the number is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S4312 and processing for performing opening / closing control of the corresponding movable accessory 170 to 173 is executed in step S4312 to step S4317. In addition, since each process of step S4312-step S4317 is the same as the process of said step S1209-step S1214, description is used.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4311, that is, if the value of the pitching counter is less than a predetermined number, even if the release flag is stored (even if an affirmative determination is made in step S4308) ), The process for performing the opening / closing control of the corresponding movable accessory 170 to 173 is not executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the release flag is stored, and even if the game times execute the special hold notice, if a predetermined number or more of the game balls are not entered into the corresponding front ball passage 134, the special flag is stored. The hold notice is not executed.

  Here, the ball passing process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The ball passing process is a process started at a predetermined timing, and specifically, a process started after the change display control process (FIG. 28) is executed.

  In the ball passing process, it is first determined in step S4401 whether or not it is a variable display start timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the change start process has been performed in the change display control process executed before the ball passing process started this time. If it is determined that it is the time to start changing display, the process advances to step S4402 to determine whether an open flag is stored.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4402, a process of outputting an opening suggestion command to the display control device 212 is executed in step S4403. The opening suggestion command includes information on the movable actors 170 to 173 scheduled to execute the opening / closing control in the current game round. In the display control device 212 that has received the opening suggestion command, the symbol display device performs a suggestion effect that suggests which of the left and right front side ball passages 134 the movable handpieces 170 to 173 on the side of the passage are to be operated. 161 is displayed. Specifically, for example, if the first movable accessory 170 or the second movable accessory 171 is the target, “Aim the right passage!” Is displayed, and the third movable accessory 172 or the fourth movable accessory is displayed. If the accessory 173 is the target, “Aim the left passage!” Is displayed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4401 or step S4402, or after the processing of step S4403 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4404. In step S4404, it is determined again whether the release flag is stored. If it is determined that the release flag is stored, the process advances to step S4405. In step S4405, based on the detection information from the detection sensors 136a and 136b, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the corresponding near-side ball passage 134. This process is the same as the process in step S4309.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4405, the driving units 170a to 173a of the corresponding movable accessories 170 to 173 are driven and controlled in step S4406, and the operation corresponding to the entry into the front side ball passage 134 is performed. For example, an operation of vibrating the movable accessories 170-173 is performed. When a negative determination is made in step S4404 or step S4405, or after the process of step S4406 is executed, the ball passing process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, when the notice condition is established at the start of the game round, and the special hold notice is scheduled to be executed at the game round, the suggestion effect is executed on the symbol display device 161 as described above. The When the player enters the game ball into the near-side ball passage 134 according to the suggestion effect, the corresponding movable accessory 170 to 173 operates (vibrates) each time the ball enters. Then, when the number of incoming balls exceeds a predetermined number and the opening timing is reached, the corresponding movable accessory 170 to 173 is controlled so as to move to the non-shielding position, and a special reservation notice is executed.

  On the other hand, as described above, although the suggestion effect has been performed, the ball has not been entered into the corresponding near-side ball passage 134 or the number of balls entering the corresponding near-side ball passage 134 has not reached the predetermined number. There will be no special hold notice.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, even if special hold notice is not performed in this way, the game results in the current game round and the subsequent game rounds do not change. However, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to play a game while having a sense of expectation with respect to the subsequent game times by performing a special reservation notice, so as a player who wants to enjoy the production as much as possible. Even if it is understood that the game result is not affected, it is considered that the special hold notice is desired to be performed in this game round. In this case, the player tries to cause the game ball to enter the front-side ball passage 134 by operating the launch handle 55 so that the special hold notice is performed. In this way, it is possible to encourage active participation in the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned suggestion effect is performed only at the start of the game round. However, the notice condition is established during the execution of the game round, and the replacement process (step S4319) When the special hold notice is set to be performed, no suggestion effect is performed. On the other hand, even when the special hold notice is set during the execution of the game in this way, the corresponding movable accessory 170˜ Since 173 operates, the player can know that a special hold notice can be made thereafter. By doing in this way, it is considered that the player who wants to enjoy the production as described above operates the launch handle 55 so as to enter the front side ball passage 134 from the usual. It is possible to give a special feeling that only the player who is performing the launch operation can grasp the special hold notice before the special hold notice is given, and can actively encourage active participation in the game.

  In such a configuration, when a game ball is fired in a launch mode for the player to enjoy the production as described above, the fired game ball passes through the front-side ball passage 134 and the back-side ball passage 153. Thus, the configuration is derived to the stage 144. As already described, the game ball led out to the stage 144 is configured to easily enter the operation port 115 disposed below, and the above-described launch mode is a launch mode that allows easy entry into the operation port 115. It can be said. In other words, the launch mode for the player to enjoy the production is set as a launch mode in which the player can easily obtain a privilege (easily receive the lottery). Thereby, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the production without causing any disadvantage to the player, and it is possible to suitably exhibit the effect of improving the interest.

  According to the embodiment described above in detail, the movable accessory device 162 and the symbol display device are associated with the operation of the game ball using the positional relationship of the game board 100, the movable accessory device 162 and the symbol display device 161. Since the game can be performed by the player's operation, the game machine's production (the operation of the movable accessories 170 to 173 and the display screen G) It is possible to perform a novel effect of associating a hold notice). Thereby, the attention degree to a game can be raised suitably.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the movable accessory device 162 is different from those of the first to sixth embodiments. Hereinafter, an outline of the movable accessory device 300 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. 87 and 88 are schematic views showing the relationship between the display screen G and the movable accessory device 300, and the symbol display device 161 (display screen G) located behind the movable accessory device 300 is schematically shown by a two-dot chain line. It has been described.

  As shown in FIG. 87, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the movable accessory device 300 includes four movable accessories 310, 320, 330, and 340 arranged at the four corners of the display screen G of the symbol display device 161. have. These four movable actors 310, 320, 330, and 340 are openable / closable fans, and are in an open state (shielded state) that overlaps the display screen G in the front-rear direction and a closed state that does not overlap the display screen G in the front-rear direction ( It is possible to switch to a non-shielding state (see FIGS. 87 and 88).

  Specifically, when the upper right movable accessory (first movable accessory) 310 arranged at the upper right of the display screen G is in an open state, the upper right portion of the display screen G (variable display area) is covered and is difficult to view. Or it becomes impossible and it becomes a closed state, The said upper right part is exposed and the visibility of the said upper right part is ensured. That is, the switching target of shielding / non-shielding by the upper right movable combination (first movable combination) 310 arranged at the upper right of the display screen G is the upper right portion of the display screen G (variable display area). Similarly, the shielding / non-shielding switching target by the lower right movable accessory (second movable accessory) 320 disposed at the lower right of the display screen G is disposed at the lower right portion of the display screen G and at the upper left of the display screen G. The object to be switched between shielding / non-shielding by the upper left movable accessory (third movable accessory) 330 is the upper left portion of the display screen G, the lower left movable accessory (fourth movable accessory) arranged at the lower left of the display screen G. The switching target of shielding / non-shielding by 340 is the lower left portion of the display screen G.

  These four movable accessories 310, 320, 330, and 340 have a common basic structure. Therefore, in the following description, the upper right movable accessory 310 is illustrated with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 89, and then the other movable actors 320, 330, and 340 are centered on differences from the upper right movable accessory 310. Explain. FIG. 89 is a front view of the movable accessory 310.

  The movable accessory 310 has a bone portion 311 formed by combining a plurality of long plate members in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine. The bone portion 311 includes a pair of front and rear master bone portions 314 (the front side is the front master bone portion 314a and the rear side is the rear side master bone portion 314b), and a plurality (three in this embodiment) of the middle bone portions sandwiched between the parent bone portions 314. 315. The main bone portion 314 and the middle bone portion 315 have plate surfaces facing front and rear, and are laminated at one end thereof. A main portion 317 is formed at one end portion, and the movable portion 310 is opened and closed by rotating the bone portion 311 around the main portion 317.

  A translucent fan surface portion 312 is attached to an end portion (the other end portion) opposite to the main portion 317 in each bone portion 311. The fan surface portion 312 has a fan shape of about 150 °, and the main bone portions 314a and 314b are fixed to both sides of the fan-shaped diameter from the rear, and the middle bone portion 315 is fixed to the middle portion so as to be equally spaced. Yes. The fan surface portion 312 is provided with a fixing portion 312a to be fixed to each bone portion 311 and a non-fixing portion 312b sandwiched between the fixing portions 312a. The fixing portion 312a and the non-fixing portion 312b A bent portion 312c that is bent when the movable accessory 310 is closed is formed at the boundary portion. The bent portion 312c includes a mountain fold formed along the edge of each bone 311 and a valley fold provided between the bent portions 312c. The portions and the valley fold portions are alternately formed.

  As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 90 (a), by setting the mountain folded portion and the valley folded portion to be maintained in the open state, when the movable accessory 310 is closed, the folded portion 312c is used as a starting point. It will be induced to deform. That is, it is possible to prevent the fan surface portion 312 from being bent at other portions without being bent at the bent portion 312c. In this way, by specifying the deformation location of the fan surface portion 312, it is avoided that the folding function does not work well due to an unintended location in the fan surface portion 312 being deformed by repeated opening and closing. .

  The movable accessory 310 is integrated with the game board 100 by fixing the front main bone portion 314 a to the back surface of the game board 100. As shown in FIG. 87 and the like, a drive motor 313 as a power source is disposed behind the movable accessory 310 (main part 317), and the movable accessory 310 opens and closes by the power from the drive motor 31. .

  In order to open and close the movable accessory 310, it is possible to open and close by fixing one of the main bone portions 314 and rotating the other. However, with such a configuration, it may be difficult to smoothly open and close, or the stress generated at the time of opening and closing may be locally increased and durability may be reduced. In order to eliminate such inconvenience, the present embodiment is characterized by a driving force transmission mechanism for realizing opening and closing of the movable accessory 310. Therefore, the power transmission mechanism will be described below with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 89 and 90 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 89, a through hole 318 that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in the main portion 317, and a gear 319 is disposed in the through hole 318, respectively. As shown in FIG. 90B, the gear 319 includes a drive unit side gear 313b fixed to the rotation shaft 313a of the drive motor 313, a bone unit side gear 313c fixed to each bone unit 311, and the drive. The planetary gear 313d is disposed between the portion side gear 313b and the bone portion side gear 313c. The bone portion side gear 313c is a sun gear, the drive portion side gear 313b is an internal gear, and the planetary gear 313d is a planetary gear. It functions as a planetary gear mechanism as a carrier.

  The gear ratios of the gears 313b to 313d are set so that the rotation speed of the bone portion relatively on the rotation tip side is faster than the rotation speed of the bone portion relatively on the rotation base end side. Is set. That is, the rotational speed is set to be faster as the amount of movement during opening and closing increases. More specifically, the timing when each bone part reaches the open position / closed position is set to be the same timing.

  When the drive motor 313 is driven and the rotation shaft 313a is rotated, the drive unit side gear 313b is rotated, and the power is transmitted to the bone unit side gear 313c via the planetary gear 313d. The drive motor 313 is connected to the effect control device 82 as in the above-described embodiments, and the drive control of the drive motor 313 is performed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82.

  When the drive motor 313 is operated by a drive signal from the effect control device 82 (when the rotation shaft 313a is rotated), each bone portion 311 except for the front main bone portion 314a is rotated. That is, when the rotation shaft 313a is controlled to rotate clockwise in front view, each bone 311 is rotated so that the fan is opened and the fan surface 312 is opened to overlap the display screen G in the front-rear direction. A state is reached (see FIG. 87). Further, from this state, the drive motor 313 is driven and controlled, and the rotation shaft 313a is controlled to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front, whereby each bone portion 311 is rotated so that the fan is closed and the fan surface portion 312 is rotated. Is closed and the display screen G is switched to a closed state that does not overlap in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 88). In this case, the fan surface portion 312 is folded at each bent portion 312c and is stored between the front and rear main bone portions 314a and 314b. When the fan surface portion 312 is closed as described above, the outer shape of the movable accessory 310 in the front view of the gaming machine is smaller than that in the opened state.

  Since the fan surface portion 312 is semi-transparent as described above, when the upper right movable accessory 310 is disposed at the shielding position, as shown in FIG. 87, the display screen G (right sub display region Rs1) behind Light passes through the fan surface portion 312. In this case, in the present embodiment, a device for changing the visibility of the symbols displayed on the display screen G behind the screen is used by utilizing the positional relationship between the fan surface 312 and the display screen G.

  That is, each bone 311 is rotated in a direction substantially parallel to the display screen G and is displaced between the shield position and the non-shield position. On the other hand, the maximum rotation position of each bone portion 311 is set such that the angle formed by the front and rear main bone portions 314a and 314b (about 120 ° in the present embodiment) is smaller than the angle formed by the fan surface portion 312 (about 150 °). When each bone portion 311 moves to the shielding position, each bent portion 312c is arranged at a predetermined angle α as shown in FIG. 90 (a). As a result, a non-parallel surface is generated between the fan surface portion 312 and the display screen G, and light emitted from the display screen G is refracted on the non-parallel surface, and the visibility of the display screen G is reduced. Specifically, the non-parallel surface is a non-fixed portion 312b, and the fixed portion 312a continuous with the non-fixed portion 312b is disposed substantially parallel to the display screen G. Therefore, in the fixing part 312a, light emitted from the display screen G is transmitted without being refracted.

  Thus, by providing a surface that is parallel to a surface that is non-parallel to the display screen G, the visibility of the display screen G is changed, and the player is behind the movable objects 310, 320, 330, and 340. It is possible to give interest to the symbols displayed on the screen.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory 310 opens and closes, a bending operation occurs at the bent portion 312 c of the fan surface portion 312. Therefore, if the fan surface 312 is formed of Japanese paper or the like so as to have only translucency and not transparency, there is a concern that the strength of the bent portion 312c is reduced and the upper right movable accessory 310 becomes weak. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the strength is ensured by forming the fan surface portion 312 with nylon resin or the like. And the display screen G and the fan-surface part 312 are arrange | positioned non-parallel, and it suppresses that the visibility of the back display screen G improves excessively. By doing in this way, while showing the shielding effect of reducing the visibility of the display screen G in the situation where the upper right movable accessory 310 is disposed at the shielding position, there is an inconvenience that the upper right movable accessory 310 becomes weak due to the position displacement. Can be avoided.

  Further, if the entire surface of the fan surface portion 312 is arranged to be non-parallel to the display screen G, not only the non-fixed portion 312b but also the fixed portion 312a needs to be non-parallel. In this case, each bone part 311 fixed to the fixing part 312a also needs to be the display screen G, and the structure may be complicated. On the other hand, since the bone portions 311 are fixed to the fixing portion 312a, the light from the display screen G is not transmitted forward by making each bone portion 311 non-transparent. Thus, the shielding function of the display screen G is secured while suppressing the complexity of the structure by arranging the fixing portion 312a so as to be substantially parallel to the display screen G as in the present embodiment.

  Here, with respect to the upper movable actors 310 and 330, the front main skeleton parts 314 a and 334 a are fixed to the game board 100, and when these fixed front main skeleton parts 314 a and 334 a open and close the movable actors 310 and 330. The proximal end side and the rear master bone portions 314b and 334b are the distal end side. On the other hand, in the lower movable accessory 320, 340, the rear master bones 324b, 344b are fixed to the base body 163 instead of the front master bones 324a, 344a, and these fixed rear master bones 324b, 334b are fixed. , The proximal end side when opening and closing the movable accessory 320, 340, the front skeleton portion 324a, 344a side is the distal end side.

  As shown in FIG. 87 and FIG. 91, the movable accessory device 300 is configured such that a part of the upper and lower movable accessories is mutually connected in the front-rear direction by closing each movable accessory 310, 320, 330, 340. They are arranged so as to overlap. The overlapping of the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320 and 330, 340 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the movable accessory device 300 has a bilaterally symmetric configuration, and therefore, the movable actors 310 and 320 disposed on the right side of the display screen G are illustrated here.

  As already described, in the present embodiment, the upper movable members 310 and 330 are opened and closed by rotating the rear master bones 314b and 334b by fixing the front master bones 314a and 334a to the game board 100. Is done. On the other hand, the lower movable actors 320 and 340 are opened and closed by the rear masterbones 324b and 344b being fixed to the game board 100 and the front masterbones 324a and 344a rotating. By arranging the upper and lower movable combination objects 310, 320, 330, and 340 in this way, the movable combination apparatus 300 is disposed even if both of them are opened and overlapped in the front-rear direction as described above. The increase in thickness is suppressed.

  Specifically, assuming that the respective thicknesses when the movable objects 310, 320, 330, and 340 are arranged at the shielding position are d1, the overall thickness is d1 in the situation where they are arranged at the non-shielding positions. Although it exists, the thickness in each part becomes thinner than d1 (for example, refer to d2). By overlapping the movable combination objects 310, 320, 330, and 340 between the thinned portions, the space before and after the portion where the overlapping occurs can be made smaller than d1 × 2. That is, the distance between the display screen G disposed behind the movable accessory device 300 and the game board 100 disposed in front of the movable accessory device 300 can be shortened, and the distance increases. Decrease in visibility of the display screen G to be performed can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the relationship between the main symbol stopped and displayed in the sub display area Rs of the display screen G and the movable accessory will be exemplified. FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the movable combination 310, 320 and the main symbol stopped and displayed in the sub display area Rs1.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (a), when the upper movable accessory 310 is in an open state, the fan surface portion 312 of the movable accessory 310 stops at the middle symbol row Z2 in the sub display area Rs. Overlapping in the front-rear direction. Further, when the lower movable accessory 320 is arranged at the shielding position, the fan surface portion 322 of the movable accessory 320 overlaps with a part of the main symbol stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 in the sub-display region Rs in the front-rear direction. Are arranged as follows. The main symbols that stop in the middle symbol row Z2 in the sub-display area Rs include a first part P1 that can be seen from the front of the gaming machine without overlapping either the upper or lower movable accessory 310, 320 in the front-rear direction, and the upper movable A second part P2 that overlaps only the accessory 310 in the front-rear direction, a third part P3 that overlaps only the lower movable accessory 320 in the front-rear direction, and a fourth part that overlaps the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320 in the front-rear direction. P4 is set.

  The main symbol that stops in the middle symbol row Z2 in the sub display area Rs is switched from the open state to the closed state in the lower movable accessory 320 under the situation where the upper movable member 310 is in the open state. Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), in addition to the first part P1, among the parts P1 to P4, the third part P3 becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. On the other hand, when the upper movable accessory 310 is switched from the open state to the closed state under the situation where the lower movable accessory 320 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. Among P1 to P4, in addition to the first part P1, the second part P2 can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 92 (c), the fourth part P4 can be visually recognized by switching both the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320 from the open state to the closed state.

  A part (fourth part P4) that is visible on the condition that both the upper and lower movable actors 310 and 320 are switched to the closed state on the assumption that the character image and the numeric image constitute the main symbol. )), As described in the first to sixth embodiments, the holding symbol stops in the middle symbol row Z2 in the sub-display area Rs in the holding notice, and the upper and lower movable roles are arranged. It becomes easy for the player to recognize the significance of the special reservation notice that becomes effective when both the objects 310 and 320 are displaced to the non-shielding position. In other words, in the above-described hold notice, in addition to the operation of the movable accessory 310, 320, 330, 340, the fact that the fourth part P4 can be visually recognized is a hold notice that uses the middle symbol of the sub display area Rs. It becomes a condition and it becomes easy to recognize the success or failure of the hold notice.

  In addition, the main symbol is set to consist of a character image and a numeric image, and the one that seems to be the same as it appears (specifically, the numeric image is excluded). By adopting a configuration in which can be stopped and displayed, it is possible to further diversify the mode of holding notice. For example, when the upper and lower movable actors 310 and 320 are in a closed state and the fourth part is visible, the holding notice condition is established by the main symbol with a numerical image, and the numerical image It may be set so that the hold notice condition is not satisfied due to the main symbol not marked with. Thereby, it can contribute to the further improvement of the attention degree to the production using a movable accessory.

  According to the embodiment described above in detail, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the movable accessory device 300, the upper and lower movable actors 310, 320 and 330, 340 are arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction, and the main symbol that stops in the middle stage of the sub display area Rs is the upper and lower movable actors 310, 320. And 330, 340. As a result, the establishment of the special hold notice using the main symbol that stops in the middle stage is not only the visibility of the main symbol that stops in the middle stage, but also the operation of the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320 and 330, 340. From the viewpoint, it is possible to show the player, and it is easy for the player to recognize the establishment of the special reservation notice.

  In such a configuration, the upper and lower movable members 310, 320 and 330, 340 are fan-shaped movable members, so that the decorative property as the movable members is enhanced and the occupied area when closed (non-shielded state). Reduction of is realized. Then, the upper and lower movable members 310, 320 and 330, 340, which are fan-shaped in this way, are arranged so that the open front ends are reversed. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the front-rear width of the movable region of the movable actors 310, 320 and 330, 340 while achieving the effects described above. Therefore, the distance between the display screen G and the game board 100 can be shortened, and the visibility of the display screen G can be improved.

  Furthermore, in order to improve the shielding effect (the effect of reducing the visibility) of the display screen G by the movable accessory device 300, the fan surface portions 312, 322 and 322 are opened in the situation where each movable accessory 310, 320, 330, 340 is opened. The non-fixed portions 312b, 322b, 332b, and 343b of 332 and 342 are made non-parallel to the display screen G. Thereby, the light emitted from the display screen G is refracted in the non-fixed portions 312b, 322b, 332b, and 342b, and the shielding effect of the display screen G can be enhanced. As a configuration for enhancing such a shielding effect, for example, it is conceivable that each of the fan face portions 312, 322, 332, 342 is formed of a non-transparent member or a member such as translucent Japanese paper. . However, in the former case, there is a concern that the decorativeness as the movable accessory will be lowered, and in the latter case, there is a concern that it is difficult to ensure the strength of the movable accessory. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fan surfaces 312, 322, 332, and 342 are made translucent with resin or the like so that the decorativeness and the strength are improved, and the display is performed as described above. It becomes possible to ensure the shielding effect of the screen G.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the movable combination objects 170 to 173 are operated to display a plurality of symbol combinations (specifically, the same specific symbol combinations) corresponding to a plurality of pending notices during one game round. Although it is configured to make it appear as if a plurality of hold notices have been made during game play, in this embodiment, the display mode of symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notices is further diversified. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 93, the display mode of the hold notice added in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram showing a flow of a hold notice.

  The reservation notice added in the present embodiment is roughly divided into two patterns. Specifically, a first display pattern for displaying a symbol combination corresponding to a plurality of types (two types in the present embodiment) reservation notice at a time and a plurality of steps (two steps in the present embodiment) And a second display pattern for displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice.

  When determining which of the first display pattern and the second display pattern is to be executed, the display pattern determination table stored in the various table areas 243a of the effect control device 82 is referred to. Here, in the display pattern determination table, the second display pattern is more easily selected than the first display pattern when the hold information that triggered the hold notice corresponds to the jackpot, and the hold notice is given. When the hold information that has become does not correspond to the jackpot, the first display pattern is set to be easier to select than the second display pattern. As a result, the second display pattern has a higher degree of expectation when the hold notice is executed than the first display pattern.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where only one symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice is stopped and displayed has been described. However, the number of symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice displayed in one hold notice ( The higher the type), the higher the expectation. More specifically, the degree of expectation is equivalent to the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice is stopped and displayed once over a plurality of game times (more specifically, twice) in the above embodiment. Is set.

  First, the first display pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 93 (a) → FIG. 93 (b), when the symbol variation display starts and ends, the combination of the symbol “7” and the symbol “6” are displayed in the main display area Rm of the display screen G. Combinations are displayed simultaneously. That is, two types of symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice are displayed together. In the said 1st display pattern, a player's expectation can be raised at a stretch compared with the case where only one symbol combination corresponding to a reservation notice is stopped and displayed. After two types of symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice are displayed, the symbol variation display is started as shown in FIG. 93 (c), and the process proceeds to the next game.

  Regarding the second display pattern, as described with reference to FIG. 62 and the like, the hold notice is executed in two stages in one game round. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93 (a) → FIG. 93 (d), when the symbol variation display starts → ends, the combination of “8” symbols is displayed in the main display area Rm of the display screen G. Will be displayed. At this timing, another combination of symbols corresponding to the holding notice can be displayed by the combination of symbols “7” stopped and displayed in the sub display area Rs, but the sub display area Rs is displayed by the movable accessories 170 to 173. Since it is shielded, it is difficult to confirm a stopped symbol. That is, in FIG. 93 (d), only one symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (d) → FIG. 93 (e), the movable accessory 170, 172, 173 operates and the symbols stopped and displayed in the sub display area Rs become visible. As a result, the display screen G is in a state where the combination of the “7” symbols is displayed so that the player can visually recognize the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs. Thereby, two types of symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice are displayed. After two types of symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice are displayed, the symbol variation display is started as shown in FIG. 93 (c), and the process proceeds to the next game.

  In this way, by placing a plurality of types of symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice in the main display area Rm in a state of being collectively displayed, the hold notice having a strong impact can be executed. Even if only one symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice is stopped in the main display area Rm, a pattern increasing to two types is provided thereafter, and this pattern has a higher expectation than the former. By setting, the player expects that the second symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice will be displayed, and the player's expectation can be suitably suppressed from being lowered early.

  In this embodiment, the superiority or inferiority is set for the two display patterns. However, instead of using the two display patterns together to change the expectation, the first display pattern / A configuration in which two display patterns are selected is also possible.

  For example, in the case of making a reservation notice based on the hold information already stored at the start of the game, or in the situation where all the symbols are changing at high speed, the symbol stop mode (stop eye) is changed ( Can be replaced). Therefore, in such a case, the first display pattern is selected. On the other hand, if the advance notice is made based on the newly obtained hold information after the game is started, and it is already difficult to change the stop mode (stop eye) of the symbol, the main display area When it is determined whether or not it is a situation where two symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice can be displayed on the entire display screen G including Rm and the sub display area Rs, and the result of the determination is a positive result The second display pattern is selected.

  As described above, if the first display pattern / second display pattern is selected according to the start timing of the hold notice, it is determined which hold information is likely to win the jackpot from the contents of the hold notice. A game of prediction is added, which can contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game.

<Ninth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment described above, a configuration has been described in which the degree of expectation resulting in a jackpot result varies depending on the suspension mode of the hold notice. Here, in the fourth embodiment, a part of the configuration in which the outline of the effect is simplified will be supplementarily described based on its technical significance.

  As already described, in the hold notice as the “special notification”, the first hold notice, the second hold notice, and the third hold notice having different expectation levels that are the subsequent jackpot results are set. The first to third hold notices are common in that they are executed by stopping the same notice corresponding symbol in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and making the symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice visible to the player. However, the stop area (spreading range) of the symbol combination is different. Then, the degree of expectation that will result in the jackpot result is set differently depending on the stop area. In other words, even when the holding notice is made with the same symbol combination, the degree of expectation is different depending on the degree of scattering of symbols forming the symbol combination.

  As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 94, the first hold notice is an effect in which the hold notice is established only by a combination of main symbols stopped in the main display area Rm. The distribution range of the symbol combination corresponding to the first reservation notice remains in the main display area Rm.

  In the second hold notice, the symbols corresponding to the second hold notice are scattered in a wider area than the symbols corresponding to the first hold notice. Specifically, the symbol combination corresponding to the holding notice is configured by the symbol that stops in the main display region Rm and the symbol that stops in one of the left and right sub-display regions Rs1 and Rs2. That is, the distribution range of the symbol combination corresponding to the second reservation notice does not stay within the main display area Rm but extends over the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs2.

  In the third hold notice, the symbols corresponding to the third hold notice are scattered in a wider area than the symbols corresponding to the second hold notice. Specifically, the symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice is constituted by the symbol that stops in the main display region Rm and the symbol that stops in both the left and right sub-display regions Rs1, Rs2. That is, the distribution range of the symbol combination corresponding to the third reservation notice does not stay within the main display area Rm, but extends over the main display area Rm and the sub display areas Rs1 and Rs2.

  If the hold notice trigger is hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, the probability of selection in the order of third hold notice> second hold notice> first hold notice becomes high, and the corresponding opportunity is put on hold corresponding to the missed result. In the case of information, the probability of selection in the order of first hold notice> second hold notice> third hold notice is set to be higher. As a result, the expectation level that subsequently becomes a jackpot result is higher in the order of third hold notice> second hold notice> first hold notice. That is, for a symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice, a big hit result is obtained depending on how many display areas the stop area is formed, that is, depending on the degree of dispersion of the symbols forming the symbol combination. The degree of expectation is different, and the degree of expectation increases as the degree of pattern dispersion increases.

  In addition, in the first hold notice, the number of symbols that belong to the symbol belonging to the middle symbol row as the final stop target is set to “1” in detail. The number of shift frames of the symbols belonging to is “0”. Thereby, the sum total of the number of shift frames of other symbols based on the symbols belonging to the middle symbol row is “1”.

  In the second suspension notice, the total number of symbols in the upper symbol row is “2” based on the other symbols based on the symbol belonging to the middle symbol row as the final stop target. Specifically, the lower symbol row The number of shift frames of symbols belonging to is “2”. Thereby, the sum total of the number of shift frames of other symbols based on the symbols belonging to the middle symbol row is “3”.

  In the 3rd hold notice, the total number of symbol shift frames belonging to the symbol belonging to the middle symbol row as the final stop target, more specifically, the number of symbol offset frames belonging to the upper symbol row is “2”. The number of shift frames of symbols belonging to is “4”. As a result, the total sum of the number of shift frames of other symbols based on the symbols belonging to the middle symbol row is “6”.

  In this way, for symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice, the number of offset frames of other symbols based on symbols belonging to a specific symbol row increases, that is, the sum of the distances between symbols increases. It can also be said that the expectation resulting in the jackpot result is high.

  In the game times (game times triggered by the hold notice) after the hold notice is made, various predictive effects, main effects, and the like can be executed in a wide area of the display screen G. In this case, if the player's field of view is narrow, there is a high possibility that the same effects will be missed even if these various effects are executed. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the degree of expectation is increased by increasing the degree of dispersion of the symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice, it is possible to suitably widen the player's field of view. It can be suppressed that the production effect is not exhibited well due to the occurrence of oversight.

  In particular, after encouraging the player's field of view to be broadened by a hold notice, the above-mentioned indication effect, main effect, etc., will move to subsequent game times while the effect of expanding the field of view continues. . Therefore, the above-described effects can be exhibited more suitably.

<Tenth Embodiment>
The game board 100 of the game board unit 90 shown in the above embodiments is provided with a portion facing the display screen G of the symbol display device 161. One of the features of the present embodiment is that a device such as a smooth operation of the movable accessory device is applied using the opposing portions. Hereinafter, the movable accessory device 300X and the related configuration (game board 100X) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 (a) is a front view of the game board unit 90X, (b) a partially enlarged view of the game board unit 90X, FIG. 96 (a) is a rear perspective view of the game board 100X, and FIG. 96 (b) is the game board 100X. It is the schematic which shows the relationship with the movable accessory apparatus 300X. In FIG. 95B, for convenience of explanation, a solid line indicates that the movable accessory device 300X is visible through the game board 100X.

  The main configuration of the game board 100X is the same as that of the seventh embodiment. Therefore, explanations are used for these common configurations, and differences from the seventh embodiment will be mainly described.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (a), a decoration 125X is given to a portion facing the display screen G in the front portion of the game board 100X. The decoration 125X improves the appearance of the game board 100X.

  In the decoration 125X, the straight transmission of light is suppressed (translucent) by matte processing (for example, shot blasting). By making the decoration 125X semi-transparent and ensuring the visibility of the display screen G located behind the decoration 125X, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the display screen G becomes extremely difficult to see. That is, it is avoided that the appearance improvement by the decoration 125X becomes a factor that hinders confirmation of symbols and the like related to the player's profit.

  The decoration 125X has a belt shape and is arranged so as to partition the main display area and the sub display area set on the display screen G. In other words, the decoration 125X is provided with a support function that makes it easy to distinguish between the main display area and the sub display area.

  As schematically shown in FIG. 95 (b), as in the other embodiments, a movable accessory device 300X is disposed between the game board 100X and the symbol display device 161 (display screen G). . A guide groove 126X as a “guide portion” that supports the movement of each movable accessory (the upper right movable accessory 310X is illustrated in the figure) that forms the movable accessory device 300X is formed on the back surface portion of the game board 100X. (See FIG. 96 (a)).

  The guide groove 126X is formed to extend along the decoration 125X in a front view of the gaming machine. More specifically, the groove width of the guide groove 126X is suppressed to be smaller than the width of the decoration 125X, and the entire groove overlaps the decoration 125X. Thereby, the protrusion of the guide groove 126X from the decoration 125X is avoided in the front view of the gaming machine, and the guide groove 126X is hidden behind the decoration 125X.

  An engaging pin 350X that engages with the guide groove 126X protrudes from the rotating distal end portion of the main skeleton 314 (corresponding to “movable body”) that constitutes the movable accessory 310X (see FIG. 96B). ). When opening and closing the movable accessory 310X, the engaging pin 350X moves in a state of being engaged with the guide groove 126X, so that the opening and closing operation can be stably performed.

  Further, in the state where the movable accessory 310X is opened, the engagement pin 350X abuts against the end portion of the guide groove 126X, thereby preventing further movement. That is, the guide groove 126X is provided with a function as a stopper for the movable accessory 310X.

  Furthermore, when the movable accessory 310X is opened, the engagement pin 350X is supported by the guide groove 126X. Thereby, the support function of the movable accessory 310X is strengthened.

  In addition, since it is the same also about the relationship between the decoration 125X and the guide groove 126X, and the said movable accessory 320,330,340, description is used.

  As described above in detail, it is possible to stabilize the movement of the movable accessory 310X by providing the function of guiding the movable accessory 310X to the opposing portion of the game board 100X.

  For example, when the movable accessory 310X is enlarged or the operation range of the movable accessory 310X is set wide, an effect using the movable accessory device 300X can be made impactful. It is advantageous in improving the degree of attention to. However, on the other hand, it is assumed that the movement of the movable accessory 310X tends to be unstable. As described above, the unstable movement of the movable accessory 310X may cause malfunction and deterioration in appearance, and may be an obstacle to exerting the above effects. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience, and it is possible to suitably exhibit the effect function by the movable accessory device 300X.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the support position (holding position) of the movable accessory 310X is arranged at a position that does not overlap the display screen G, by moving the movable accessory 310X in front of the display screen G, The position variation of the movable accessory 310X tends to increase at a distant portion. In this regard, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed if the opposing portion exists in the game board 100X and the guide groove 126X is provided in the opposing portion. That is, the technical idea shown in the present embodiment is applied to the movable accessory 310X in which a movable part (master bone part or the like) that is displaced so as to be overlapped with the display screen G depending on the situation is present. This can contribute to the realization of a preferable configuration in which the effect function and the like by the movable accessory device 300X can be stably exhibited.

  In the case where the movable accessory 310X is of a rotation type, a blur width (for example, positional deviation) at the rotation tip portion tends to increase during the operation of the movable accessory 310X. Therefore, if the guide object by the guide groove 126X is the rotation tip portion of the movable accessory 310X, the movement of the movable accessory 310X can be preferably stabilized while suppressing the shake.

  When the display screen G is viewed through the facing portion of the game board 100X, if the guide groove 126X becomes conspicuous, the appearance of the gaming machine may be deteriorated. Therefore, by arranging the guide groove 126X behind the decoration 125X as a “pattern” formed on the game board 100X (opposing portion), the guide groove 126X is made inconspicuous and the above-described deterioration in appearance is suppressed. be able to.

  The decoration 125X is provided in the front portion of the facing portion, and the guide groove 126X is provided in the back portion of the facing portion. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the presence of the guide groove 126X from becoming a factor that makes it difficult to apply the decoration 125X, and to allow the decoration 125X and the guide groove 126X to preferably coexist in the facing portion of the game board 100X. It becomes possible.

  In the above description, the explanation was made based on the movable accessory device 300 shown in the seventh embodiment, but the technical idea shown in the present embodiment is not applicable only to the movable accessory device 300. Instead, it is also possible to apply to the movable accessory device 162 shown in the first embodiment.

  In this case, for example, a guide rail corresponding to each movable accessory 170 to 173 is provided on the back surface portion of the game board 100, and a pattern such as decoration is provided on the front surface portion of the game board 100 at a position overlapping the guide rail from the front of the gaming machine. It is sufficient to adopt a configuration in which

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the movable accessory device 300 provided between the game board 100 and the symbol display device 161 is different from that of the tenth embodiment, and the game board is adapted accordingly. The configuration of decoration etc. given to 100 has been changed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 97, the movable accessory device 300Y and the related configuration in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game board 100Y and the movable accessory device 300Y, and FIG. 97 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line XX of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in this embodiment, a decoration 125Y is formed along each of the effective lines L1 to L5, and a function of teaching the effective line is given to these decorations 125Y. Thus, by teaching the effective line by the decoration 125Y as the “pattern”, it is difficult to distinguish the effective line and the ineffective line in a gaming machine in which the effective line and the ineffective line are used together. Suppressed.

  Each effective line intersects each other, and the decoration 125Y corresponding to these effective lines also intersect to form one picture as a whole. However, it is not always necessary to combine the decorations 125Y. The decoration 125Y may be differentiated for each effective line.

  A guide groove 126Y as a “guide portion” is formed behind the decoration 125Y corresponding to the effective line L4 (lower right line) and the active line L5 (upward line) that are inclined obliquely. In the present embodiment, the movable decorative body 401Y constituting the movable accessory device 300Y is integrated with the game board 100Y through the guide groove 126Y and the like. For this reason, the movable decorative body 401Y moves along the guide groove 126Y (by its own weight) while being held by the game board 100Y, thereby moving across the display screen G diagonally. In addition, since various devices are applied to the configuration related to the movement of the movable decorative body 401Y, details of the movement of the movable decorative body 401Y will be described later.

  The movable accessory device 300Y includes the movable decorative body 401Y as a “movable body” movably provided, and a return mechanism that returns the movable decorative body 401Y to the initial position. Since the movable decorative body 401Y returns to the initial position by moving along a predetermined route, it is possible to repeatedly perform effects by the movable accessory device 300Y.

  The movable decorative body 401Y includes a disc-shaped facing portion 402Y that faces the back of the game board 100Y, and a protrusion engaging portion 403Y that protrudes forward from the facing portion 402Y and engages the guide groove 126Y. It has a base body.

  A seal member 404Y as a decorative member is attached to the back surface portion (rear surface portion) of the facing portion 402Y. A pattern such as a character is provided on the front surface (sticking surface) of the seal member 404Y. The base body is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the pattern imparted to the seal member 404Y through the base body is visible.

  At both ends of the guide groove 126aY corresponding to the right-up effective line L5 and at both ends of the guide groove 126bY corresponding to the right-down effective line L4, there are provided stop portions capable of stopping the movable decorative body 401Y.

  On both the left and right sides of the display screen G, holders 411Y and 412Y that can hold the movable decorative body 401Y that has reached the stopping portion are provided. The holders 411Y and 412Y are configured to be switchable between a hold state in which the convex portion 405Y formed on the movable decorative body 401Y is sandwiched from behind and a release state in which the convex portion 405Y is not sandwiched.

  Here, rails 413Y and 414Y are attached to positions on the left and right sides of the display screen G on the back of the game board 100Y so as to connect a pair of upper and lower stops. The rails 413Y and 414Y hold the holders 411Y and 412Y so as to be movable, and the holders 411Y and 412Y are allowed to move up and down along the rails 413Y and 414Y. The holders 411Y and 412Y can move in the vertical direction, but are not allowed to move in the horizontal direction. In FIG. 97 (b), the holders 411Y and 412Y are pseudo-displayed by two-dot chain lines, but in actuality, the holders 411Y and 412Y move to this position (a position overlapping the variable display area of the display screen G). Not to do.

  The movable decorative body 401Y moves following the holders 411Y and 412Y while being held by the holders 411Y and 412Y. In the present embodiment, a device is provided for avoiding the movable decorative body 401Y falling off the game board 100Y during such movement.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), each of the stationary portions is configured such that the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y are accommodated in the recesses 126cY to 126fY formed on the back surface of the game board 100X. Engaging grooves 421aY to 424aY that engage with the engaging portions 403Y of the movable decorative body 401Y are formed in the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y, respectively. The movable decorative body 401Y that has reached the stop portion stops in a state where the base body (engagement portion 403Y) of the movable decorative body 401Y is engaged with the engagement grooves 421aY to 424aY.

  The rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y are pivotally supported by the game board 100Y so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the thickness direction of the game board 100Y. Motors as drive units for rotating the rotators 421Y to 424Y are attached to the game board 100Y in a one-to-one correspondence with the respective rotators 421Y to 424Y. As these motors operate, the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y rotate clockwise or counterclockwise in the recesses 126cY to 126fY.

  In the game board 100Y, groove portions 126gY and 126hY extending in the vertical direction so as to connect the upper and lower stopping portions are formed. The groove portions 126gY and 126hY are also formed in accordance with the engaging portion 403Y of the movable decorative body 401Y.

  The rotating body 421Y is configured to switch between a state where the engaging groove 421aY communicates with the guide groove 126aY and a state where the engaging groove 421aY communicates with the groove 126hY by the rotation of the rotating body 421Y, and the rotating body 422Y rotates the rotating body 422Y. Thus, the engagement groove 422aY is switched between a state communicating with the guide groove 126aY and a state communicating with the groove portion 126gY. The rotating body 423Y rotates the rotating body 423Y so that the engaging groove 423aY becomes the guide groove 126bY. The rotating body 424Y is configured to be switched between a communicating state and a communicating state with the groove portion 126gY. The rotating body 424Y rotates the rotating body 424Y, and the engaging groove 424aY communicates with the guide groove 126bY and the groove portion 126hY. It becomes the composition which switches to.

  The holders 411 and 412Y are also attached to the rails 413Y and 414Y so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the thickness direction of the game board 100Y. When the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y rotate under the situation where the movable decorative body 401Y stopped at the stopping portion is held by the holders 411Y and 412Y, the holders 411Y and 412Y also rotate following the rotation. That is, even when the movable decorative body 401Y is held by the holders 411Y and 412Y, the presence of the holders 411Y and 412Y prevents the movement of the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y, that is, the change in the posture of the movable decorative body 401Y. is not.

  The game board 100Y is provided with a stopper that prevents further rotation when the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y are in communication with either of the two grooves, and the rotation angle is limited. ing. By defining the rotation position when communicating with each groove by these stoppers, it is avoided that the above-described communication function, that is, the function of securing the moving path of the movable decorative body 401Y does not work well.

  The drive motors for the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y and the drive motors for the holders 411Y and 412Y are connected to the effect control device 82, and operate when a drive signal is output from the effect control device 82. In addition, the movable accessory unit 400Y includes a detection sensor for detecting the movable decorative body 401Y provided at each stop, a detection sensor for detecting the positions of the holders 411Y and 412Y, and a detection of the rotational positions of the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y. And a detection sensor. These various sensors are connected to the production control device 82. The production control device 82, based on the detection information (detection signal) from these detection sensors, the stop position of the movable decorative body 401Y, the vertical position of the holders 411Y, 412Y, It is possible to grasp the rotational positions of the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), the center frame 130Y shown in the present embodiment has a gate shape, and the movable accessory device 300Y is covered from the front of the gaming machine by the center frame 130Y. As described above, the movable accessory device 300Y is hidden behind the center frame 130Y to make it difficult to visually confirm, thereby suppressing a decrease in the appearance of the game board unit 90Y. Note that it is difficult to visually confirm the movable decorative body 401Y that is stopped at the stop. Therefore, it is difficult to understand whether the movable decorative body 401Y moves from the left or right, and the impact when the movable decorative body 401Y moves can be increased.

  Next, an operation mode of the movable accessory device 300Y (movable decoration body 401Y) will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. The stand-by position of the movable decorative body 401Y is roughly divided into a stop portion that is the upper right of the display screen G and a stop portion that is the upper left of the display screen G. Here, for convenience of explanation, the movement from a state in which the movable decorative body 401Y is stopped at the stopping portion at the upper right of the display screen G is illustrated.

  In a situation where the movable decorative body 401Y is waiting at the stop portion on the upper right of the display screen G, when the execution timing of the effect by the movable accessory device 300Y comes, the rotating body 421Y rotates and rotates. The engagement groove 421aY of the body 421Y is switched to a state communicating with the guide groove 126aY. At this point, since the movable decorative body 401Y is not held by the holder 412Y, the movable decorative body 401Y moves from the engaging groove 421aY of the rotating body 421Y to the guide groove 126aY of the game board 100Y by its own weight. The movable decorative body 401Y moved to the guide groove 126aY is moved from the upper right stop portion toward the lower left stop portion by its own weight while being held by the game board 100Y.

  After the movable decorative body 401Y that has been waiting in the stopping portion moves to the game board 100Y side, the rotating body 421Y rotates to switch to a state in which the engaging groove 421aY of the rotating body 421Y communicates with the groove portion 126hY. .

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of a configuration in which the movable decorative body 401Y is stopped (standby) in the upper right stop. As described above, the rotating body 421Y can be switched between a state in which the engagement groove 421aY communicates with the guide groove 126aY and a state in which the engagement groove 421aY communicates with the groove 126hY by rotating itself. Here, in the middle of both rotational positions, the guide groove 126aY and the groove portion 126hY do not communicate with each other, and the end portion of the engagement groove 421aY faces the wall surface of the recess portion 126cY. That is, in this state, the wall surface of the recess 126cY functions as a stopper that prevents the movable decorative body 401Y from being detached from the engagement groove 421aY. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y is maintained in the stopped state without flowing into any of the guide groove 126aY and the groove portion 126hY.

  The movable decorative body 401Y that has flowed into the guide groove 126aY flows down along the guide groove 126aY. However, the guide groove 126aY intersects the guide groove 126bY at a midway position, and the guide groove 126aY is partially cut off. However, the engaging portion 403Y of the movable decorative body 401Y is formed sufficiently longer than the severing distance. For this reason, when the movable decorative body 401Y arrives at the cut portion described above, the engaging portion 403Y and the guide groove 126aY are engaged so as to straddle the cut portion, and the existence of the cut portion is movable. It is avoided that it becomes a factor which obstructs the movement of the decorative body 401Y.

  When the movable decorative body 401Y stands by at the upper right stop, the rotating body 422Y of the lower left stop waits at a position where the engagement groove 422aY of the rotary body 422Y communicates with the guide groove 126aY. Yes. For this reason, the movable decorative body 401Y moved along the guide groove 126aY moves from the game board 100Y to the rotating body 422Y. Thereby, the movable decorative body 401Y is hidden behind the center frame 130Y and deviates from the player's view.

  After the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the rotating body 422Y, the movable decorative body 401Y is sandwiched by the holder 411Y disposed at the lowermost part of the rail 413Y. Thereafter, the rotating body 422Y rotates, and the engaging groove 422aY of the rotating body 422Y switches to a state where it communicates with the groove 126gY.

  Thus, after the posture of the movable decorative body 401Y is changed and the upward movement path is ensured, the holder 411Y rises along the rail 413Y. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y moves toward the upper left stop. Also in this case, since the movable decorative body 401Y moves behind the center frame 130Y, the movement of the movable decorative body 401Y is avoided from being visually recognized by the player.

  After the movable decorative body 401Y that has been waiting in the stop moves from the rotating body 422Y to the game board 100Y side, the rotating body 422Y rotates and the engaging groove 422aY of the rotating body 422Y communicates with the guide groove 126aY. Switch to the state to do.

  Here, with respect to the rotating body 423Y constituting the upper left stop, the engaging groove 423aY of the rotating body 423Y is in communication with the groove 126gY. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y lifted by the holder 411Y reaches the upper left stop.

  As described above, the rotating body 423Y can be switched between a state in which the engagement groove 423aY communicates with the guide groove 126bY and a state in which the engagement groove 423aY communicates with the groove 126gY by rotating itself. Here, in the middle of both rotation positions, the guide groove 126bY and the groove 126gY do not communicate with each other, and the end of the engagement groove 423aY faces the wall surface of the recess 126eY. That is, in this state, the wall surface of the recess 126eY functions as a stopper that prevents the movable decorative body 401Y from being detached from the engagement groove 423aY. After the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the upper left stop, the rotating body 423Y rotates and enters this state, so that the movable decorative body 401Y does not flow into either the guide groove 126bY or the groove 126gY. It will be maintained in the state stopped at the stop. Along with this, the holding of the movable decorative body 401Y by the holder 411Y is released, and the holder 411Y returns to a position that is the lowest part of the rail 413Y.

  In the situation where the movable decorative body 401Y is waiting at the stop portion at the upper left of the display screen G, the rotating body 423Y rotates and rotates when the execution timing of the effect by the movable accessory device 300Y comes. The engagement groove 423aY of the body 423Y is switched to a state communicating with the guide groove 126bY. At this time, since the movable decorative body 401Y is not held by the holder 411Y, the movable decorative body 401Y moves from the engaging groove 423aY of the rotating body 423Y to the guide groove 126bY of the game board 100Y by its own weight. The movable decorative body 401Y moved to the guide groove 126bY moves from the upper left stop to the lower right stop by its own weight while being held by the game board 100Y.

  After the movable decorative body 401Y that has been waiting in the stopping portion moves to the game board 100Y side, the rotating body 423Y rotates, and the engaging groove 423aY of the rotating body 423Y switches to a state where it communicates with the groove portion 126gY. .

  The movable decorative body 401Y that has flowed into the guide groove 126bY flows down along the guide groove 126bY. However, the guide groove 126bY intersects the guide groove 126aY at a midway position thereof, and the guide groove 126bY is partially cut off. However, the engaging portion 403Y of the movable decorative body 401Y is formed sufficiently longer than the severing distance. For this reason, when the movable decorative body 401Y arrives at the cut portion described above, the engaging portion 403Y and the guide groove 126bY are engaged so as to straddle the cut portion, and the existence of the cut portion is movable. It is avoided that it becomes a factor which obstructs the movement of the decorative body 401Y.

  When the movable decorative body 401Y stands by at the upper left stop, the rotating body 424Y of the lower right stop waits at a position where the engagement groove 424aY of the rotary body 424Y communicates with the guide groove 126bY. ing. For this reason, the movable decorative body 401Y moved along the guide groove 126bY moves from the game board 100Y to the rotating body 424Y. Thereby, the movable decorative body 401Y is hidden behind the center frame 130Y and deviates from the player's view.

  After the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the rotating body 424Y, the movable decorative body 401Y is clamped by the holder 412Y disposed at the bottom of the rail 414Y. Thereafter, the rotating body 424Y rotates, and the engaging groove 424aY of the rotating body 424Y switches to a state where it communicates with the groove 126hY.

  Thus, after the posture of the movable decorative body 401Y is changed and the upward movement path is secured, the holder 412Y rises along the rail 414Y. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y moves toward the upper right stop. Also in this case, since the movable decorative body 401Y moves behind the center frame 130Y, the movement of the movable decorative body 401Y is avoided from being visually recognized by the player.

  After the movable decorative body 401Y waiting in the stop moves from the rotating body 424Y to the game board 100Y side, the rotating body 424Y rotates and the engaging groove 424aY of the rotating body 424Y communicates with the guide groove 126bY. Switch to the state to do.

  Here, with respect to the rotating body 421Y constituting the upper right stopping portion, the engaging groove 421aY of the rotating body 421Y is in a state of communicating with the groove 126hY. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y lifted by the holder 411Y reaches the upper left stop.

  After the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the rotating body 421Y, the rotating body 421Y rotates to the intermediate position, and the end of the engaging groove 423aY faces the wall surface of the recess 126eY. In this state, the wall surface of the recess 126eY functions as a stopper that prevents the movable decorative body 401Y from being detached from the engaging groove 423aY, and the movable decorative body 401Y flows into both the guide groove 126bY and the groove 126gY. It will be maintained in the state stopped at the stop part. Along with this, the holding of the movable decorative body 401Y by the holder 412Y is released, and the holder 412Y returns to a position where it becomes the lowermost part of the rail 414Y.

  The relationship between the operation of the movable accessory device 300Y described above in detail and the display effect executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 161 will be described. In the present embodiment, a first type combination-linked effect and a second type combination-linked production are set as effects unique to the present embodiment.

  The first-type accessory-linked effect is a so-called notice effect, and can be selected when suggesting a reach line with a high expectation level that makes a big hit before shifting to reach variation display. Specifically, in the game times in which the reach effect is executed, when the first type combination effect is selected, the movable decorative body 401Y can pass through either the effective line L4 or the effective line L5. The pattern stop mode is determined so that a reach line is formed by the recognized effective line.

  When the game times correspond to the jackpot result, the symbol stop mode is set so that the effective line where the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result stops coincides with the line on which the movable decorative body 401Y moves. It is good also as a structure to determine, and it is good also as a definite effect that a jackpot is decided as a 1st type combination effect.

  The second type combination effect is a so-called chance-up effect, and is selected when a reach line with a high expectation level that becomes a big hit is suggested after the shift to reach variation display. Specifically, when the second type role-linked effect is selected in the game times in which the reach effect is executed, the movable decorative body 401Y can pass through either the effective line L4 or the effective line L5. Know if there is. When it is determined that the recognized effective line matches the effective line where the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed, the movable decorative body 401Y is operated with reference to the matching effect availability determination table. If it is determined that the recognized effective line does not match the effective line where the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed, refer to the non-matching effect determination table. It is determined whether or not the movable decorative body 401Y is operated.

  The matching effect determination table is set so that the number of cases where the movable decorative body 401Y is operated is larger than the case where the movable decorative body 401Y is not operated. On the other hand, the effect determination table for mismatching is set so that the case where the movable decorative body 401Y is operated is smaller than the case where the movable decorative body 401Y is not operated. Thereby, the expectation degree which becomes a big hit when the movable decorative body 401Y operates is adjusted to be higher than that in the case where the movable decorative body 401Y does not operate.

  In this embodiment, the guide groove 126Y is camouflaged by the decoration 125Y that teaches the effective line, and the decoration 125Y and the guide groove 126Y can be preferably coexisted.

  The movable decorative body 401Y crosses the front of the display screen G while being held by the guide grooves 126aY and 126bY of the game board 100Y. At this time, an arm or the like that supports the movable decorative body 401Y does not protrude to a position overlapping the display screen G, and the appearance of the effect using the movable decorative body 401Y can be preferably improved.

  A plurality of paths through which the movable decorative body 401Y traverses the front of the display screen G is set, and the player can predict which path along which the movable decorative body 401Y falls, and the movable accessory device 300Y It is possible to suppress the production from becoming monotonous.

  Further, the moving path of the movable decorative body 401Y has a shape that can be traced with a single stroke (eight-shape), and the movable decorative body 401Y can be used repeatedly. Since the configuration used when moving the movable decorative body 401Y from the lower stop to the upper stop is hidden behind the center frame 130Y, the appearance of the gaming machine is enhanced by the presence of the movable accessory device 300Y. Can be suitably suppressed.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration that is a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  (1) In each of the above embodiments, the symbols to be stopped are always displayed in the sub display area Rs as the “second area”. However, the sub display area Rs is at least a “switching unit”. It is only necessary that a symbol is displayed when various effects such as a hold notice effect are executed in accordance with the operation of the movable accessories 170 to 173 and the like. That is, when these effects are not executed, the symbols displayed in the sub display area Rs may be hidden.

  (2) In each of the above embodiments, the symbols displayed in the sub display area Rs are shielded by the movable actors 170 to 173 as “switching means”. However, the visibility of these symbols is relatively high. It is sufficient to switch between a high state and a low state, and it is not always necessary to provide a shielding function.

  For example, the movable accessories 170 to 173 and the like are made translucent or opaque so that the symbols displayed in the sub display area Rs are not visually recognized but are difficult to visually recognize through the movable accessories 170 to 173. May be.

  (3) It is only necessary to be able to change the visibility of the symbol that stops in the sub display area Rs, and the “switching means” is not necessarily movable.

  For example, in the game board 100, a transmissive liquid crystal or the like is mounted in a portion overlapping the front and rear of the sub display area Rs, and the visibility of the sub display area Rs is changed by changing the display mode of the transmissive liquid crystal (view approval / not visible). It is also possible to adopt a configuration.

  If attention is paid to the fact that the visibility of the symbols stopped in the sub display area Rs is changed by the movable movable accessories 170 to 173, etc., for example, the display screen G displays / hides the configuration corresponding to the movable combination. By using the configuration (configuration in which the movable accessory is displayed in a pseudo manner), the visibility of the symbol in the sub display area Rs may be changed.

  (4) A part of the main symbol that is stopped and displayed rearward when the movable combination objects 170 to 173 as the “switching means” are arranged at the shielding position (the first part P1 in the seventh embodiment) ) Is configured so as to be visible from the front, but may be configured to cover the entire main symbol stopped and displayed at the rear so that it cannot be viewed.

  (5) Although the effective lines L1 to L5 and the ineffective lines L6 to L11 are provided as the lines where the symbols stop, it is necessary to distinguish the lines L1 to L11 where the symbols can stop as the effective lines and the ineffective lines. Not necessarily, the ineffective lines L6 to L11 can be used as effective lines. In this case, for example, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed across both the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs or the sub display area Rs is operated, the movable accessories 170 to 173 are operated. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the fact that the jackpot is won is notified by clearly indicating the combination of symbols. Incidentally, in the case of such a configuration, whether or not to perform the above-described symbol re-variation effect is arbitrary, and furthermore, when performing the re-variation effect, a line that stops the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot Whether or not to change is also arbitrary.

  For example, when it is a probable jackpot result, after displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result in the sub display area Rs so as to straddle both the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the re-variation effect is performed by re-variing the symbols and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result in the main display area Rm. As for the re-variation effect, the main display area Rm extends over both the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs or in the sub display area Rs rather than when the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed. More specifically, the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed in the main display area Rm by adopting a configuration that increases the possibility of occurrence when the symbol combination corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed. <When a symbol combination corresponding to a normal jackpot result is displayed across both the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs <A combination of symbols corresponding to a normal jackpot result is displayed in the sub display area Rs The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result in the main display area Rm There can be expectation even player even if you do not see to suitably suppress the lowered early.

  (6) The symbol display mode (that is, each symbol type, symbol arrangement, variation display mode, reach display mode, hold notice execution mode, etc.) in the symbol display device 161 as the “pattern display means” The present invention is not limited to the embodiment, and various modifications can be made without departing from the gist shown in each embodiment.

  For example, the scroll display direction of the symbol row is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be the vertical direction. Further, the number of symbol rows is not limited to three, but may be four or more rows or two rows. Furthermore, it is not necessary to set a plurality of effective lines, and at least one is sufficient.

  By the way, on the display screen G, it is not always necessary to scroll the symbol row in a predetermined direction, and the variable symbol display is such that the symbol displayed in a predetermined position disappears and the next symbol is displayed, so that the symbol is switched. It is also possible to adopt an aspect. In this case, although the concept of the moving direction of the symbol is eliminated, the gameability of predicting the variable display pattern of the symbol is ensured by giving a certain regularity to the mode of change.

  (7) In each of the above embodiments, when the symbol corresponding to the jackpot result is finally stopped in the situation where the reach display is being performed, the symbol is re-retained later as it stops further downstream from the reach line. Although it is configured to increase the possibility of a big hit result by fluctuating, it should be set so that at least the expected degree of big hit increases as the degree of symbol separation from the reach line described above increases. The separating direction is not limited to the downstream direction. When stopping in the upstream direction and stopping, it may be set so that the expectation level that is a big hit is high. Further, these two configurations may be combined so that when the symbol is stopped, the expectation level that is a big hit is increased according to the degree of separation from the reach line to the upstream side or the downstream side.

  According to the modified example, when reaching the reach display, the player first expects the predetermined symbol to stop at a position far away from the player, and otherwise, the predetermined symbol is displayed on the reach line. If it is expected to stop, if it passes the reach line, it is expected that a predetermined symbol stops far away from the reach line. Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain the player's expectation during the reach display, which can contribute to further improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  (8) If the expectation level for jackpot is different depending on the stop mode of the symbol related to the reach display, it is not always necessary to win the jackpot during the game by re-variation. For example, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a reach display that is greatly deviated is easily selected when a big win is won in a later game round as a pending notice effect (prefetching effect).

  Further, in such a configuration, when the reach display (for example, normal reach) is performed, if the execution condition of the hold notice is satisfied, the stop mode of the middle symbol row is changed (replacement or scrolling of symbols). It is possible to increase the chances that the hold notice is executed. Such a hold notice can be realized by changing only the symbols that will eventually stop without changing all of the symbols' variable display modes, so even if it is configured to interrupt the hold notice during game play, As a result, the control load does not increase extremely.

  In addition, if it is set as the structure which changes the stop eye mentioned above on the condition that it is in the high-speed fluctuation | variation with low visually discriminating power, generation | occurrence | production of the uncomfortable feeling by the interruption of the said reservation advance notice can be suppressed suitably.

  (9) For example, it may be assumed that new hold information is acquired between the start of game times and the final display of game results, and based on such hold information, The execution condition of the hold notice by making the hold notice in advance (the structure in which the timing for determining whether or not to execute the display by displaying a combination of symbols (for example, the hold notice) is the timing after the start of the game) However, when the execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute the notice effect more suitably by adding the following conditions.

  For example, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly acquired and the hold notice is executed based on the hold information, the combination of symbols to be finally stopped determined at the start of the game round is grasped and this grasp is performed. Based on the information thus obtained, it is determined whether or not there is a symbol having a high degree of dispersion corresponding to a symbol having a high expectation among symbol combinations corresponding to the hold notice. Then, if there is something with a high degree of dispersion, the suspension notice is given, and if there is no thing with a high degree of dispersion, it is determined whether or not a thing with a high degree of dispersion can be formed by replacing the stop symbol. If the replacement is possible, the hold notice may be made based on the replacement.

  (10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the lottery for holding advance notice (holding advance notice setting process) is configured to be performed by the effect control device 82, but this may be configured to be executed by the main control device 81. In this case, by adopting a configuration in which a command is output from the main control device 81 when a holding advance notice is won, the number of command outputs can be reduced compared to the above configuration in which a command is output each time holding information is acquired.

  (11) In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of operation ports 115 may be provided. In this case, it is good also as a structure which provides superiority or inferiority in the execution frequency and expectation degree of the hold notice in the plurality of operation ports.

  For example, in the case where two operation ports are provided, the hold information based on winning in the other operation port is more than the hold information based on winning in one operation port. It is good also as a structure which is easy to win a lottery generation of a holding notice. In addition, the hold information based on winning in the other operation port is more likely to win the special hold notice lottery process by the effect control device 82 than the hold information based on winning in one operation port (the special hold notice is executed). (Easy) configuration is also possible. Furthermore, it is more effective when the hold information based on winning in the other operating port is information corresponding to the jackpot result than when the holding information based on winning in the one operating port is information corresponding to the jackpot result. It is good also as a structure which is easy to win the generation | occurrence | production lottery of a holding notice by the control apparatus 82, or a special holding notice lottery.

  In these configurations, if an electric accessory is provided for one of the operating ports, a winning to the operating port provided with the electric accessory is likely to occur during the high frequency support mode. The advance notice (special hold advance notice) is easily executed, and the execution frequency of the hold advance notice (special hold advance notice) can be changed without changing the winning probability of the lottery for generating the hold advance notice (special hold notice). As a result, the production can be inflated and the interest can be improved.

  (12) In each of the above-described embodiments, it may be configured such that an ineffective uniform effect or a re-variable effect and a special reservation notice can be established simultaneously. Specifically, for example, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are set to a stop mode in which cross line reach is performed on the ineffective line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped on one reach line in the stop mode of the cross line reach. In addition to producing an ineffective uniform effect, the symbol that forms the other reach line is stopped in another area of the middle symbol row Z2 to stop the special reservation notice by the symbol that forms the other reach line. . Then, after the end of the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbol combination of the line on which the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is formed can be visually recognized, or the symbol combination that becomes the special reservation notice is formed. It is also possible to make a special reservation notice so that the symbol on the side to be viewed can be visually recognized (in this case, the other is an ineffective uniform effect). According to this configuration, if it becomes a re-variation effect, it will be a jackpot result in that game time, and even if it does not become a re-change effect, there is a possibility that it will be a special hold notice, for either this time or the next game time or later Can also be expected.

  (13) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 81 determines the variable display time, and the effect control device 82 determines the various effects corresponding to the variable display time. The device 81 may be configured to determine the variable display time and various effects, or the effect control device 82 may be configured to determine the variable display time and various effects. In these cases, as in the above embodiments, the variable display time may be determined first, and various effects may be determined corresponding to the variable display time, or the various effects may be determined and then determined. The variable display time may be determined in accordance with the effect.

  (14) In the first to third embodiments described above, based on the fact that the notice condition is satisfied while the variable display is being executed, the pending notice is executed at the game times in which the variable display is being executed. However, it may be changed as follows. That is, in place of or in addition to the above configuration, based on the fact that the notice condition is established in the game times in which the non-specific symbol is used as the notice corresponding design and the holding notice is established, the non-specific symbol is changed from the non-specific symbol to the reserved notice by the specific symbol. It is good also as a structure which determines whether it can change, and when it can be changed, it changes to the pending notice by a specific symbol.

  More specifically, when the notice condition of the hold notice by the specific symbol is satisfied in the game times for executing the hold notice by the non-specific symbol, that is, based on the hold information corresponding to the detach reach by the non-specific symbol, for example. When the hold information corresponding to the probable big hit result is acquired at a timing before the hold condition corresponding to the missed reach is established and the hold information corresponding to the losing reach is subject to the success / failure determination, the hold notice based on the unspecified symbol is specified. It is set as the structure changed as a holding notice by a symbol. In addition, in the case of executing the hold notice with the non-specific symbol, the stop mode corresponding to the duplicate notice in the third embodiment can be selected, and the non-specific symbol among the stop modes corresponding to the duplicate notice is selected. The movable accessory is operated so as to establish only the hold notice. Then, when the stop mode corresponding to the above-mentioned overlap notice is selected in the game round in which the notice of hold by the non-specific symbol is executed, the movable accessory to be changed to the notice of hold by the specific symbol is changed, It is good also as a structure which establishes the hold notice of a specific symbol, without establishing the hold notice of a specific symbol.

  According to the modified example, it is possible to change from a holding notice with a non-specific symbol to a holding notice with a specific symbol without changing the stop symbol, and even after the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is finished. It is possible to easily change the symbol that is the subject of the hold notice.

  In addition, in the stop mode of each symbol on the display screen G, there are a stop mode of a holding notice (usual holding notice) using only a symbol that stops in the main display area Rm, and a pattern that stops in the sub display area Rs. It is included that the suspended notice (including special notice) will be stopped. For example, a mode in which a main symbol with “6” attached to the upper stage of the middle line L2 and the middle stage and the lower stage of the left line L1 is a stop mode of a normal hold notice by a non-specific symbol. In this case, the main symbol having “7” added to the upper stage of the left ineffective line L9, the middle stage and the lower stage of the right line L3 is stopped, and the special reservation notice stoppage is performed by the specific design. If a stop mode is selected as in a game round in which a hold notice with a non-specific symbol is performed, and a notice condition with a specific symbol is established during the execution of the game round, the hold notice for the game round is usually It is good also as a structure changed from a holding notice to a special holding notice.

  (15) For the stage effects shown in the third embodiment, the number of steps can be arbitrarily changed, but the upper limit of the number of steps is preferably within the upper limit +1 of the number of holdings. . Note that the stage effect is not an indispensable configuration, and the stage effect can be removed from the hold notice.

  (16) As in the third embodiment, in a configuration in which a plurality of holding notices are executed without changing the stop result in one game round, a part of the holding notices configured by the movable accessories 170 to 173 The configuration that shields the design is not an essential component. That is, for example, in the main display area Rm, a stop result corresponding to a plurality of hold notices may be displayed as a stop result of one game round so that a plurality of hold notices may be established.

  (17) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the development point may be set on the fluctuation line side of the reach line. In this case, since the number of development points in one reach line is wider than that in the fifth embodiment, it is difficult to limit the presence or absence of development from the reach line to the super reach display.

  (18) In the fifth embodiment, the degree of expectation of the jackpot result increases as the development point from the normal reach display to the super reach display moves away from the reach line. However, if the reach pattern is separated from the reach line, It is good also as a structure which the development rate to super reach display becomes high, so that it leaves | separates.

  (19) In the sixth embodiment, the movable combination 170 to 173 is moved from the shielding position to the non-shielding position based on the detection results of the detection sensors 136a and 136b. It is good also as a structure moved to a position. That is, it is good also as a structure which arrange | positions the movable accessory 170-173 at a non-shielding position instead of a shielding position at the time of normal, and moves from a non-shielding position to a shielding position based on the detection result of the detection sensors 136a and 136b. For example, when the game balls pass through the back side ball passage 143, the movable roles 170 to 173 are moved to the shielding position, so that the game balls passing therethrough and the movable roles 170 to 173 arranged behind the game balls are passed. It is possible to make the operation of the game ball stand out by contrast.

  (20) In the seventh embodiment, the overlapping of the upper and lower movable accessories 310, 320, 330, 340 may be reversed. That is, in the seventh embodiment, the upper movable combination 310, 330 has the rear main bone portions 314b, 334b as the open front end side, and the lower movable combination 320, 340 has the front main rib portions 324a, 344a. Although it was set as the open front end side, the front main skeleton parts 314a and 334a of the upper movable members 310 and 330 are set as the open front end side, and the rear main skeleton parts 324b and 344b of the lower movable combination members 320 and 340 are set as the open front end side. Also good.

  (21) In the tenth and eleventh embodiments, the decoration 125 as the “predetermined pattern” is formed by processing the surface of the game board 100. The provision is optional. For example, a pattern may be formed by attaching a seal or the like. In addition, a light emitting unit provided on the outer peripheral portion of the game board 100 and a light guide unit that guides light from the light emitting unit to a light emitting region formed on the game board 100 are provided. The “pattern” may be displayed.

  Further, the “predetermined pattern” may be configured to overlap with the guide groove 126 as the “guide portion” in the front-rear direction, and the arrangement location is not limited to the front portion of the game board 100. For example, it is possible to arrange the game board 100 on the back surface or embed it in the game board.

  (22) In the tenth and eleventh embodiments, the concave guide groove 126 is provided as the “guide portion”, but the function of guiding the movable decorative body 401 and the like as the “movable body” can be exhibited. If it is, the shape is not limited to concave shape. It is also possible to form a convex shape protruding from the back of the game board 100. For example, a guide rail may be provided on the back surface of the game board 100. Note that the configuration corresponding to the “guide unit” does not need to be formed integrally with the game board 100, and is configured such that a guide member (for example, a rail member) provided separately from the game board 100 is attached to the game board 100. It is also possible to do.

  (23) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol combination corresponding to the reservation notice is configured by, for example, the same symbol combination (for example, “7” symbol × 3), but any symbol combination is associated with the reservation notice. Is optional. For example, a symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice may be constituted by three consecutive symbols (for example, “1” symbol, “2” symbol, “3” symbol).

  Moreover, although the symbol combination corresponding to the reservation notice is configured using three symbol strings, the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient that a symbol combination corresponding to the reservation notice is configured by combining at least a plurality of symbols, and the target can be two symbol strings.

  (24) In each of the embodiments described above, based on the command output from the main control device 81, the effect control device 82 controls the movable accessories 170 to 173, 310, 320, 330, 340 and the display control device 212. However, instead of this, the display control device 212 controls the effect control device 82 and the movable accessories 170 to 173, 310, 320, 330, and 340 based on the command output from the main control device 81. It is good also as composition to do. Further, instead of the configuration in which the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, the control devices 82 and 212 may be provided as a single sub-side control device. Further, the function of the effect control device 82 or the display control device 212 may be integrated into the main control device 81, and the function of both the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 is integrated into the main control device 81. It is good.

  (25) In the above-described embodiment, a so-called chance eye is formed as a “special notification” by a combination of symbols displayed in a stop display or a temporary stop display. However, a specific mode of the “special notification” is arbitrary. is there. For example, it is good also as a structure which performs "special alerting | reporting" by making a specific character appear. In particular, when performing special notifications for a plurality of times during one game, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the character appears several or more times.

  (26) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  (26) The characteristic configurations shown in the first to eleventh embodiments and the configurations shown in the other embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
In addition, the invention described in the following group of features A is “a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a picture display device that displays a picture on a display screen in a variable manner. In this type of gaming machine, For example, when a game ball passes through an operation port provided in a game area, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific game state advantageous to the player such as a hit state is generated, and a variation display of a picture is displayed. When the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (see, for example, JP-A-2005-074175). "In recent years, various ideas have been made to increase the degree of attention to games. However, in the construction of gaming machines, in order to achieve an increase in the degree of attention to games. But there is room for improvement. In which the invention has been made with the problem to be solved that. "

Feature A1. A pattern display means (symbol display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player. The function of executing the process of step S501),
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result, a privilege grant unit (a function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a privilege to the player;
Prior to the application determination being performed by the application determination unit or based on the application determination being performed by the application determination unit, the image display unit starts displaying the variation of the pattern, and the application determination is performed. The stop result corresponding to the determination result is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the game time of each game time is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the picture display means such that the picture is displayed in a variable manner (function for executing fluctuation start processing in the main control device 81, function for executing fluctuation display control processing in the effect control device 82). In the gaming machine equipped,
A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub display area Rs) are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means,
The game times control means includes:
Stop mode determining means for determining the stop mode of the pattern at the game times related to the special information subject to the grant determination for each game round (for variation start in the effect control device 82) Processing function), and
When the variation display of the pattern is performed at each game time, the pattern is stopped in the first area and the second area in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means, and the variation display of the game time is ended. Means,
Switchable between a first state (for example, a non-shielded state) and a second state (for example, a shielded state) in which at least a part of the design that stops in the second region is more difficult to view or not visible than the first state. Switching means (movable accessory device 162, 300),
Special notification means (a function for performing the effect setting process for holding notice in the effect control device 82) that performs special notification (for example, holding notice) based on the stop state of the picture determined by the stop mode determining means,
In the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means,
A first special stop mode (a stop result corresponding to a normal suspension notice) that becomes a predetermined special stop mode by a combination of pictures stopped in the first area;
A second special stop mode (a stop result corresponding to the special hold notice) that is a predetermined special stop mode by a combination of patterns including a pattern to be stopped in the second area,
The special notification means controls the switching means to switch from the second state to the first state based on the determination that the second special stop mode is made by the stop mode determination unit. The game machine is characterized by having notification switching control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1208 to S1214 in the effect control device 82) for performing the special notification.

  According to the feature A1, the first area and the second area are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen, and the special notification includes a combination of a pattern that stops in the first area (first special stop mode). Special notification by a combination of patterns including a pattern to be stopped in the second area (second special stop mode) is set. In this way, by diversifying the stop mode of the special notification, it is possible to suppress the special notification from being monotonous and to contribute to the improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  In particular, it is possible to switch between a first state (for example, a non-shielding state) and a second state (for example, a shielding state) in which at least a part of the pattern that stops in the second region is more difficult to view or not visible than the first state. When the switching means is provided and the special notification in the second special stop mode is performed, the switching means is controlled to be switched from the second state to the first state. As described above, the special notification in the second special stop mode is accompanied by not only the combination of the pictures stopped and displayed on the display screen but also the state change of the switching means. In this manner, when each special notification is performed, the difference in motion of the entire device related to the notification is provided in the notification mode, so that the effect of improving the degree of attention can be easily exhibited.

Feature A2. A pattern display means (symbol display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player. The function of executing the process of step S501),
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result, a privilege grant unit (a function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a privilege to the player;
Prior to the application determination being performed by the application determination unit or based on the application determination being performed by the application determination unit, the image display unit starts displaying the variation of the pattern, and the application determination is performed. The stop result corresponding to the determination result is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the game time of each game time is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the picture display means such that the picture is displayed in a variable manner (function for executing fluctuation start processing in the main control device 81, function for executing fluctuation display control processing in the effect control device 82). In the gaming machine equipped,
A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub display area Rs) are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means,
The game times control means includes:
Stop mode determining means for determining the stop mode of the pattern at the game times related to the special information subject to the grant determination for each game round (for variation start in the effect control device 82) Processing function), and
When the variation display of the pattern is performed at each game time, the pattern is stopped in the first area and the second area in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means, and the variation display of the game time is ended. Means,
Switchable between a first state (for example, a non-shielded state) and a second state (for example, a shielded state) in which at least a part of the design that stops in the second region is more difficult to view or not visible than the first state. Switching means (movable accessory device 162, 300),
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the determination of grant, before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination of grant. A destination specifying means (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the main control device 81) specified at timing;
When the specified result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined specifying result, the destination specifying means in the game times that are performed before the game times related to the special information specified by the destination specifying means. Special notification means (a function of executing the effect setting process for the hold notice in the effect control device 82) for performing a special notice (hold notice) corresponding to the specific result of
In the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means,
A first special stop mode (a stop result corresponding to a normal suspension notice) that becomes a predetermined special stop mode by a combination of pictures stopped in the first area;
A second special stop mode (a stop result corresponding to the special hold notice) that is a predetermined special stop mode by a combination of patterns including a pattern to be stopped in the second area,
The special notification means controls the switching means to switch from the second state to the first state based on the determination that the second special stop mode is made by the stop mode determination unit. The game machine is characterized by having notification switching control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1208 to S1214 in the effect control device 82) for performing the special notification.

  According to the feature A2, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the subject of the grant determination is a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. May be executed in Thereby, for the player, not only the game for confirming the result of determination of the acquisition of the special information acquired, but also when the plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, A game for confirming or predicting the result of the special information afterward according to the content of the special notification is added, and diversification of the game is realized.

  Further, the first area and the second area are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen, and the special notification by the combination of the patterns stopped in the first area (first special stop mode) and the second area are included in the special notification. Special notification by a combination of patterns including the pattern to be stopped (second special stop mode) is set. Thus, by diversifying the stop mode of the special notification, it is possible to suppress the special notification from being monotonous and contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  In particular, it is possible to switch between a first state (for example, a non-shielding state) and a second state (for example, a shielding state) in which at least a part of the pattern that stops in the second region is more difficult to view or not visible than the first state. When the switching means is provided and the special notification in the second special stop mode is performed, the switching means is controlled to be switched from the second state to the first state. As described above, the special notification in the second special stop mode is accompanied by not only the combination of the pictures stopped and displayed on the display screen but also the state change of the switching means. In this manner, when each special notification is performed, the difference in motion of the entire device related to the notification is provided in the notification mode, so that the effect of improving the degree of attention can be easily exhibited.

Feature A3. Transition means (a function for executing the hold notice setting process in the effect control device 82) that shifts to the executable state for the special notification based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is the predetermined specific result is provided. ,
The special notification means includes
When the transition means shifts to the executable state, the first area and the second area during the game turn based on the current game stop state determined by the stop mode determination means. Grasping means for grasping a stopped pattern or a pattern to be stopped in the first area and the second area (function to execute step S2101, step S2403, step S2503, etc. in the effect control device 82);
Based on the grasp result by the grasping means, a judging means for determining whether or not the pattern stop mode in the game round can be changed to the first special stop mode or the second special stop mode during the game round. The function of executing steps S2404, S2504, etc. in the control device 82);
A first special notification that executes the special notification by changing the pattern stop mode in the current game round to the first special stop mode when the determination means determines that the first special stop mode can be changed. Notification means (a function of executing a process of correcting to the normal hold notice in the first to third correction processes in the effect control device 82);
When it is determined by the determination means that the second special stop mode can be changed, the pattern stop mode in the current game round is changed to the second special stop mode, and the notification switching control unit changes the switching unit. By switching from the second state to the first state, the second special notification means for executing the special notification (a process for correcting the special hold notice in the first to third correction processes in the effect control device 82 is executed. The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the gaming machine has a function).

  According to the above configuration, there may be a transition to the executable state for special notification during game play (during the display of changes in the pattern). In this case, the current time is changed by the first special notification means or the second special notification means. Special notifications may be made during the game times. In this way, by expanding the allowable range of the acquisition timing of special information at which special notification can be executed, it is possible to suitably increase the chances of executing special notification.

  In particular, in this gaming machine, a special notification based on a combination of patterns stopped in the first area and a special notification based on a combination of patterns including a pattern stopped in the second area are set. For this reason, even if it is not possible to change the stop mode of the current game round to a special notification by a combination of pictures that stop in the first area when shifting to the standby state during the game round as described above, If a picture to be stopped is included, there is a possibility that it can be changed to a special notification, and it is possible to suitably suppress the opportunity for the special notification to be missed even if the acquisition timing of the special information is varied.

  Feature A4. When the determination means determines that the first special stop mode and the second special stop mode can be changed to either the first special stop mode or the second special stop mode, the special notification unit performs the first notification rather than the special notification by the second special notification unit. The gaming machine according to Feature A3, further comprising means for prioritizing special notification by the special notification means.

  According to the above configuration, when a transition is made to a standby state during game play, the special notification that is the first special stop mode is preferentially executed over the special notification that is the second special stop mode. Here, in the case of the special notification that becomes the second special stop mode, not only the stop mode but also the switching control of the switching means is the condition for the special notification. The movement of the switching means is unnecessary when the special notification that the special notification is established only by the pattern stop mode is performed. Therefore, the change can be performed smoothly, and further, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in processing load due to special notification.

  Feature A5. When the determination means determines that the first special stop mode and the second special stop mode can be changed to the second special stop mode, the special notification unit performs the second notification rather than the special notification by the first special notification unit. The gaming machine according to Feature A3 or Feature A4, characterized in that it has means for prioritizing special notification by the special notification means.

  According to the above configuration, when the state is shifted to the executable state during game play, the special notification that becomes the second special stop mode is executed preferentially over the special notification that becomes the first special stop mode. . In the case of the special notification that becomes the second special stop mode, since the switching control of the switching means is performed, the visual impact becomes stronger than the special notification that becomes the first special stop mode. This makes it possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A6. In the display area of the design on the display screen, a plurality of variable display regions (each design sequence Z1 to Z3) are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of design sequences,
The variation display mode of the pattern in the variation display area includes a high discrimination variation mode and a low discrimination variation mode in which the distinguishability of the pattern is relatively high and low. The change mode can be switched for each change display area,
The first special notification unit and the second special notification unit change the pattern of the variation display area in which variation display is performed in the low identification variation mode among the plurality of variation display areas. The game machine according to any one of features A3 to A5, wherein the stop mode of the pattern is changed to a stop mode corresponding to the special notification.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the special notification is performed by changing the stop pattern during game play, the change of the pattern in the variable display area in which the variable display is performed in the low identification variation mode in which the identification of the pattern is low Since this is done, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player when the pattern is changed.

Feature A7. Transition means (a function for executing the hold notice setting process in the effect control device 82) that shifts to the executable state for the special notification based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is the predetermined specific result is provided. ,
The stop mode determining means is configured to be able to determine the second special stop mode even in a situation where the state has not shifted to the executable state.
When the notification switching control means shifts to the executable state during the game round, and the stop mode of the game round being executed is the second special stop mode, the notification switching control means sets the switching means to the second state. To the first state, and the special switching notification means (function for executing the processing in steps S2101 to S2105 in the effect control device 82) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of Feature A6.

  According to the above configuration, the switching means is switched from the second state to the first state when shifting to the standby state in a situation where the game time variation display is performed so that the stop mode becomes the second special stop mode. Special notifications are made. On the other hand, even if the game mode is displayed so that the stop mode becomes the second special stop mode, if it is not set to the executable state, the switching control of the switching means is not performed and the second area is not set. The picture to be stopped is maintained in a state in which it is difficult to view or invisible, and no special notification is performed. That is, it is possible to change whether or not to perform the special notification depending on the subsequent situation without changing the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means at the start of the game times. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the opportunity to perform special notification without changing the stop mode during execution of the game time variation display.

Feature A8. The special notification means includes
On the basis of the stop mode of the current game round determined by the stop mode determining means, the picture or the first zone and the second zone that are stopped in the first zone and the second zone during the game round. A grasping means for grasping the pattern to be stopped in the area;
Determination means for determining whether or not a specific picture combination corresponding to a special notification can be formed by a combination of pictures including a picture to be stopped in the second area based on a grasping result of the grasping means after the game time is started. And
The notification switching control unit controls the switching unit to switch from the second state to the first state when the determination unit determines that the specific pattern combination can be formed. The gaming machine according to Feature A2, further comprising means for making it possible to visually recognize a pattern forming the specific pattern combination in the area.

  In recent years, a special notification (so-called pre-reading effect) corresponding to predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to the grant determination is more effective than the special information being subject to the grant determination. A gaming machine that is executed at the previous timing has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, the following games are added to the player, in addition to a game for confirming the result of determination of addition of the acquired special information. That is, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order of the determination of grant is the target of the grant determination for the special information that is later is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting is added. Thereby, the monotonization of the game is suppressed and the interest of the game is improved.

  However, when such special notification is performed, it is common to determine whether or not to perform the special notification based on the hold information stored at the start of the game round. There was a problem that the restrictions were so strong that the effect of improving the special announcement could not be demonstrated well. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when special information is acquired after the game is started, there is a possibility that a special notification corresponding to the special information can be executed. That is, the execution conditions are relaxed compared to the conventional prefetch effect, and the above-described effects can be more suitably exhibited.

  Feature A9. The notification switching control means performs the switching control so that the switching means switches from the second state to the first state after the display of the variation of the pattern is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  As already described, when the switching unit is in the second state, the pattern stopped or stopped in the second region is difficult to view or cannot be viewed. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to grasp that it is in the second special stop mode. Therefore, after the display of the variation of the pattern is completed, that is, when the pattern is stopped, the switching unit is set to the first state, so that a special notification that is surprising to the player is performed. In addition, according to the above configuration, there is an expectation that a special notification may be performed even after the display of the variation of the pattern is finished, and the attention to the game is quickly reduced after the stop display of the pattern. It can suppress suitably.

Feature A10. The pattern display means is configured to scroll and display the pattern row in the arrangement direction,
Any of the features A1 to A9, wherein the second region is set to include a region upstream of the first region on the display screen in the scroll direction of the pattern row. The gaming machine according to one.

  According to the said structure, the pattern which stops in a 2nd area | region has passed the 1st area | region before the stop. As a player, it is possible to grasp to some extent whether or not it is in the second special stop mode before switching the switching means, and the degree of attention to the stop pattern can be increased.

Feature A11. The pattern display means is configured to scroll and display the pattern row in the arrangement direction,
Any of the features A1 to A10, wherein the second region is set to include a region on the downstream side of the first region in the display screen in the scroll direction of the pattern row. The gaming machine according to one.

  Since the second area is located on the downstream side of the first area, it is difficult to grasp the picture that stops in the second area during the change (immediately before the stop). Thereby, it can suppress that it is perceived by the player before switching of a switching means that it is the 2nd special stop mode, and special notification can be made unexpected.

Feature A12. The pattern display means is configured to scroll and display the pattern row in the arrangement direction,
The first area and the second area on the display screen are arranged in a scroll direction of the pattern row,
When the predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed in the first area in a state where the pattern row is stopped and displayed, the pattern display means follows the pattern preceding or following the predetermined pattern in the second area. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein the picture is configured to be stopped and displayed.

  According to the above configuration, since the pattern row is scroll-displayed, the player stops the pattern stopped in the second area, which is difficult or impossible to see by the switching means, in the first area. Can be inferred based on the pattern that is present. That is, by gazing at the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the first region, it is possible to grasp to some extent whether or not the second special stop mode is set before switching the switching means. Thereby, the attention degree to a stop picture can be raised.

Feature A13. The switching means is
Movable bodies (movable accessories 170 to 173, 310, 320, which are overlapped with the second region by entering the second state and retreat to positions that do not overlap the second region by entering the first state. 330, 340),
A drive unit (drive units 170a to 173a, 313, 323, 333, 343) for operating the movable body,
The notification switching control means performs switching between the first state and the second state by driving the drive unit to operate the movable body. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  When the special notification according to the second special stop mode is executed, the movable body operates to change the visibility of the pattern. By making the special notification an effect accompanied by the movement of the movable body, it is easy to draw the player's attention, and it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the special notification.

Feature A14. A pattern display means (symbol display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player. The function of executing the process of step S501),
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result, a privilege grant unit (a function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a privilege to the player;
Prior to the application determination being performed by the application determination unit or based on the application determination being performed by the application determination unit, the image display unit starts displaying the variation of the pattern, and the application determination is performed. The stop result corresponding to the determination result is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the game time of each game time is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the picture display means such that the picture is displayed in a variable manner (function for executing fluctuation start processing in the main control device 81, function for executing fluctuation display control processing in the effect control device 82). In the gaming machine equipped,
A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub display area Rs) are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means,
The game times control means includes:
Stop mode determining means for determining the stop mode of the pattern at the game times related to the special information subject to the grant determination for each game round (for variation start in the effect control device 82) Processing function), and
When the variation display of the pattern is performed at each game time, the pattern is stopped in at least the first region of the first region and the second region in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means, and the game times Means for terminating the fluctuation display of
Switching means (movable accessory device 162) that can be switched between a first state (for example, a non-shielding state) and a second state (for example, a shielding state) in which the second region is more difficult to view or cannot be viewed than the first state. 300),
Special notification means (a function for performing the effect setting process for holding notice in the effect control device 82) that performs special notification (for example, holding notice) based on the stop state of the picture determined by the stop mode determining means,
In the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means,
A first special stop mode (a stop result corresponding to a normal hold notice) that becomes a special stop mode by a combination of pictures that are stopped and displayed in the first area;
A second special stop mode (a stop result corresponding to a special hold notice) that is a predetermined special stop mode by a combination of a pattern including a pattern to be stopped and displayed in the second area,
The special notification means controls the switching means to switch from the second state to the first state based on the determination that the second special stop mode is made by the stop mode determination unit. The game machine is characterized by having notification switching control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1208 to S1214 in the effect control device 82) for performing the special notification.

  According to the feature A13, the first area and the second area are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen, and the special notification includes a special notification by a combination of patterns stopped in the first area (first special stop mode). Special notification by a combination of patterns including a pattern to be stopped in the second area (second special stop mode) is set. In this way, by diversifying the stop mode of the special notification, it is possible to suppress the special notification from being monotonous and to contribute to the improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  In particular, it is possible to switch between a first state (for example, a non-shielding state) and a second state (for example, a shielding state) in which at least a part of the pattern that stops in the second region is more difficult to view or not visible than the first state. When the switching means is provided and the special notification in the second special stop mode is performed, the switching means is controlled to be switched from the second state to the first state. As described above, the special notification in the second special stop mode is accompanied by not only the combination of the pictures stopped and displayed on the display screen but also the state change of the switching means. As described above, when the special notification is performed, the difference in motion of the entire apparatus according to the notification is provided in the notification mode, so that the effect of improving the degree of attention is easily exhibited.

  In the configuration shown in this feature, when performing special notification related to the second area, the design may be displayed at all times in the second area, or the pattern is not displayed before the special notification is performed. → It may be configured to display.

Feature A15. A pattern display means (symbol display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player. The function of executing the process of step S501),
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result, a privilege grant unit (a function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a privilege to the player;
Prior to the application determination being performed by the application determination unit or based on the application determination being performed by the application determination unit, the image display unit starts displaying the variation of the pattern, and the application determination is performed. The stop result corresponding to the determination result is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the game time of each game time is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the picture display means such that the picture is displayed in a variable manner (function for executing fluctuation start processing in the main control device 81, function for executing fluctuation display control processing in the effect control device 82). In the gaming machine equipped,
A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub display area Rs) are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means,
The game times control means includes:
Stop mode determining means for determining the stop mode of the pattern at the game times related to the special information subject to the grant determination for each game round (for variation start in the effect control device 82) Processing function), and
When the variation display of the pattern is performed at each game time, the pattern is stopped in the first area and the second area in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means, and the variation display of the game time is ended. Means,
Switching that can be switched between a first state (non-shielding state) and a second state (shielding state) in which at least a part of the design that stops in the second region is more difficult or impossible to see than the first state. Means (movable accessory device 162, 300);
Special notification means (a function for performing the effect setting process for holding notice in the effect control device 82) that performs special notification (for example, holding notice) based on the stop state of the picture determined by the stop mode determining means,
The special notification means includes
On the basis of the stop mode of the current game round determined by the stop mode determining means, the picture or the first zone and the second zone that are stopped in the first zone and the second zone during the game round. A grasping means for grasping the pattern to be stopped in the area;
Determination means for determining whether or not a specific picture combination corresponding to a special notification can be formed by a combination of pictures including a picture to be stopped in the second area based on a grasping result of the grasping means after the game time is started. When,
When the determination unit determines that the specific pattern combination can be formed, the specific pattern combination is controlled in the second region by controlling the switching unit to switch from the second state to the first state. And a notification switching control means for enabling visual recognition of the pattern forming the game machine.

  In recent years, a special notification (so-called pre-reading effect) corresponding to predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to the grant determination is more effective than the special information being subject to the grant determination. A gaming machine that is executed at the previous timing has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, the following games are added to the player, in addition to a game for confirming the result of determination of addition of the acquired special information. That is, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order of the determination of grant is the target of the grant determination for the special information that is later is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting is added. Thereby, the monotonization of the game is suppressed and the interest of the game is improved.

  However, when such special notification is performed, it is common to determine whether or not to perform the special notification based on the hold information stored at the start of the game round. There was a problem that the restrictions were so strong that the effect of improving the special announcement could not be demonstrated well. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when special information is acquired after the game is started, there is a possibility that a special notification corresponding to the special information can be executed. That is, the execution conditions are relaxed compared to the conventional prefetch effect, and the above-described effects can be more suitably exhibited.

  It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features A3 to A13 to the features A14 and A15.

  In addition, the “predetermined specific stop mode” shown in the feature group may correspond to the stop mode determined in advance by the game times control means or the like, and the appearances do not necessarily have to completely match. For example, when there are a plurality of pattern combination patterns and arrangement patterns in a configuration that forms a so-called chance eye, that is, when a plurality of specific stop modes (chance eyes) are stored, Any “predetermined specific stop mode” may be used.

<Feature B group>
It should be noted that the invention described in the following feature group B is “A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a picture display device that displays a picture on a display screen in a variable manner. In this type of gaming machine, For example, when a game ball passes through an operation port provided in a game area, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific game state advantageous to the player such as a hit state is generated, and a variation display of a picture is displayed. When the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, JP 2005-074175). “In recent years, various ideas have been made to increase the degree of attention to games. However, in the configuration of gaming machines, it has not been possible to improve the degree of attention to games. One in which the invention that there is room for good. "Has been made with the problem to be solved.

Feature B0. A pattern display means (symbol display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of pattern rows on the display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player. The function of executing the process of step S501),
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result, a privilege grant unit (a function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a privilege to the player;
Prior to the application determination being performed by the application determination unit or based on the application determination being performed by the application determination unit, the image display unit starts displaying the variation of the pattern, and the application determination is performed. The stop result corresponding to the determination result is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the game time of each game time is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture is displayed in a variable manner (function for executing fluctuation start processing in the main control device 81, function for executing fluctuation display control processing in the effect control device 82, etc.); ,
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the determination of grant, before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination of grant. A destination specifying means (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the main control device 81) specified at timing;
When the specified result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined specified result, the destination specifying is performed at a game time that is performed before the game times related to the special information specified by the destination specifying means. Special notification means (a function for executing the effect setting process for the hold notice in the effect control device 82) for performing special notice (hold notice) corresponding to the result of specifying the means,
The special notification means is a plurality of execution means for executing the special notification for a plurality of times in one game round (movable accessory devices 162, 300, symbol arrangement of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, overlapping effect setting by the effect control device 82 A game machine having a function of executing processing and correction processing for duplication notice.

  According to the feature B0, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the subject of the grant determination is a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. May be executed in In other words, for the player, not only a game for confirming the determination result of the acquired special information at the game times corresponding to the determination result of the acquisition, but also a case where a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Is added with a game of confirming or predicting the result of the special determination in accordance with the content of the special notification for the special information whose order is the determination target. Thereby, monotonization of a game is suppressed.

  Particularly in this feature, a special notification can be executed for a plurality of times in one game round. Therefore, for example, even when special information subject to grant determination is less than the special information that triggered the special notification when the special notification is performed, that is, when the special notification is performed, the special information at that time Even when there are few notification execution opportunities, it is possible to execute a plurality of special notifications in the game times corresponding to the special information that is the subject of the grant determination. Thereby, regardless of the number of special information in the situation where the special notification is performed, the special notification can be suitably executed.

  As described above, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature B1. A pattern display means (symbol display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of pattern rows on the display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player. The function of executing the process of step S501),
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result, a privilege grant unit (a function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a privilege to the player;
Prior to the application determination being performed by the application determination unit or based on the application determination being performed by the application determination unit, the image display unit starts displaying the variation of the pattern, and the application determination is performed. The stop result corresponding to the determination result is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the game time of each game time is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture is displayed in a variable manner (function for executing fluctuation start processing in the main control device 81, function for executing fluctuation display control processing in the effect control device 82, etc.); ,
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the determination of grant, before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination of grant. A destination specifying means (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the main control device 81) specified at timing;
When the specified result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined specified result, each picture string is a game sequence that is executed before the game times related to the special information specified by the destination specifying device. Special notification means (display notice) for displaying a specific pattern combination obtained by combining at least two patterns constituting the pattern one by one and performing special notification (holding notice) corresponding to the specified result of the destination specifying means And a function of executing an effect setting process for holding notice in the control device 82),
The special notification means displays a plurality of the specific picture combinations in one game round or displays a plurality of types of specific picture combinations to execute a plurality of special notifications (movable accessory device). 162, 300, a symbol arrangement of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and a function of executing an overlapping effect setting process and an overlapping notice correction process by the effect control device 82).

  According to the feature B1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the subject of the grant determination is a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. May be executed in In other words, for the player, not only a game for confirming the determination result of the acquired special information at the game times corresponding to the determination result of the acquisition, but also a case where a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Is added with a game of confirming or predicting the result of the special determination in accordance with the content of the special notification for the special information whose order is the determination target. Thereby, monotonization of a game is suppressed.

  The player grasps the determination result of each game time based on the information (final stop result) from the picture display means. The mode information corresponding to the pattern stop mode in the pattern display unit is determined by the mode information determination unit based on the determination result. And the special alert | report is performed by the stop mode (pattern combination) of the pattern in the said pattern display means. By adopting a configuration in which the special notification is performed by the pattern combination in this way, it is possible for the player to check the special notification naturally if he / she wants to grasp the determination result of each game time. Therefore, it is suppressed that it is missed although special alerting | reporting was performed.

  Particularly in this feature, a special notification can be executed for a plurality of times in one game round. Therefore, for example, even when special information subject to grant determination is less than the special information that triggered the special notification when the special notification is performed, that is, when the special notification is performed, the special information at that time Even when there are few notification execution opportunities, it is possible to execute a plurality of special notifications in the game times corresponding to the special information that is the subject of the grant determination. Thereby, regardless of the number of special information in the situation where the special notification is performed, the special notification can be suitably executed. As described above, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

  Note that the technical idea shown in the following feature group can be applied to this feature.

  Feature B2. The plurality of execution means includes means for executing the special notification for a plurality of times without changing a combination of pictures stopped and displayed on the display screen when the special notification is executed a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to Feature B1.

  According to the feature B2, when a plurality of specific picture combinations are displayed, a special notification is performed with the picture string stopped and displayed on the display screen as it is, that is, the picture string remains stopped. By performing a plurality of special notifications, it is not necessary to repeat the stop → fluctuation → stop of the pattern sequence, and it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in control load caused by the effect shown in the feature B1 and the like. it can.

  Feature B3. The game according to Feature B1 or Feature B2, wherein the plurality of execution means include means for sharing a combination of pictures that are stopped and displayed on the display screen when a plurality of the special notifications are executed. Machine.

  According to the feature B3, it is not necessary to change the output for each special notification when a plurality of special notifications are executed, and an extreme increase in processing load required for the special notification can be suppressed.

  For example, “the plurality of execution means includes means for executing the special notification for a plurality of times by performing display so that a plurality of or a plurality of types of the specific pattern combinations are included in one stop mode of the patterns. By adopting the configuration, the effect shown in the feature B2 can be suitably exhibited.

  Further, for example, “the game time control means includes a plurality of unit displays for displaying the design in a stopped or temporarily stopped state after the display of the design in the plurality of variable display areas is started as the one game time. And means for executing the special notification for a plurality of times by displaying the specific picture combination in each unit display; By adopting the “configuration having the same combination of displayed pictures”, the effect shown in the feature B3 can be preferably exhibited.

Feature B4. The game time control means determines, for each game time, a stop mode determination means (effect) that determines a stop mode of the picture at the game time related to the special information subjected to the grant determination based on the grant determination result. The control device 82 has a function of executing variation start processing), and when the variation display of the pattern is performed at each game time, the pattern is stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means. The display of the change of the pattern at the end is terminated.
The stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means includes a special stop mode (special mode) in which a plurality of the specific pattern combinations exist,
The special notification means is a selection means (movable accessory device 162) that enables special notification by one of the specific picture combinations included in the special stop mode and invalidates special notification by other specific picture combinations. 300, a function for executing the mid-variation processing by the production control device 82)
The plurality of execution means execute the special notification for a plurality of times in one game round by sequentially switching the specific picture combination to be valid and invalid by the selection means. The gaming machine according to any one of B3.

  According to the above configuration, since the combination of the patterns corresponding to the identification results of the plurality of first identifying means included in the special stop mode is sequentially switched between valid and invalid by the selection means, It is possible to execute a plurality of special notifications in the game round.

  For example, the stop eye related to the special notification may be set as a special eye in which a plurality of specific picture combinations are mixed.

  Feature B5. The selecting means enables special notification by the specific pattern combination by making one specific pattern combination of the plurality of specific pattern combinations visible and enables at least one of the other specific pattern combinations. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein the special notification by the specific picture combination is invalidated by making a part invisible or difficult to view.

  According to the above configuration, since it is determined whether or not the special notification is effective depending on the visual recognition level (for example, easy / difficult) of a specific picture combination, it is easy for the player to understand whether or not the special notification is effective. That is, even if it is the special structure that a some special alerting | reporting is performed during one game round, it can suppress suitably that each special alerting | reporting is missed without being recognized well.

Feature B6. A movable body,
A second state (shielding state) in which at least a part of the movable body is in a first state (non-shielding state) and at least a part of the specific pattern combination than the first state is difficult or impossible to see from the front of the gaming machine. Switching means (movable combination 170-173, 310, 320, 330, 340) that can be switched to
The selection means controls the switching means so that the movable body is in the second state, invalidates the special notification by the specific picture combination, and performs the switching so that the movable body is in the first state. The gaming machine according to Feature B5, further comprising means for controlling means to enable special notification by the specific picture combination.

  According to the above configuration, the effectiveness of the special notification is determined by the change in visibility on the display screen (specifically, the change in the range that is easy to view / difficult to see). This is advantageous for helping the player's understanding and for suitably exhibiting the notification function by special notification. When the special notification is enabled (when executed), the movable body is switched from the second state to the first covering state, while when the special notification is disabled (when not executed), the movable body is switched to the second state. By maintaining, the player's attention can be drawn by the operation of the movable body. Therefore, the player can be interested in the state (operation) of the movable body.

Feature B7. A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub display area Rs) are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means,
The game time control means stops the picture in the first area and the second area in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means when a change display of the pattern is performed at each game time. To end the fluctuation display
The movable body covers at least a part of the pattern that stops in the second region by switching from the second state to the second state so that it is difficult to view or cannot be viewed from the front of the gaming machine,
The stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means includes a stop mode (stop result corresponding to a special hold notice) that becomes the special stop mode by a combination of a pattern including a pattern to be stopped in the second area. And
The special notification unit controls the switching unit to switch the movable body from the second state to the first state based on the determination that the special stop mode is set by the stop mode determination unit. The gaming machine according to Feature B6, further comprising means for performing the special notification.

  The first area and the second area are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen, and special notification based on a combination of patterns including a pattern stopped in the second area (special stop mode) is set in the special notification. For example, by using a display area (second display area) located outside the normal display area (first display area), the number of patterns that can be used for special notification increases, and the special notification execution condition (pattern stop) It is possible to suitably increase the chance that the aspect) is established.

  In particular, when the special notification is performed, by providing a difference in the movement of the entire apparatus related to the notification in the notification mode, the effect of improving the degree of attention can be easily exhibited.

Feature B8. The grant response result includes a first grant response result (probability big hit result) in which a first privilege is granted to the player by the privilege granting unit, and a player's profit over the first privilege by the privilege granting unit. And a second grant response result (usually a jackpot result) in which a small number of second special benefits are granted,
The special notification means, when the identification result by the prior identification means corresponds to the first grant correspondence result, the first specific picture combination corresponding to the first grant correspondence result (stop corresponding to the hold notice by the specific symbol) The special notification is executed in such a way that the result is determined, and if the specification result by the destination specifying means corresponds to the second assignment correspondence result, the second specific picture combination (non- A means for executing the special notification so as to be a stop result corresponding to a hold notice by a specific design),
The pattern stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means includes a special stop mode in which the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination are stopped,
The selecting means is to enable one of the first specific picture combination and the second specific picture combination included in the special stop mode, and to invalidate the other,
The plurality of execution means sequentially switch the first specific picture combination and the second specific picture combination, which are enabled or disabled by the selection means, in accordance with the specific result by the first specifying means, in one game round. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B7, wherein the special notification is executed for a plurality of minutes.

  According to the above configuration, the first specific pattern combination corresponding to the provision of the first privilege and the second privilege corresponding to the provision of the second privilege to the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the display screen. A special stop mode in which both of the specific pattern combinations stop is included. Then, the plurality of execution means execute the special notification for a plurality of times by sequentially switching the validity of the first / second specific picture combination in the game times that are the special stop mode. In this case, special notification is sequentially performed in correspondence with the identification result by the prior identification means. That is, if the order corresponds to the first grant correspondence result, the player expects that the first privilege will be granted after that, and if the order corresponds to the second grant correspondence result. The player expects that the second privilege will be granted thereafter. And since the profit which a player obtains less than a 1st privilege is set less than a 1st privilege, a player carries out multiple execution in anticipation that the order will correspond to a 1st privilege. Attention will be paid to the order of special notification by means. This makes it possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B9. The grant response result includes a first grant response result (probability big hit result) in which a first privilege is granted to the player by the privilege granting unit, and a player's profit over the first privilege by the privilege granting unit. And a second grant response result (usually a jackpot result) in which a small number of second special benefits are granted,
The special notification means, when the identification result by the prior identification means corresponds to the first grant correspondence result, the first specific picture combination corresponding to the first grant correspondence result (stop corresponding to the hold notice by the specific symbol) The special notification is executed in such a way that the result is determined, and if the specification result by the destination specifying means corresponds to the second assignment correspondence result, the second specific picture combination (non- A means for executing the special notification so as to be a stop result corresponding to a hold notice by a specific design),
The pattern stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means includes a special stop mode in which the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination are stopped,
The plurality of execution means enable the first specific picture combination and the second specific picture combination at the same time when the special information that triggers the special notification corresponds to the second grant correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B8, characterized in that it has means.

  According to the above configuration, the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination can be simultaneously enabled by a plurality of execution means. In this case, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which specific pattern combination corresponds to the special information that triggered the setting of the special notification state. Even if the special information that triggered the setting of the special notification state corresponds to the second grant correspondence result, the order in which the first / second specific picture combination is valid is the first specific If the picture combination is established → the second specific picture combination is established, the player will be discouraged if the provision correspondence result that can be expected thereafter is demoted from the first grant correspondence result to the second grant correspondence result. It might be.

  Therefore, by using this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed by special notification by leaving the possibility of being any of the grant correspondence results. The special notification can be suitably executed.

  Feature B10. The special notification means is configured to notify the special notification by the plurality of execution means in the game times during the variation display based on the fact that the execution condition of the special notification is satisfied under the situation where the variation display of the pattern is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, further comprising means for executing a plurality of parts (a function for executing replacement processing by the effect control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, when the condition for executing the special notification is satisfied in a situation where the variation display of the game times is performed, the special notification is executed for a plurality of times in the game times where the variation display is performed. For this reason, even if the number of special information (game times) for which the special notification can be executed is small, it is possible to suitably increase the opportunities for the special notification. In other words, it is possible to suppress the number of executions of the special notification from being limited by the number of special information stored at the time of specifying the destination.

Feature B11. The game time control means determines, for each game time, a stop mode determination means (effect) that determines a stop mode of the picture at the game time related to the special information subjected to the grant determination based on the grant determination result. The control device 82 has a function of executing variation start processing), and when the variation display of the pattern is performed at each game time, the pattern is stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means. The display of the change of the pattern at the end is terminated.
The plurality of execution means includes a plurality of the specific pattern combinations or a plurality of types of specific pattern combinations in the combination of the patterns to be stopped and displayed in the pattern stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein the special notification is executed based on the feature notification.

  According to the said structure, the display for special alerting | reporting is made | formed using the stop aspect of the pattern in the game round in which the special alerting | reporting for several minutes is performed. By performing a special notification using the pattern stop mode preset by the game times control means (stop mode determination unit), it is not necessary to reset the pattern stop mode during the execution of the special notification. An extreme increase in processing load when performing can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the combination with the feature B7, it is possible to suitably suppress the restriction on the execution opportunity of the special notification by taking into account the pattern that stops in both the first region and the second region.

Feature B12. The special notification means is configured to stop the pattern at the game time determined by the stop mode determination means when the execution condition for the special notification is satisfied under the situation where the display of the variation of the pattern is performed. Based on the aspect information related to the above, determination means for determining whether or not the special notification can be executed in the game times (function to execute the processing of step S3204, step S2404, step S2504, etc. by the effect control device 82) Have
The plurality of execution means, when it is determined by the determination means that the special notification is not executable, the carry-over means (effect control) for executing the plurality of the special notifications in the game times subsequent to the determined game times. A function of executing the processing of step S3301, step S3302, step S3401, and step S3402 by the apparatus 82;
The gaming machine according to Feature B11, wherein the stop mode determination unit includes a unit that determines a stop mode based on information of the carryover unit in subsequent game times.

  According to the above configuration, when the special notification cannot be executed, the special notification by the plurality of execution means is executed in the next game round. As a result, there is no need to perform a process such as changing the stop result or the variable display time in order to execute a special notification in the game game being executed, and more than one game game can be performed in a single game game by a plurality of execution means. Therefore, the special notification can be executed without reducing the number of executions of the special notification. In addition, in the game times that are the targets of the subsequent multiple notifications, the stop mode is determined based on the fact that the target is the multiple notifications. For example, the stop mode does not correspond to the special notification, and the special notification is performed. It can be suitably avoided that the execution is not successful.

  Feature B13. In the case where a plurality of special information that is the subject of the grant determination is stored by the acquired information storage means before the special information that triggers the special notification, the grant determination is performed before that. It is provided with means (function to execute Step S3104, Step S3201, etc. by the production control device 82) for restricting the special notification for the plurality of execution means by the plurality of execution means in the game times related to the special information that is the target. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B12.

  When there are a plurality of special information subject to grant determination before the special information that triggers the special notification, the special notification may be performed in the game times related to the plurality of special information, respectively. It is less necessary to execute special notifications for a plurality of game times. For this reason, in this configuration, special notifications for a plurality of execution means are limited. Thereby, it can suppress that the opportunity for the special alerting | reporting for two or more parts to increase wastefully, and can clarify the difference with a mere special alerting | reporting and multiple alerting | reporting. Therefore, it is possible to secure a premium feeling that the special notification shown in this feature is performed.

Feature B14. When the special notification is executed, notification mode setting means (effect control device 82) is set so that the special notification executed in the current game round is accompanied by an effect different from the special notification executed in the previous game round. The function of executing the processing of step S3004 to step S3008, step S3105 to step S3109, etc.
When the plurality of special notifications are performed for a plurality of special notifications in one game round by the plurality of execution means, a special notification executed later in the plurality of special notifications is accompanied by an effect different from the special notification executed first. Continuous notification setting means for setting (function to execute step S3211, step S3504, step S3609, step S3620, step S3630, etc. by the effect control device 82);
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B13, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, the player recognizes the special notification of each game time as a so-called step-up effect that develops differently for each game time. Even when a plurality of special notifications are performed in one game time by a plurality of execution means, different effects are performed for each special game time, so the player develops step-up effects in each game time in one game time. (Established) It becomes easier to understand. Thereby, the significance of providing a plurality of execution means can be enhanced.

Feature B15. Determination means for determining whether or not to move to the executable state for special notification based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined specific result (a jackpot notice setting process by the effect control device 82, Whether or not to set the different special notification by the notification mode setting unit or the continuous notification setting unit when the determination unit shifts to the executable state. Lottery means (function to execute the processing of step S2809 and step S2908 by the production control device 82),
The lottery means is set with a higher probability that the result specified by the destination specifying means is the assignment correspondence result than the case where the specification result by the destination specifying means is not the assignment correspondence result. The gaming machine according to Feature B14, wherein

  According to the said structure, if this special alert | report is the thing with the production | generation different from what was performed last time, it can be anticipated that the special information used as the object of grant determination after that will be a provision corresponding | compatible result. For this reason, the player expects that this special notification is accompanied by an effect different from the previous special notification, that is, the special notification is developed. Here, if the plurality of execution means shown in the feature B1 are provided, when the special notification is to be developed, the inconvenience that the plurality of notifications as the premise cannot be executed can be made difficult to occur.

<Feature C group>
The invention described in the following feature group C is “a game machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, having a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures on a display screen is known. In such a gaming machine, for example, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player such as a hit state is generated, triggered by the passing of a game ball through an operation port provided in the gaming area, When the lottery is won, the combination of the specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state. Accordingly, for example, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in the game area is started, and a large amount of game balls are paid out (for example, JP-A-2005-074175). About Jing and technology, "Here, in the gaming machine must increase the degree of attention to the game, still there is room for improvement. In this regard," in which the invention that has been made with the problems to be solved.

Feature C1. On a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of variable display areas (each of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3) are set, a symbol display means (symbol display device 161) that scrolls and displays the symbol strings respectively corresponding to the variable display areas ,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player. The function of executing the process of step S501),
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result, a privilege grant unit (a function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a privilege to the player;
In one game round based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, after the variation display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variation display areas, the unit display for stopping or temporarily stopping the pattern is performed at least once. Thus, the game times control means for controlling the picture display means so as to stop and display the result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination in each game time (function for performing variation start processing by the main control device 81, effect control) The function of executing the variable display processing by the device 82),
Special notification means (a function for executing the effect setting process for the hold notice in the effect control device 82) for performing a special notice (for example, a hold notice) by causing the game times control means to stop display or temporarily stop a specific picture combination. With
In the mode of stop display or temporary stop display of the specific pattern combination,
A first display mode (for example, a weak chance eye) set so that the degree of dispersion in the scroll direction of each pattern constituting the specific pattern combination is relatively small;
A second display mode (for example, a strong chance eye) set so that the degree of scattering in the scroll direction of each pattern constituting the specific pattern combination is relatively large,
In the case where the special response is performed in the game times in which the special notification is executed or game times after the game times, the second display mode is selected from the first display mode and the second display mode. If the result is not the assignment correspondence result in a game time in which special notification is executed or a game time after the game time, the first display mode of the first display mode and the second display mode A gaming machine comprising selection means set so as to facilitate selection.

  In a gaming machine of a type in which a pattern row is displayed on a display screen, it is common to shift to reach display by displaying a stop display or a temporary stop display together. In the case of shifting to a special gaming state (for example, winning) advantageous to the player, such reach display is often passed. For this reason, the player's attention tends to be directed to a very limited range of the display screen.

  Here, as shown in this feature, setting a difference in the degree of dispersion of a pattern when a specific pattern combination is displayed in a stop or temporary stop state, and an expectation that results in an assignment determination by increasing the degree of the dispersion If the degree is increased, it is possible to urge the player to pay attention to a wide area of the display screen. Thereby, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience that the effect on the display screen is overlooked and the effect function cannot be exhibited well.

Feature C2. On a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of variable display areas (each of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3) are set, a symbol display means (symbol display device 161) that scrolls and displays the symbol strings respectively corresponding to the variable display areas ,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player. The function of executing the process of step S501),
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result, a privilege grant unit (a function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a privilege to the player;
In one game round based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, after the variation display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variation display areas, the unit display for stopping or temporarily stopping the pattern is performed at least once. Thus, the game times control means for controlling the picture display means so as to stop and display the result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination in each game time (function for performing variation start processing by the main control device 81, effect control) The function of executing the variable display processing by the device 82),
Special notification means (a function for executing the effect setting process for the hold notice in the effect control device 82) for performing a special notice (for example, a hold notice) by causing the game times control means to stop display or temporarily stop a specific picture combination. With
In the mode of stop display or temporary stop display of the specific pattern combination,
A first display mode (for example, a weak chance eye) set so that a separation distance in the scroll direction between the pictures constituting the specific picture combination is relatively small;
A second display mode (for example, a strong chance eye) set so that a separation distance in the scroll direction between the pictures constituting the specific picture combination is relatively large,
In the case where the special response is performed in the game times in which the special notification is executed or game times after the game times, the second display mode is selected from the first display mode and the second display mode. If the result is not the assignment correspondence result in a game time in which special notification is executed or a game time after the game time, the first display mode of the first display mode and the second display mode A gaming machine comprising selection means set so as to facilitate selection.

  In a gaming machine of a type in which a pattern row is displayed on a display screen, it is common to shift to reach display by displaying a stop display or a temporary stop display together. In the case of shifting to a special gaming state (for example, winning) advantageous to the player, such reach display is often passed. For this reason, the player's attention tends to be directed to a very limited range of the display screen.

  Here, as shown in this feature, by setting a plurality of distances between pictures when a specific picture combination is displayed in a stopped state or a temporary stop display, a difference is caused in the degree of dispersion of the specific picture group, and the distance ( If the degree of expectation that is the result of the grant determination is increased by increasing the degree of dispersion), it is possible to urge the player to pay attention to a wide area of the display screen. Thereby, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience that the effect on the display screen is overlooked and the effect function cannot be exhibited well.

Feature C3. A first region (main display region Rm) and a second region (sub-display region Rs) are set in the variable display region of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means,
The second area is arranged so as to include an area on the upstream side of the first area in the display screen in the scroll direction of the pattern row,
In the first display mode, the specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped in the first area.
In the second display mode, the specific pattern combination is configured to be stopped or temporarily stopped over both the first area and the second area. Feature C1 or Feature C2 The gaming machine described in 1.

  As shown in the feature C1 and the like, it is difficult to understand the difference between the first display mode and the second display mode because the region where the specific pattern combination is formed is different between the first region and the second region. Can be suppressed.

Feature C4. Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the determination of grant, before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination of grant. A destination specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the main control device 81) for specifying at a timing is provided.
The special notification means, when the identification result by the destination identification means is a predetermined identification result, game times that are performed before the game times related to the special information that is the identification target of the destination identification means The special display corresponding to the specified result of the previous specifying means by controlling the picture display means so that the stop display or temporary stop display of the game times becomes the first display mode or the second display mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, further comprising means for performing notification (holding notice).

  According to the feature C4, when the special notification corresponding to the specification result of the first specifying means is executed, the degree of variation of the specific picture combination increases, so that the expectation for the subsequent game times increases. . That is, the game progresses to the subsequent game times in a state where the player's field of view is widened by the specific notification. Thus, even if an effect corresponding to the result of grant is performed on the display screen, the effect (for example, a fine effect) is missed by directing the player's consciousness to a wide area of the display screen. Can be suitably suppressed. In addition, when a subsequent effect is performed in a narrow range (for example, the center of the display screen, etc.), the effect is performed with a wide field of view, and it is possible to suppress the effect from being overlooked, of course, This can contribute to improving the impact of the production.

Feature C5. When the determination result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result on a preset active line as a variation mode of the game times executed by the game times control means Is set to stop display or temporary stop display,
As the unit display, at least a part of the variable display area is stopped by changing the display of the pattern, and the reach pattern combination that may satisfy the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is determined as the effective line or The reach variation display is set to form a reach line by stopping display on a different line, and display the variation display of the pattern in the remaining variation display area under the situation where the reach line is formed,
As the reach fluctuation display, at least,
When the reach pattern combination corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the reach line, the reach corresponding pattern that forms the predetermined pattern combination together with the reach pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the reach line. Reach fluctuation display,
The reach reach combination corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is stopped and displayed, and the reach correspondence display is set so as to stop and display the reach correspondence pattern shifted from the reach line to the upstream side or the downstream side in the scroll direction of the design. And
The special notification means includes the unit display including a result mode displayed when the game times related to the predetermined special information are ended based on the fact that the predetermined special information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Special control means (effect control) for controlling the picture display means and performing the special notification so that the outreach unit display, which is the unit display including the outreach fluctuation display, is executed before A function of executing the processing of step S3805 to step S3812 and step S3906 to step S3914 by the apparatus 82),
At least as the outlier reach unit display,
A first-type outreach unit display for stopping and displaying the reach-corresponding pattern in the first region away from the reach line on the upstream side or downstream side in the scroll direction of the pattern;
A second non-reach reach unit display that causes the reach-corresponding pattern to be stopped and displayed in a second area further away from the reach line upstream or downstream in the scroll direction of the pattern from the first area;
Is set,
The special control means includes the selection means, and the selection means displays the predetermined pattern combination via the outlier reach unit display than the first type outlier reach unit display. It is configured so that it is easy to select the two-type out-of-reach unit display and to select the first out-of-type reach unit display more easily than the second-type out-of-reach reach unit display when the predetermined pattern combination is not displayed The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

  When a privilege (for example, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than usual) is given to the player, the reach corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and a predetermined pattern combination is stopped and displayed. In a situation where the reach variation display is performed, the player expects that the reach-compatible pattern reaches the reach line on the upstream side of the reach line, for example, and stops when the reach-compatible pattern reaches the reach line. Expect to be.

  In such a configuration, it is assumed that the closer the reach-corresponding pattern is to the reach line, the higher the attention to the game is, while the farther the reach-corresponding pattern is away from the reach line, the lower the attention is. In addition, it is assumed that the attention level is reduced at a stroke by shifting to reach variation display and stopping and displaying the reach corresponding pattern before the reach line.

  In this regard, according to the present feature, there is a case where the detach reach unit display is set to be executed before the transition unit display in which the stop result corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is displayed. Then, as the detach reach unit display, the reach corresponding pattern is displayed from the reach line as compared to the first detach reach change display in which the reach corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed in the first area farther downstream or upstream than the reach line. The second outlier reach variation display that is stopped and displayed in the second region farther upstream or downstream than the first region has a higher selection rate. Therefore, as a player, the farther the reach-corresponding pattern is away from the reach line, the more the player can expect to receive a privilege as a grant response result. As a result, in the situation where the reach variation display is performed, it is possible to suppress the above-described decrease in the degree of attention resulting from the positional relationship between the reach line and the reach corresponding pattern.

Feature C6. On a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of variable display areas (each of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3) are set, a symbol display means (symbol display device 161) that scrolls and displays the symbol strings respectively corresponding to the variable display areas ,
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player (step in the main control device 81) The function of executing the processing of S501),
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result, a privilege grant unit (a function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a privilege to the player;
In one game round based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, after the variation display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variation display areas, the unit display for stopping or temporarily stopping the pattern is performed at least once. Thus, the game times control means for controlling the picture display means so as to stop and display the result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination in each game time (function for performing variation start processing by the main control device 81, effect control) And a function of executing the process for displaying the fluctuation by the device 82),
When the determination result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the grant correspondence result on a preset active line as a variation mode of the game times executed by the game times control means Is set to stop display or temporary stop display,
As the unit display, at least a part of the variable display area is stopped by changing the display of the pattern, and the reach pattern combination that may satisfy the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is determined as the effective line or The reach variation display is set to form a reach line by stopping display on a different line, and display the variation display of the pattern in the remaining variation display area under the situation where the reach line is formed,
As the reach fluctuation display, at least,
When the reach pattern combination corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is stopped and displayed on the reach line, the reach corresponding pattern that forms the predetermined pattern combination together with the reach pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the reach line. Reach fluctuation display,
The reach reach combination corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is stopped and displayed, and the reach correspondence display is set so as to stop and display the reach correspondence pattern shifted from the reach line to the upstream side or the downstream side in the scroll direction of the design. A gaming machine that
Rather than executing the unit display including the result mode displayed when the game times related to the predetermined special information are terminated based on the fact that the predetermined special information has been acquired by the information acquisition means. Before, special control means (steps S3805 to S3812 and step S3906 by the effect control device 82) for controlling the picture display means so that the outreach unit display which is the unit display including the outreach fluctuation display is executed. A function of executing the process of step S3914),
At least as the outlier reach unit display,
A first-type outreach unit display for stopping and displaying the reach-corresponding pattern in the first region away from the reach line on the upstream side or downstream side in the scroll direction of the pattern;
A second non-reach reach unit display that causes the reach-corresponding pattern to be stopped and displayed in a second area further away from the reach line upstream or downstream in the scroll direction of the pattern from the first area;
Is set,
The special control means, when displaying the predetermined pattern combination via the outlier reach unit display, the second type outlier reach unit display is more easily selected than the first type outlier reach unit display, In the case where the predetermined pattern combination is not displayed, there is provided selection means set so that the first type outlier reach unit display is more easily selected than the second type outlier reach unit display. A gaming machine.

  When a privilege (for example, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than usual) is given to the player, the reach corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and a predetermined pattern combination is stopped and displayed. In a situation where the reach variation display is performed, the player expects that the reach-compatible pattern reaches the reach line on the upstream side of the reach line, for example, and stops when the reach-compatible pattern reaches the reach line. Expect to be.

  In such a configuration, it is assumed that the closer the reach-corresponding pattern is to the reach line, the higher the attention to the game is, while the farther the reach-corresponding pattern is away from the reach line, the lower the attention is. In addition, it is assumed that the attention level is reduced at a stroke by shifting to reach variation display and stopping and displaying the reach corresponding pattern before the reach line.

  In this regard, according to this feature, there is a case in which the outreach unit display is set to be executed before the transition unit display in which the stop result corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is displayed. Then, as the detach reach unit display, the reach corresponding pattern is displayed from the reach line as compared to the first detach reach change display in which the reach corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed in the first area farther downstream or upstream than the reach line. The second outlier reach variation display that is stopped and displayed in the second region farther upstream or downstream than the first region has a higher selection rate. Therefore, as a player, the farther the reach-corresponding pattern is away from the reach line, the more the player can expect to receive a privilege as a grant response result. As a result, in the situation where the reach variation display is performed, it is possible to suppress the above-described decrease in the degree of attention resulting from the positional relationship between the reach line and the reach corresponding pattern.

  Feature C7. The gaming machine according to Feature C5 or Feature C6, wherein the first region and the second region are provided downstream of the reach line in the scroll direction of the picture.

  In a configuration in which a privilege is given if the reach-corresponding pattern stops on the reach line, the degree of attention of the reach variation display tends to decrease at a stroke particularly after the reach-corresponding pattern passes the reach line. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by providing the first region and the second region on the downstream side of the reach line, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the degree of attention even after passing the reach line.

Feature C8. The acquisition information storage means stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit as a plurality of numbers,
The grant determination means sequentially determines the grant information stored in the acquisition information storage means.
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the determination of grant, before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination of grant. A destination specifying means (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the main control device 81) specified at timing;
If the specified result by the first specifying means is a predetermined specified result, the game times of the game times that are performed before the game times related to the special information specified by the first specifying means are determined. Special notification that performs special notification (holding notice) corresponding to the specific result of the first specifying means by controlling the picture display means so that the stop display mode is a predetermined display mode for stopping and displaying a specific picture combination. Means (function of executing the effect setting process for holding notice in the effect control device 82),
As the predetermined display mode, a first display mode corresponding to the first type outlier reach unit display and a second display mode corresponding to the second type outlier reach unit display are set. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C7.

  The special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to the grant determination may be executed at a timing before the special information is subject to the grant determination. is there. In other words, for the player, not only the game for confirming the result of determination of the acquisition of the acquired special information, but also when the plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, As for the special information, a game of confirming or predicting the result when it is the subject of grant determination according to the content of the special notification is added. Thereby, monotonization of a game is suppressed.

  In this configuration, the special notification is performed as a reach unit display. That is, in the game times in which the special notification is performed, the game is performed with the expectation that the reach variation display being executed as a player will correspond to the grant correspondence result (not the outreach unit display). Pay attention to times. On the other hand, even if the reach variation display is a deviating reach variation display, if it is a deviating reach unit display corresponding to the special notification, there is room for a privilege to be given in the subsequent game rounds.

  As described in the feature C5 and the like, the second-type outreach reach unit display in which the reach-corresponding pattern stops in the second area rather than the first-type out-of-reach reach unit display in which the reach-corresponding pattern stops in the first area. The expectation to shift to the special game state is high (the selection rate is high). Therefore, as a player, in the game times in which the reach variation display is performed, first, it is expected that a privilege will be given in the game times. Otherwise, the reach correspondence pattern is displayed from the first area. Also expects to stop in the second region. By doing in this way, the novel game effect of raising the attention degree with respect to the reach fluctuation display of the said game times by the game result of the subsequent game times is implement | achieved.

  Feature C9. When the determination result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, the game times control means is configured to perform the second type by the special control means in the game times related to the special information that is the target of the grant correspondence result. The gaming machine according to Feature C8, further comprising a restricting unit that restricts the display of outlier reach units.

  According to the above configuration, in the game times when the determination result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, the second-type outlier reach unit display is limited. In other words, in the game times in which the second-type outlier reach unit display is performed, the special information relating to the game times does not correspond to the grant correspondence result, and no privilege is given in the current game times. For this reason, when the reach-corresponding pattern passes through the reach line and further passes through the first region, the expectation for granting the bonus is reduced in the game times, and the degree of attention may be reduced. However, even in this case, as described in the feature C8, if the reach-corresponding pattern stops in the second area, a sense of expectation for providing a privilege increases in the subsequent game rounds, and thus a reduction in the degree of attention is preferably avoided. it can.

  Feature C10. When the determination result of the grant determination is the grant response result, in the game times related to the special information that is the target of the grant response result, the first-type outreach reach unit display is selected by the special notification unit. The gaming machine according to Feature C8 or Feature C9, wherein the probability is set higher than the probability that the second-type outlier reach unit display is selected.

  According to the above configuration, once the reach-corresponding pattern is temporarily stopped in the first area in the outlier reach unit display, the probability that a privilege is given in the next game play is lower than when the reach-corresponding pattern is stopped in the second area. However, the probability that a privilege is given in this game round becomes high. In other words, based on the relationship between the first area and the second area, the player has an expectation for the current game time if the reach-related pattern stops in the first area, and next time if the reach-compatible pattern stops in the second area. I have high expectations for the game times. Thereby, the attention degree of the reach variation display can be preferably increased in relation to the stop area of the reach corresponding pattern in the reach variation display.

Set so that multiple reach lines are formed simultaneously so that the first reach pattern combination is stopped on the reach line of feature C11.1 and the second reach pattern combination is stopped on the other reach line And
The reach variation display includes a first design that forms the predetermined design combination together with the first reach design combination, a design different from the first design, and the predetermined design combination together with the second reach design combination. And a variable display that is set to pass both on the reach line with the second pattern forming
The special notification means is configured to display a reach-corresponding pattern of the reach line formed by the first pattern in a state where the first reach pattern combination and the second reach pattern combination are stopped and displayed on the plurality of reach lines. One of the features C8 to C10, wherein the reach-corresponding pattern of the reach line formed by the second pattern is set to stop in the second region when stopping in the one region. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, in the multiple line reach, when the first pattern stops in the first area, the second pattern stops in the second area. Therefore, it is possible to have a sense of expectation with respect to a pattern that forms any reach line in a plurality of line reach. In particular, as described in the feature C8, since the expectation of the next game play is higher when stopping in the second area than when stopping in the first area, the first design stops in the first area as described above. When the second picture stops in two areas, it is expected in the game times that the reach fluctuation display by the second picture is performed rather than the reach fluctuation display by the first picture in the next and subsequent game times. The degree becomes higher. In this way, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention with respect to the variation display of the game times after the next time by associating the variation display of the current game times with the reach correspondence pattern of the reach variation display that can occur after the next time. Become.

Feature C12. The special notification means includes
The current game determined by the stop mode determining means when the specified result by the first specifying means becomes a predetermined specified result during the variable display from the start of the game time to the stop display. First determination means for determining whether or not the mode of stop display corresponds to reach variation display;
If the first determination means determines that it corresponds to the reach variation display, the determination means determines whether it is possible to change the stop display mode of a specific pattern other than the pattern that forms the reach line. When,
When it is determined by the determination means that the change of the stop display mode is possible, the stop display mode of the specific picture sequence being variably displayed according to the predetermined specific result is changed to the predetermined display mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features C8 to C11, further comprising changing means for changing to a corresponding one.

  As shown in the feature C8, in the case of performing an effect corresponding to the previously specified result by the reach variation display, when it is a timing at which the specific pattern row can be changed, It becomes possible to reflect the specific result by the first specifying means in the stop display mode in the previous game round. Thereby, the restriction | limiting concerning the special alerting | reporting using a prior | specific identification means can be suppressed, and the opportunity that a special alerting | reporting is performed can be increased suitably.

  Even in the case of rewriting such effects, it is only necessary to rewrite the stop display mode of a specific picture sequence, and therefore it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in control load associated with the rewriting.

Feature C13. The pattern display variation display mode includes a high discrimination variation mode and a low discrimination variation mode in which the discrimination of the pattern is relatively high and low. It is possible to switch for each pattern row,
The determination unit determines that the stop display mode of the specific picture sequence is changeable when the mode of display of the fluctuation of the specific picture sequence is the low identification fluctuation mode. The feature C12 is characterized in that Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, since the change of the stop display mode is performed when the variable display is performed in the low discrimination variation mode with low pattern discrimination, the discomfort given to the player by the change is reduced. Can do.

  Moreover, if it is set as the structure by which special alerting | reporting is performed by such a change, it will become unnecessary to adjust the execution period of game times without darkness, and the increase in the control load accompanying rewriting can be suppressed more suitably.

<Feature D group>
It should be noted that the invention described in the following feature group D is “A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board having a game area formed on the front surface mounted on a frame body. Winning lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state by winning a game ball that has been launched based on the operation in the entrance area provided in the gaming area (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-190511) In this type of gaming machine, the variation of the pattern is triggered by winning the winning part in the game board. Displaying a symbol display device for display, and various gaming equipment related to game effects such as movable accessories that suggests the result of a lottery by operating in accordance with the variation display of symbols, etc. Some have been improved. By adopting the configuration, the movement of the game ball toward the pitching unit, the enjoyment of the privilege based on the winning, and the process (production) leading to the enjoyment of the privilege are integrated, and the interest of the gaming machine is improved. Some of the above-mentioned attention levels have been improved by placing gaming parts such as decorative members in the gaming area for the purpose of improving the appearance of gaming machines, especially in recent years due to the larger size of gaming machines and the like. Regarding the background / techniques that allow strong performances and the like to improve the player's attention level, “However, in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, the movement of the game ball can be tracked visually. Since the configuration itself is a means of improving the game machine's original interest, it is possible to assume the guarantee of the flow-down area of the game ball when the game machine or the game parts are enlarged. Area (Game For example, expansion of the game board itself can be an effective solution, but the width of the gaming machine is constant due to the island facilities of the game hall. In reality, it is difficult to deal with such reasons because there are restrictions, etc. In other words, for example, coexistence of a game area and a game device, etc., for example, to improve the degree of attention to the game suitably. Then, there is still room for improvement in the structure of the gaming machine. "

Feature D1. A game board (game board 100) in which a game area (game area 103) on which a game ball flows down is formed on the front;
A display means (symbol display device 161) arranged behind the game board and executing a predetermined display effect on a display screen (display screen G);
The game board is formed so that at least a portion facing the display screen has transparency, and the display screen can be visually recognized through the facing portion.
A movable combination (movable combination 170 to 173, 310, 320) that is arranged between the game board and the display means and can be switched between a first state (for example, a shielding state) and a second state (for example, a non-shielding state). , 330, 340).

  According to the feature D1, the display screen can be visually recognized through a portion facing the display screen on the game board. In order to ensure the visibility of the display screen, it is not necessary to form an opening for the display screen on the game board, so that the game area where the game ball flows down can be prevented from being compressed due to the guarantee of the visibility. .

  Here, as for the movable combination, since the movable combination is arranged behind the game board, there is no possibility that the game ball flowing down the game area and the movable combination will collide, and there are restrictions on the operation mode of the movable combination. Can be reduced. Further, since the movable combination is arranged in front of the display means, the association between the operation of the movable combination and the display effect by the display means is strengthened, and a dynamic effect in which both are integrated becomes possible.

  As described above, according to the present configuration, it is possible to perform a unified performance using the movable accessory and the display means while avoiding the game of enjoying the flow of the game ball by securing a wide game area and obsolescence. Contribute to improving the fun of the machine.

  In the first state, the movable accessory overlaps with the display screen of the display unit in the front-rear direction, and in the second state, the overlap with the display screen is smaller than that in the first state or the display screen. By adopting a configuration in which “overlapping is avoided”, it is possible to associate a change in a range in which the movable accessory and the display unit overlap with the display effect.

Feature D2. The movable accessory has a movable body that is displaceably provided on the back side of the facing portion, and the movable body is moved to a second position (for example, in accordance with switching from the second state to the first state). It has a configuration in which the mode of overlap of the movable body with respect to the display screen is changed by displacing from a non-shielding position) to a first position (for example, a shielding position),
The game according to Feature D1, wherein a guide portion (for example, a guide groove or a rail) for guiding the movable body from the first position to the second position is provided on a back surface portion of the facing portion. Machine.

  According to the feature D2, it is possible to stabilize the movement of the movable body (movable accessory) by providing a function of guiding the movable body to the facing portion of the game board.

  For example, if the movable body is enlarged or the movable body's operating range is set wide, the effect using the movable accessory can be made impactful, improving the degree of attention to the gaming machine This is advantageous. However, on the other hand, it is assumed that the movement of the movable body tends to be unstable. As described above, the unstable movement of the movable body may cause malfunction and deterioration in appearance, and may be an obstacle to exhibiting the above effects. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience, and it is possible to suitably exhibit the effect function by the movable accessory.

  For example, when the support position (holding position) of the movable accessory is arranged at a position that does not overlap the display screen (specifically, the display area), by moving the movable body in front of the display screen, The position variation of the movable body tends to be large at a portion far from the support position. In this regard, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed if the game board has a facing portion and a guide portion is provided in the facing portion. In other words, the technical idea shown in this feature is applied to a movable accessory provided with a movable body that is usually set to have a small overlap with the display screen and is displaced so as to increase the overlap depending on the situation. Thus, it is possible to contribute to the realization of a preferable configuration in which an effect function or the like by the movable accessory can be stably exhibited.

Feature D3. A predetermined pattern that is visible from the front of the gaming machine is provided on the facing portion of the gaming board,
The gaming machine according to Feature D2, wherein the guide portion is formed to overlap the predetermined pattern from behind the predetermined pattern.

  When viewing the display screen through the game board, if the guide section becomes conspicuous, the appearance of the gaming machine may deteriorate. Therefore, by arranging the guide portion behind the pattern formed on the game board (opposing portion), the guide portion can be made inconspicuous and the above-described deterioration in appearance can be suppressed.

  Feature D4. The gaming machine according to Feature D3, wherein the predetermined pattern is provided on a front surface portion of the facing portion.

  According to the feature D4, it is possible to prevent the presence of the guide part from being a factor that makes it difficult to give a predetermined pattern, and it is possible to allow the predetermined pattern and the guide part to coexist suitably in the opposite part of the game board It becomes.

Feature D5. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the grant determination means for performing grant determination as to whether or not it corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player (the process of step S501 in the main control device 81 is executed) Function)
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result, a privilege grant means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a privilege to the player. Prepared,
The display means has a plurality of variable display areas (each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3) set on the display screen, displays the patterns in each of the variable display areas, and responds to the result of the determination of application. It is configured to stop the combination of pictures on the active line,
The gaming machine according to Feature D3 or Feature D4, wherein the predetermined pattern is formed along the effective line and teaches the effective line.

  According to the feature D5, the guide portion is camouflaged by the pattern that teaches the effective line, and the predetermined pattern and the guide portion can coexist appropriately.

  Feature D6. Any one of the features D2 to D5, wherein the movable body is rotatably supported, and an engaging portion that engages with the guide portion is formed at a rotating tip portion thereof. The gaming machine described in one.

  In the case where the movable body is configured to be rotatable, a blur width (for example, positional deviation) at the rotation tip end portion tends to increase during operation of the movable body. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the object to be guided by the guide portion is the rotation tip portion (engagement portion) of the movable body, the movement of the movable body can be suitably stabilized while suppressing the above-mentioned shake.

  Feature D7. Any of the features D2 to D6, wherein the guide portion is configured to function as a support portion that supports the movable body in a state where at least the movable body is disposed at the first position. The gaming machine according to one.

  According to the feature D7, it is possible to stabilize the posture at the first position by adding a support function to the guide portion.

  In particular, in combination with the feature D6, the support load on the rotation base end side can be reduced by supporting the rotation tip of the movable body. In addition, this configuration is advantageous for suppressing the positional deviation of the rotating tip.

  In addition, about the opposing part and guide part which were shown to the characteristic D2-feature D7, in order to exhibit the said various effects, it exists in integral relationship with presence of the movable body which operate | moves behind an opposing part.

Feature D8. The movable combination is provided with a shielding function that reduces the visibility of the overlapped portion by overlapping the display screen,
Switching means (effect control device 82) for switching the movable accessory to the first state or the second state;
In the situation where the movable combination is in the first state on the game board, when the game ball reaches a region overlapping with the movable combination in the front and back, detection means (detection sensor 136a, 136b),
Switching control means for switching the movable accessory to the first state or the second state by performing drive control of the switching means based on the detection result of the detection means (execution of variation processing by the effect control device 82 is executed) A gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D7.

  According to the said structure, based on the detection result of a detection means, ie, based on the presence or absence of the game ball which passes the front of a movable accessory, the state of a movable accessory can be changed. In this way, by switching the state of the movable combination by the movement of the game ball, for example, it is possible to give relevance to the movement of the game ball and the movement of the movable combination and the display content of the display screen.

Feature D9. In the first state, the movable accessory overlaps with the display screen of the display unit in the front-rear direction, and in the second state, the overlap with the display screen is smaller than that in the first state or overlaps with the display screen. It is configured to be avoided,
The switching control means includes means for displacing the movable accessory from the first state to the second state based on detection of a game ball by the detection means. A gaming machine according to D8.

  According to the above configuration, when a game ball is detected by the detecting means, the movable accessory changes from the first state to the second state, and the region where the movable accessory and the display means overlap becomes narrow. For example, by preventing the detected game ball from overlapping the movable accessory in the front-rear direction, the game ball flows down across the display means (display screen). Thus, by allowing the movement of the game ball in front of the display screen, for example, it is possible to associate the movement of the game ball with the display effect by the display means.

Feature D10. In the first state, the movable accessory overlaps with the display screen of the display unit in the front-rear direction, and in the second state, the overlap with the display screen is smaller than that in the first state or overlaps with the display screen. It is configured to be avoided,
The switching control means includes means for switching the movable accessory from the second state to the first state based on detection of a game ball by the detecting means. Or the gaming machine according to Feature D9.

  According to the above configuration, when a game ball is detected by the detecting means, the movable accessory is switched from the second state to the first state, and a region where the movable accessory and the display means overlap is widened. When the movable accessory is arranged in the first state, the visibility of the display means existing behind decreases, and the game ball flows down in a range where the display means overlaps with the portion where the visibility is reduced. Thereby, the action of the game ball that flows down stands out, and the movement of the game ball becomes easier to follow with the eyes as compared with the case of flowing down with the display screen as the background.

Feature D11. What is provided in the game area, where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and where the game ball that has entered the entrance is provided in the game area? It has a ball passage (front side ball passage 134, back side ball passage 143) that connects the discharge port leading to different places,
The ball passage is formed at a position overlapping the movable accessory in the front-rear direction when the movable accessory is in the first state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D8 to D10, wherein the detection means detects a game ball passing through the ball passage.

  According to the said structure, the object which a detection means detects is limited to the game ball which passes a ball path. In order to exert the effect shown in the feature D8 and the like, it is only necessary to set the operation of the movable accessory and the display content of the display screen based on the positional relationship with the ball passage, and it is necessary to assume various flow-down modes of the game ball. Absent. This makes it possible to simplify the production design. Further, since the presence / absence of entering the entrance is reflected in the movement of the movable accessory, it is possible to suppress the relationship between the movable accessory and the movement of the game ball from being difficult for the player to grasp.

Feature D12. A ball entrance portion (operating port 115) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Grant determination means (function to execute the process of step S501 by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to the player based on the game ball having entered the pitch part ,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player, the privilege granting unit (game by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege to the player State transition process), and
There is a rolling area provided in the gaming area, in which a gaming ball led out from the ball passage is capable of rolling, and a guide portion is formed for guiding the gaming ball on the rolling area to the pitching section. A gaming machine according to Feature D11, comprising a stage portion (stage 144).

  According to the above configuration, by flowing the game ball into the ball passage, the game ball is easily guided to the ball passage → the rolling region → the guide portion → the entrance portion. The entrance to the entrance part is related to the grant determination. If the configuration shown in the feature D5 is applied to such a configuration, it is possible to give motivation to see the above-mentioned production from the relevance between the movable accessory and the display means and the movement of the game ball. Can be prevented from being exhibited well.

Feature D13. In the first state, the movable accessory overlaps with the display screen of the display unit in the front-rear direction, and in the second state, the overlap with the display screen is smaller than that in the first state or overlaps with the display screen. It is configured to be avoided,
The feature D11 or the feature is characterized in that the detection means is arranged at a portion upstream of a region overlapping in the front-rear direction in the situation where the movable accessory is arranged in the first state in the ball passage. A gaming machine according to D12.

  According to the above configuration, since the detection means is provided on the upstream side of the region where the movable accessory overlaps the ball path, in the gaming machine, the game ball that has entered the ball path overlaps the movable accessory in the front-rear direction. The presence of the game ball can be grasped before. As a result, it becomes possible to move the movable accessory before the game balls overlap, and a preferable configuration is realized in producing the effect.

  Particularly in combination with the feature D9, it becomes easy to flow down the game ball in front of the exposed portion with the display screen exposed. Further, in combination with the feature D10, it is easy to allow the game ball to flow down in front of the movable accessory while the display means is shielded by the movable accessory.

  Feature D14. The switching control means switches the state of the movable accessory based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls determined as a plurality of numbers are detected by the detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of D13.

  According to the above configuration, since the operating condition of the movable accessory is that a predetermined number of game balls are detected by the detection means, a player who wants to see an effect using the movable accessory is preferably detected by the detection means. The game ball will flow down as is done. This encourages active participation in the game and contributes to increasing the attention to the game.

Feature D15. The display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of patterns on the display screen,
The plurality of types of designs include a first design (specific design) and a second design (non-specific design) having less related benefits than the first design as designs related to the player's interest. And
In the first state, the movable accessory overlaps with the display screen of the display unit in the front-rear direction, and in the second state, the overlap with the display screen is smaller than that in the first state or overlaps with the display screen. It is configured to be avoided,
The movable combination is configured to overlap at least one of the first design and the second design by the movable combination being in the first state,
Of the first picture and the second picture that overlap with the movable accessory, the overlap with the movable accessory is avoided, so that the profit set for the pattern that does not overlap is played. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D14, further comprising means (a function of executing a hold notice control process by the effect control device 82) to be given to a person.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first picture and the second picture related to the player's profit are displayed on the display screen, the second picture is set so that the profit related to the first picture is less than the first picture. Therefore, it is considered that the player desires to display the first pattern rather than the second pattern. And since the movable combination is configured to overlap the first pattern and the second pattern, when the first pattern and the second pattern are displayed on the display means, the player displays which pattern. (Become visible). By having such a configuration, it is possible to produce an effect that associates the profit associated with each of the first pattern and the second pattern, the pattern overlapping the movable accessory in the front-rear direction, and the position displacement of the movable accessory. Is possible. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the attention degree to a game.

Feature D16. The display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of patterns on the display screen, and is set to notify the player of information related to profits according to the types of the displayed patterns.
In the first state, the movable accessory overlaps with the display screen of the display unit in the front-rear direction, and in the second state, the overlap with the display screen is smaller than that in the first state or overlaps with the display screen. It is configured to be avoided,
The gaming machine includes a plurality of the movable objects,
The plurality of movable actors overlap each of the predetermined pictures displayed on the display unit by entering the first state, and the overlap with the predetermined pictures can be avoided by entering the second state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D15, which is configured as follows.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined pattern overlaps with the plurality of movable accessories in the first state, and the weights are avoided by the movable combination being in the second state. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect in which a predetermined pattern and the state of each movable accessory are associated with each other. By applying the technical idea shown in this feature to a configuration in which information related to profits is notified to the player by the type of picture displayed on the display means, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

<Feature E group>
It should be noted that the invention described in the following feature group E is “a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in which a gaming board having a gaming area formed on the front is mounted on a frame. Winning lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state by winning a game ball that has been launched based on the operation in the entrance area provided in the gaming area (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-190511) In this type of gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner when a prize is entered in the winning part. Increasing attention to gaming machines by adopting various gaming equipment related to game effects such as movable accessories that suggests the result of lottery by operating in accordance with the display of the display device and the variation of symbols. Some of these configurations are shown As a result, the movement of the game ball toward the pitching part, the enjoyment of the privilege based on the prize, and the process (production) leading to the enjoyment of the privilege are integrated, and the interest of the gaming machine is improved. Some game parts such as decorative members for the purpose of improving the appearance of the machine are arranged in the game area to improve the degree of attention, and in recent years, the impact of the game equipment has been increased due to the increase in size. Regarding the background / technique that “is possible to produce effects and the like, and the degree of attention of the player is improved.” “However, in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, the configuration in which the movement of the gaming ball can be followed with eyes. Therefore, in the case of increasing the size of the gaming machine or the gaming parts, it is possible to assume the guarantee of the flow area of the gaming balls. (Game Ball For example, expansion of the game board itself can be an effective solution, but the width of the gaming machine is constant depending on the island facilities of the game hall. In reality, such a response is difficult because of restrictions, etc. In other words, there is still room for improvement in the structure of the gaming machine in order to achieve coexistence of gaming areas and gaming machines. The invention "is made" with a problem to be solved.

Feature E1. A pair of movable objects (movable objects 310, 320, etc.) provided to be openable and closable;
Each movable accessory has a fan surface portion (fan surface portion 312 or the like) formed so as to spread toward the front side of the gaming machine by opening the movable accessory.
The fan surface portion is configured to expand so that one end and the other end in the opening and closing direction are shifted in the front-rear direction in the open state, and folded so as to overlap in the front-rear direction in the closed state,
Each movable accessory is arranged so that the position in the front-rear direction is the same, and when in the open state, the first specific region including the front end of the fan surface portion of one movable accessory and The gaming machine is configured so that the second specific area including the rear end portion of the fan face portion of the other movable accessory overlaps with the front and rear.

  When the foldable movable accessory shown in the feature E1 is mounted, the difference between the open state and the closed state can be clarified, but the arrangement space is likely to be restricted due to the increase in thickness. Such an inconvenience is assumed to become conspicuous by trying to cover a wide area with one movable accessory.

  In this regard, as shown in this feature, there are two movable accessories and the front and rear positions thereof are aligned, and the first specific area in the fan surface portion of one movable accessory (including the front end portion in the fan surface portion). Area) and the second specific area (area including the rear end of the fan face part) in the fan face part of the other movable accessory overlap in the front-rear direction, thereby widening the cover range. While realizing, it is possible to suppress an increase in the overall thickness caused by overlapping these specific regions. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning area | region and movement area | region of a movable accessory can be ensured in the limited space, aiming at widening of the production range using a movable accessory.

Feature E2. Provided with a pattern display means (symbol display device 161) having a display screen (display screen G) which is provided behind the movable accessory and performs a predetermined display effect;
When the movable accessory is in the open state, the movable accessory is arranged to overlap the display screen in the front-rear direction, and light from the display screen is irradiated to the front side of the gaming machine through the fan surface portion. And
The fan surface portion is formed with a bent portion (folded portion 312c or the like) that becomes a starting point when folded in accordance with switching from the open state to the closed state, and the opening / closing direction is sandwiched between the bent portions. Are formed with flat portions (fixed portions 312a, etc.) with different orientations on both sides of
At least one of the two flat portions is non-parallel to the display screen when the movable accessory is in the open state, and the gaming machine according to Feature E1.

  According to the above configuration, since the display screen and one of the flat portions are non-parallel, light from the display screen arranged behind is refracted at the flat portion, and the display screen is visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine. Sex can be changed. In this way, by causing a change in the visibility of the display screen through the movable accessory, it is possible to prevent the appearance from becoming obsolete when the display effect related to the movable accessory is executed.

Feature E3. The fan surface portion has a plurality of long base portions (for example, the main bone portions 314a and 314b) constituting the flat portion,
These base parts are arranged so that the planes are overlapped so as to face front and rear, and are connected so as to be rotatable with one end in the longitudinal direction as a base end part,
The game according to Feature E2, further comprising an opening / closing means (a function for executing the changing middle processing by the effect control device 82) for opening and closing the movable accessory by rotating each of the base portions. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, the difference between the open state and the closed state, that is, the range in which the movable accessory spreads can be expanded, and the expansion of the occupied space in the closed state can be minimized.

Feature E4. The fan surface portion includes a sheet member having the flat portion, and a frame member constituting a skeleton of the movable accessory,
The gaming machine according to Feature E3, wherein the frame member is attached to a portion of the seat member that constitutes the base portion.

  According to the said structure, what is not non-parallel to a display screen (namely, part parallel to a display screen) functions among the flat parts which continue from a bending part as a base part of a fan surface part. In the case where the base portion is arranged so that its plane faces front and rear, the thickness of the movable accessory in the front and rear direction can be reduced. However, on the other hand, in the non-parallel part, light can be transmitted through the display screen excessively compared to the non-parallel part. In this respect, since the frame members overlap with each other in parallel, it is possible to adjust the light transmission by the frame members, and it is preferable that excessive direct light is irradiated to the front of the gaming machine. Can be avoided.

  It should be noted that “the movable accessory may be configured such that the opening / closing direction is parallel to the display screen”. If the technical idea shown in this feature is applied to such a configuration (a configuration in which the opening and closing direction is parallel to the display screen), the fan area is visually recognized while suppressing the unnecessary expansion of the arrangement area and the operation area of the movable accessory. It is possible to cause a change.

  Feature E5. The gaming machine according to Feature E4, wherein the frame member is attached to the seat member constituting the base portion such that an edge thereof is along the bent portion.

  According to the above configuration, when the movable accessory is changed from the open state to the closed state, the deformation triggered by the bent portion of the fan surface portion is induced, and other portions are deformed. It can suppress suitably that switching is not performed well or the appearance of a fan part deteriorates.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the movable accessory is automatically opened and closed by the opening and closing means shown in the feature E3 or the like, there is a concern that the opening and closing function may not be smoothly performed by bending at a position different from a preset bending position. The In this regard, if the technical idea shown in this feature is applied, such inconvenience can be suitably avoided even with an automatic opening / closing movable accessory, and the deterioration of the opening / closing function due to repeated use etc. can be suppressed. Is possible.

  Feature E6. The movable accessory has transmission parts (gears 319) that transmit power from a drive part (drive motor 313, etc.) to each of the base parts, and when the plurality of base parts are in the closed state, Any one of features E3 to E5, characterized in that the movable base is configured to open and close by rotating the other base portion with one of the front and back portions of the movable accessory as a base end. The gaming machine according to one.

  For example, in a general fan, when a fan is opened, a force is applied only to the main bone portion, so that the opening / closing operation may not be performed smoothly. In this regard, according to this feature, the power is transmitted to each base portion via the transmission portion, so that the opening / closing operation can be performed smoothly.

Feature E7. A game board (game board 100) provided in front of the pair of movable accessories and having a game area in which a game ball flows down on the front surface;
Features E1 to E6, comprising display means (symbol display device 161) provided behind the pair of movable accessories and having a display screen (display screen G) for performing a predetermined display effect. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, the game board is provided in front of the movable accessory and the display screen is provided in the rear. Even in this case, the pair of movable accessories are installed such that the thickness of the installation area is reduced as shown in the feature E1. For this reason, it becomes possible to arrange the movable accessory while preventing the gap between the game board and the display screen from becoming extremely large and suppressing the reduction in the visibility of the display screen.

  Feature E8. The gaming machine according to Feature E7, wherein at least a portion facing the display screen in the gaming board has transparency, and the display screen can be visually recognized through the facing portion.

  According to the above configuration, it is not necessary to form an opening in the game board to ensure the visibility of the display screen, and the game area can be set wide while ensuring the visibility of the display screen. In particular, as described in the feature E3 and the like, since the pair of movable accessories are installed so as to be thin, it is possible to suppress the spread of the distance between the game board and the display screen. Therefore, it can suppress that the clearance gap between a display screen and a game board becomes large, and a display screen moves away from a player.

Feature F1. A pattern display means (symbol display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of patterns on the display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
Grant determination means (in the main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant response result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player. The function of executing the process of step S501),
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result, a privilege grant unit (a function for executing the game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a privilege to the player;
Prior to the application determination being performed by the application determination unit or based on the application determination being performed by the application determination unit, the image display unit starts displaying the variation of the pattern, and the application determination is performed. The stop result corresponding to the determination result is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the game time of each game time is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the picture display means such that the picture is displayed in a variable manner (function for executing fluctuation start processing in the main control device 81, function for executing fluctuation display control processing in the effect control device 82). In the gaming machine equipped,
The game time control means determines, for each game time, a stop mode determination means (effect) that determines a stop mode of the picture at the game time related to the special information subjected to the grant determination based on the grant determination result. The control device 82 has a function of executing variation start processing), and when the variation display of the pattern is performed at each game time, the pattern is stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means, and the game To end the fluctuation display
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the determination of grant, before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination of grant. A destination specifying means (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the main control device 81) specified at timing;
If the specified result by the first specifying means is a predetermined specified result, the game times of the game times that are performed before the game times related to the special information specified by the first specifying means are determined. Special notifying means (holding notice in the effect control device 82) for performing special notice (holding notice) corresponding to the identification result of the destination specifying means by controlling the picture display means so that the stop mode becomes a predetermined special stopping mode. Function to execute the production setting process for
The stop mode determining means determines destination information so that the pattern stop mode becomes the special stop mode based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied, regardless of the specification result by the destination specifying unit. A function of executing an ineffective notice effect such as step S1023 by the effect control device 82),
The special notification means determines whether or not to execute the special notification based on the mode information determined by the destination determination means (performs processing such as steps S2101 to S2105 by the effect control device 82) A gaming machine characterized by having a function of

  According to the feature F1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the subject of the grant determination is a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. May be executed in Thereby, for the player, not only the game for confirming the result of determination of the acquisition of the special information acquired, but also when the plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, With respect to the later special information, a game of confirming or predicting the result when it is an object of grant determination according to the content of the special notification is added, and the game is diversified.

  Particularly in this feature, the mode information is determined so as to be in the special stop mode by the destination determination unit based on the establishment of the predetermined condition regardless of the specification result by the destination specification unit. In this case, whether or not to perform special notification is determined by the post-decision unit based on the aspect information. By adopting such a configuration, in the configuration in which the stop mode is determined at the start of the variation display of the game times, when the specification by the first specifying means is performed during the variation display, the game in which the variation display is being performed The special notification can be executed without changing the stop mode at the time. Thereby, the change of the variable display time and the local increase of the processing load due to the change of the stop mode can be suppressed, and the special notification can be suitably executed.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 81 ... Main control apparatus, 82 ... Production control apparatus, 100 ... Game board, 103 ... Game area, 115 ... Operation opening, 130 ... Center frame, 136a ... Detection sensor, 136b ... Detection sensor, 143 ... Back side ball path, 153 ... back side ball passage, 170 ... first movable accessory, 171 ... second movable accessory, 172 ... third movable accessory, 173 ... fourth movable accessory, 202 ... MPU, 212 ... display control device, 242 ... MPU, 243 ... ROM, 300 ... movable accessory device, 310 ... upper right movable accessory, 314a ... front side skeleton, 314b ... rear side skeleton, 320 ... movable accessory, 324a ... front side skeleton, 324b ... rear side skeleton 330, upper left movable part, 334a ... front side skeleton part, 334b ... rear side skeleton part, 340 ... lower left movable part, 344a ... front side skeleton part, 344b ... rear side skeleton part.

Claims (1)

Provided with a pair of movable objects that can be opened and closed,
Each movable accessory has a fan surface portion formed so as to spread toward the front side of the gaming machine when the movable accessory is in an open state,
The fan surface portion is configured to expand so that one end and the other end in the opening and closing direction are shifted in the front-rear direction in the open state, and folded so as to overlap in the front-rear direction in the closed state,
Each movable combination is arranged so that the position in the front-rear direction is the same, and when the movable combination is in the open state, a first specific region including a front end of the fan surface portion of one movable combination and And the second specific region including the rear end of the fan surface portion of the other movable accessory is configured to overlap in the front-rear direction ,
A pattern display means provided on the rear of the movable accessory and having a display screen for performing a predetermined display effect,
When the movable accessory is in the open state, the movable accessory is arranged to overlap the display screen in the front-rear direction, and light from the display screen is irradiated to the front side of the gaming machine through the fan surface portion. And
The fan surface portion is formed with a bent portion that becomes a starting point when folded in accordance with the switching from the open state to the closed state, and has different orientations on both sides in the opening and closing direction across the bent portion. A flat part is formed,
At least one of both the plateau, game machine, wherein said display screen and a non-parallel to Do Rukoto when the movable won game is in the said open state.

Images